Isis. PAL ZOGRAPHIGCAL soci PACS NEES OF MANUSCRIPTS AND INSCRIPTIONS (ORIENTAL SERIES) EDITED BY WILETAM WRIGHT, MA, LED, FELLOW OF QUEENS’ COLLEGE AND PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE, CORRESPONDANT DE LINSTITUT DE FRANCE, ete. Lonvon PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, Limiren, STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS 1875—1883 OF MANAGEMENT, 1873-1883. COMIN WAL Te 25, a E. A. BOND, E: W. vE G, BIRCH, Es J. W. BONE, Esq., B.A, F. *Rev, H. O. COXE, M.A., BoDLEy’s LIBRARIAN, OXFORD. .A., PRINCIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH MuSEUM, President. ., BRITISH MUSEUM Mons. L. DELISLE, DirEcToR oF THE NATIONAL LIBRARY, PARIS, MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTE. THE RIGHT REVEREND THE Lorp BISHOP or DURHAM, D.D. *Sir T. DUFFUS HARDY, Knt, D.C.L., DepuTy-KEEPER OF THE PUBLIC RECORDS, JAMES HILTON, Esq., F.S.A. *J. WINTER JON. oF *ALFRED KINGSTON, Esq. PuBLIC RECORD OFFICE. WILLIAM MASKELL, Esq, M.A, F.S.A. PROFESSOR J. RUSKIN, D.C.L., OxForD. V.P.S.A., PRINCIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH MUSEUM. E, J. L. SCOTT, Esq, M.A., AssISTANT-KEEPER OF THE MSS., BritisH MUSEUM. E. M. THOMPSON, Esq., F.S.A., KEEPER OF THE MSS., BRITISH MusEuM, Honorary Secretary. G. F. WARNER, Esq, M.A,, BRITISH MusEUM, Honorary Treasurer. ProFEssoR Dr. W. WATTENBACH, BERLIN. Proressor J. O. WESTWOOD, M.A., Oxrorp. W. ALDIS WRIGHT, Es PROFESSOR W. WRIGHT, LL.D., QUEENS’ COLL., CAMBRIDGE. *SiR M. DIGBY WYATT, Knr,, M.A,, F.S.A. ., LL.D., TRIN. COLL., CAMBRIDGE. [ Those whose names are marked with an asterisk have ceased to be Members by death or retirement. NOTICE. HE Facsimiles from Oriental MSS. and Inscriptions which are contained in this volume have én been issued by the Paleographical Society, under the editorship of Professor Wright, of Cambridge, during the years 1875-1883. It is much to be regretted that the scheme of fully illustrating Oriental Paleography has had to be abandoned while still so far from accomplishment; but, in face of the insufficient support which the enterprise has received, the Committee has been reluctantly compelled to bring the series of Facsimiles to a close. Fragmentary, however, as the work may be, it will be admitted that it is of no small scientific value. It is unique of its kind; and the scrupulous labour which Professor Wright has gratuitously bestowed upon its production, and which the members of the Society will thankfully acknowledge, is a sufficient guarantee of its usefulness in aid of Oriental Scholarship. TABLE OF PLATES. RICE GRICE GRICE: | GEICECEICE GE ICE} 1. Vardhamana, Commentary on the Ganaratna- mahodadhi. Sanskrit (Devanagari). Palm-leaf. A.D. 1229. 2. Vimalasarasvati, Rapamala. Sanskrit (Devanagari). Paper. A.D). 1380. 8. Govindaraja, Smritimafijar gart). Paper. A.D. 1410. 4. Gospels. Armenian (Uncials). Vellum. A.D. 1181. - Passport. Arabic (Naskhi), Papyrus. A.D. 750. Sanskrit (Devana- 6. “Al-Kasim "ibn Sallam, Gharibu ‘l-Hadith. Arabie (Kufic Naskhi). Paper. A.D. 866. 7. Diwan of “Aba Talib, ete. Arabic (Naskhi). Paper. A.D. 990. 9. Muwaffak “ibn “AI Persian (Kafic N -Harawi, Kitabu ‘l-Abniyah. khi). Paper. A.D. 1055-56. 10. Life of Laltbala. Ethiopie. Vellum. Cirea A.D. 1400. 11. Theophania of Eusebius. Syriac (Estrangéla). Vellum. A.D. 411. 12. Pentateuch. Samaritan (Hebrew text). A.D. 1362-63. 3. Ménachém ben Sarik, Machbéreth. Hebrew (Fr. shkénazi). Vellum. A.D. 1091. 4, The same work. Hebrew (Fr. Ashkénazi). Vellum. A.D, 1189. 5. Rashi on Baba Mési‘a. A.D. 1190. 6. Ashtasthasrika-prajiaparamita. Sanskrit (modified Kutila). Palm-leaf. A.D. 1008. 7. Chandragomi, Sishyalekha. Vellum. Hebrew (Oriental). Paper. Sanskrit (Devanagari). Palm-leaf. AT). 1084. 8, Sri-kalikacharya-kathanakam, Sanskrit (Jaina). Paper. A.D, 1404. 9. Genealogical work. Arabie (Kific). Vellum. (viiith cent.] iy likes Oo? Sian, Vellum. ete. A.D. 885. Arabic (Kifie Naskhi). 21. Gospel of 8. Luke. Arabic (Naskhi). Paper. A.D. 993. 22. Coins. Arabic (Kific). A.D. 640-1246. 2: Persian (Nasta‘lik). Paper. 24, Acts and “Abba Nob. Lthiopic. 29. Tombstone from “Aden. 32. Kalyanavarman, Sax 34, Patent of “Ahmad 37. The 36. Vellum. A.D. 1478-94, , 26. Fragments of a Tale (2). Papyrus. {Date uncertain.] . Basil on the Holy Spirit. Vellum. A.D. 5 Egyptian Aramaic. Syriac (Hstrangéla). 28. Pentateuch. Samaritan (Heb. and Arab.). Vellum. A.D, 1219. Hebrew. AD. 718 (2). . Mosheh ben Shém-tob, Sepher ham-Mishkal. [e- brew (Afr. Sépl AD. 1363-64, . Ashtasahasrika-prajhaparamita. Sanskrit (modified Kutila). Palm-leaf. A.D. 1015 avali. A.D. 1286. Paper. Sanskrit (Nepalese). Palm-leaf. 33. Kalachakra-tantra. Sanskrit (Bengali), Palm-leaf. A.D. 1446. ‘ibn Arabie 884. n "2-Zand, with auto- Arabic (Naskhi). Paper. (Kific Naskhi). Vellum. ’Abu '1‘Ala ’al-Ma‘a am, Kitabu “l-Kharaj. A.D. 1096. of ’al-Mubarrad. Arabie (Maghribi A.D. 1167. 3 Arabie askhi). Paper. Kamil Naskhi). Paper. 38. ‘Ibn Khallikin’s Biographical Dictionary, the author’s autograph. Arabie (Naskhi). Paper. A.D. 1257. 39. Pentateuch, Syriac (Estrangéla). Vellum. A.D. 464, 40. Former and Latter Prophets. Hebrew (Oriental . Hagiographa. . Diwan of ’al-Mutanabbi’. Arabie (Naskhi). . Gospels and Lives of Saints. i . Sidra Rabba. Aramaic (Mandaitic). 5. Talmud Yérishalmi. . Ashtasahasrika-y 31. The Kor'a . Epistles of S. Paul. Sephardi). Vellum. Hebrew (Germ, Ashkénazi). xiith or xiiith cent. Vellum. A.D. 1347. . Pistis Sophia. Coptie (Uncials). Vellum. (Date uncertain. } Arya-gandavyttha. Sanskrit (Nepalese). Palm- leaf. A.D. 1166. . Maharnava. Sanskrit (Sarada). Birch-bark. Table of the da characters. [xvith cent. ?] . Ta shi tseg pai do. Tibetan (Uchhen). Paper. {Date uncertain. ] . Ton phud la mai gyud pa dang rig dain gyud pai chhod:sprin zhug sho. Tibetan (Uchhen). Paper. (Date uncertain.] Paper. A.D. 1008. 48. ’Al-Wakidi, Kitabu ’l-Mag Arabie (Naskhi). Paper. A.D. 1169. 49. Poems of ami, ete. Persian (Naskhi and Nas- talk). Paper. A.D. 1410-11. 50. Sa‘di, Bostan. Persian (Nasta‘lik). Paper. A.D. 1629. 51. Gadla "Abau Kédusan. Zthiopic. Vellum. A.D. 1586. Syriac (Estrangéla and Jacobite Serta). Vellum, palimpsest. vith cent. and A.D. 850. Paper. A.D. 1735-36. 54, Pentateuch with Targum. Hebrew (Oriental). Vellum. xiith or xiiith cent. 5. ’Al-Harizi, Tachkémoni. Hebrew (African Sé- phardi). Paper. A.D. 1282. Hebrew (Ital. Ashkénazi). Vellum. A.D. 128 ramita. Sanskrit (Nepa- lese). Palm-leaf. [xiiith cent.] . Acharahga. Sanskrit (Jaina). Palm-leaf. A.D. 1291. . The Koran. Arabic (Kific). Vellum. [viiith cent. } . ‘Ibn “Abt Hurairah ’al-Farabi, Diwanu ‘l-Adab. Arabic (Naskhi). Paper. A.D. 9742 Arabie (Maghribi Naskhi). Vellum. A.D. 1254. Ethiopic. Vellum. A.D. 1378. 63. The Stele of Sakkarah. Egyptian Aramaic. 64. The Stele of Carpentras. xyptian Aramaie. (Date uncertain.] | 65. Inscription from Siah. Avamaie of the Hauran. | [Ist cent. B.C., late.] 66. New Testament. Syriac (Nestor. Hstrar Vellum. A.D. 768. 67. Prayers, ete. Aramaic (Mandaitic). Paper. | A.D. 1529-30. | 68. Sémak of R. Isaac of Corbeil. Hebrew (Fr. Ash- kénazi). Vellum. A.D. 1401. 69. Ganesa Daivajiia, Buddhivilasi Sanskrit (Ben- Paper. A.D. 1658. 70. Rigve Sanskrit (Nandinagari). Palm-leaf. [xvith cent. ?] 84. . Rashidu . The Koran. Arabie and Persian (Na . Bilingual Inscription from Palmyra. 76. The Annals of “Eliya bar Shinay . Former . Gospel of 8. Luke. . Pafichakara and Guhyavalivivriti. 2. Ashtasabdika. Jami‘u *t-Tawarikh. Arabic A.D. 1314-15 fa, the author's autograph. A.D. 1420-21. i). Paper. ‘d-Din, hi). Paper. *Al-Makrizi, ’al-Muks Arabie (Naskhi). Paper. iith cent.] Inscription from Cyprus. B.C. 254. Greek and Phoenician. J Palmyrene Aramaic. [A Syriac and Arabie (Jacobite Serta and Kifie Naskhi). Vellum. A.D. 1019? and Latter Prophets. ‘). Vellum. Hebrew (Gr. Ash- . Sélichoth. Hebrew (Gr. Vellum (partly Latin palimpsest). A.D. 1179. . Cabbalistie Works. Autograph of Elias Levita. Hebrew (Germ. Ashkénazi). Coptie (Uncials). Paper. A.D. 1515. Vellum. [Date uncertain] Sanskrit (Ben- A.D. 1198-99. (Bengal). Palm-leaf. San galt). Palm-leaf. (Date uncertain.] Ravanavaha. Sanskrit (Bengali). Palm-leaf. [Date uncertain. | . Muhammad ’ibn "Tbrahim ’an-Naisabiri, ’al-Mabsit. Arabic (Naskhi). Paper. A.D. 1109-10. ‘Tbn Khaldin, Tarjumanu ’l-‘Ibar. The author's autograph. Arabic (Naskhi). Paper. A.D. 1401? 85, Nasru ‘lab ‘ibn Muhammad, Kalilah wa-Dimnah. E m (Naskhi). Paper. A-D.1 86. Coins. Arabic ( khi). A.D. 1221-1819. 87. The Siloam Inscription. Hebrew. Circa B.C. 700. 88. Trilingual Inseription from Sardinia. Phoenician, Latin and Greek. Circa B.C. 160-150. 89. Pentateuch. Samaritan (Heb., Arab. and Samaritan Aramaic). Vellum. A.D. 12217. 90. Siphra. Hebrew (Fr. Ashkén Vellum. A.D. 1073. 91, Haphtaroth. Hebrew and Aramaic (South Arabian). Vellum. A.D. 1484. 92. Life of Onuphrius. Coptic (Uncials). Vellum. A.D. 979. 93. Paramesvara-tantra. Sanshvit (transitional Gupta). 100. 4, Ashtasah; . Book of Job. . Ibn ?Abi . Book of Ruth and the Song of Songs. -8. Palm-leaf. A.D. ka-p: nita. Sanskrit (modified Palm-leaf. Circa A.D. 1 Arabie (Kufie Nas Kutila). Vellum. [ixth cent.] ‘1 Ash‘ath, Kitabu ’I]-Ghadi wa ’l-Mugh- Arabie (Naskhi). Paper. A.D. 960. Hebrew and Arabie (Naskhi). Paper, A.D. 1004-5. Book of Exodus. Hebrew and Arabie (Naskhi). tadi. Paper. [xth cent.] . Gospels. Syriac (Nestorian Estrangéla). Vellwm. A.D. 600. Panegyric on “Abba Pisentius. a Coptie (Uncials). Vellum. A.D. 918. TABLE OF PLATES (CLASSIFIED). A. SEMITIC LANGUAGES. I. HEBREW, PHOENICIAN, AND SAMARITAN, A. Insorrptions :-— 87. The Siloam Inscription (Jerusalem). Cirea B.C. 700. 74, Phoenician Inscription (Cypri B.C. 254 88. Trilingual Inscription, Phoenician, La Greek (Sardinia). Cirea B.C. 160-150. 29. Tombstone from ‘Aden (8. Arabia), A.D. 718? B. Hesrew MSS. ww ram Square anp Rapprnio Cna- RACTERS :— a. Ashkenazi, French. 90. Siphra (Greece ?). Vellum. A.D. 1073. 13. Ménachém ben Sarak, Machbéreth (France). Vellum. A.D, 1091. 14, The same author and work (France). Vellum. A.D, 1189. 68. Isaac of Corbeil, Sémak (Italy ?). Vellum. A.D. 1401. B. Ashkéndzi, German. 41. Hagiographa (Germany). 79. Cabbalistic works. written at Rome. y. Ashkén Greek, 77. Former and Latter Prophets (Greece). D, 1105-6, ichoth (Greece ?). Vellum. A.D. 1179. 6. Ashkéndzi, Italian. 56. Talmid Yérishalmi (Rome). 1289. e. Oriental. 15. Rashi on Baba Mési‘a (Mosul ?). Paper. A.D. 1190. 54, Pentateuch, with Targiim (Babylonia or Persia). Vellum. ¢ Séphardi, A 55. ’Al-Harizi, Sepher Tachkémoni Africa). Paper, A.D. 2. 30. Mosheh ben Shém-tob, Sepher ham-Mishkal (Mostaghanem in Algiers). A.D. 1363-64. n. Séphardi, Oriental. 40. Former and Latter Prophets (Babylonia or Persia). Vellum. xiith or xiiith cent. 6. South Arabian. 91. Haphtaroth, with Targim (‘al-Yaman). Vellum. A.D. 1484. C. Samaritan Manuscripts :-— 28. Pentateuch, Hebrew and Vellum. A.D. 1219. 89. Pentateuch, Hebrew, Arabic (Damascus ?). Vellum. 12. Pentateuch, Hebrew (Damascus). 1362-63. Vellum. A.D. 1847. Autograph of Elias Levita, Paper. A.D. 1515. Vellum. 78. Sé Partly Latin palimpsest. Vellum. A.D, xiith or xiiith cent. ican. (Spain or Paper. Arabic (Palestine). and Samaritan A.D. 12217. Vellum. A.D. Il. SYRIAC AND OTHER ARAMAIC DIALECTS. A. Aramaic, E@yprian :— 63. The Stele of Sakkarah. B.C. 482. 64. The Stele of Carpentras. [Date uncertain.] 25, 26. Fragments of a Tale (?). Papyrus. [Date uncertain. | B. Aramaic or THE Havran :-— 65. Inscription from Siah. [1st cent. B.C., late.] C. D. TT. ARAMAIC, PALMYRE! 75. Inscription, Gre and Aramaic. A.D, 134. Aramaic, Manparric :— ete. (al. Paper. A.D. 1 53. Sidra Rabba. Syrrac Manuscripts :— 67. Prayers, Huwaiza in Khivzistan). Paper. A.D, 1735-36. 11. Theophania of Eusebius (Edessa). Estrangéla. Vellum. A.D. 411. 39. Pentateuch (Amid or Diyar-bekr), Estrangéla. Vellum. A.D. 464. 27. Basil on the Holy Spirit (mear Damascus). Estrangila. Vellum. A.D. 509. 99. Gospels (Béth-Nuhadra). Nestorian Estrangéla. Vellum. A.D. 600. 66. New Testament (Hédaiyab or Adiabene). Nes- Vellum. A.D. 768. 52. Gospels and Lives of Saints (S geld, vith cent.; Jacobite Sert torian Estrangéla. , ALD. Vellum, palimpsest. 76. Annals of "Eliya bar Shinaya (Nisibis or Nasi- bin ?). Arabic (author’s autograph?) and Syriac. Jacobite Serta. Vellum. A.D. 1019? ARABIC MANUSCRIPTS, TO WHICH THE PERSIAN MANUSCRIPTS SARILY SUBJOINED. ARE NECES- . Arapic MANUscRIPTS :— 19. Genealogical Work. Kijic. Vellum. {viiith cent. ] 59. The Kor’an. Kijic. Vellum. [viiith cent. } 5. Passport (Egypt). Naskht. Papyrus. A.D. 750. 95. Book of Job (Egypt?). Kijie Naskht. Vellum. {ixth cent.] 6. ‘Al-Kasim ‘ibn Sallam, Gharibu ‘l-Hadith. Kiijic Naskhi. Paper. A.D. 866. 34. Patent of “Ahmad ‘ibn Tilin (Egypt). Azyjie Naskht. Vellum. A.D. 868-884. 20. Lives of Saints, ete. (near Jerusalem). Kijie Naskht. Vellum. A.D. 885. 97. Exodus, Hebrew and Arabic. Naskhi. Paper. [xth cent.] 96. “Ibn *Abi ’l-Ash‘ath, Kitabu “l+Ghadi wa ’l- Mughtadi (Mosul). Naskhi. A.D. 960. 60. ‘Ibn ’Abi Hurairah ’al-Farabi, Diwanu ‘l-’Adab Naskhi. Paper. A.D. 974? Paper. (Samarkand 2). Diwan of “Abi Talib, ete. (Baghdad). Naskhz. Paper, A.D. 990. 21. Gospel of S. Luke (Egypt). Naskhz. Paper. A.D. 993. 98. Ruth and the Song of Songs, Hebrew and Arabic (Ramlah). Naskhi. Paper. A.D. 1004-5. 47. Diwan of ‘al-Mutanabbi. Naskhi. Paper. A.D. 1008. 35. “Abu ‘l-‘Ala ’al-Ma‘arri, Siktu ’z-Zand, with the autograph of ‘at-Tibrizt (Baghdad). Naskhz. Paper. A.D. 1082-83. 36. Yahya “ibn ‘Adam, Kitabu ‘l-Kharaj. Waskhi. Paper. A.D. 1096. 83. Muhammad ‘ibn “Ibrahim ’an-Nai i, ‘al-Mab- sit. Naskhi. Paper. A.D. 1109-10. 37. The Kamil of ‘al-Mubarrad (Spain ?). Magh- ribt Naskhi. Paper. A.D. 1167. | 48, *Al-Wakidi, Kitabu ‘l-Maghazi CAldJazirah in | Mesopotamia). Naskhz, Paper. A.D. 1169. 61. The Kor’an (North Africa ?). Maghriba Naskhi. Vellum. A.D, 1254. 38. ‘Ibn Khallikan’s Biographical Dictionary (al- Kahirah or Cairo). The author’s autograph. Naskhi. Paper. A.D, 1257. 71. Rashidu *d-Din, Jami‘u ’t-Tawarikh, Nashhz. Paper. A.D. 1314-15. 84. ‘Ibn Khaldin, Tarjumanu ‘lTbar (Egypt). | The author’s autograph. Naskht. Paper. | A.D. 1401? 72. Al-Makvizi, ’Al-Mukaffa (Egypt). The author's | autograph. Naskhi. Paper. A.D. 1420-21. 29, Arabic Coins. Kijic. A.D. 640-1246. 86. Arabic Coins. Naskhz, A.D. 1221-1819. B. Perstan Manuscrtp’ 8, 9. Muwaffak ‘ibn ‘Ali ‘al Kiyie Naskha. -Harawi, Kitabu ’l-’ Abni- A.D. 1055-56. yah. Paper. B. I. ARMENIAN. 4, Gospels (Trazarg in Cilicia). A.D. 1181. Unceials. Vellum. Il. PERSIAN. See under Arabic, A. III. B. Il. SANSKRIT MANUSCRIPTS, TO WHICH ARE ANNEXED THE TIBETAN. A. Sanskrit Manusoripts :— a. Transitional Gupta. 93. Paramesvara-tantra (Nepal). Pali-leaf. A.D. 857-8. B. Modified Kutila. 16. Ashtasahasrika-prajfiaparamita (Nepal). Palm- leaf. A.D. 1008. 31. Ashtasahasrika-prajfiaparamita (Nepal). Palm- leaf. A.D. 1015. 94, Ashtasahasrika-prajfiaparamita (Bengal). Palm- leaf. Circa A.D. 1020. y. Devanagari. 17. Chandragomi, Sishyalekha (Nepal). Palm-leaf. A.D. 1084. 1, Vardhamana, Commentary on the Ganaratna- mahodadhi (Rajputana?). Palm-leaf. A.D. 1229. 2. Vimalasarasvati, Ripamala (Western India ?). Paper. A.D. 1380. 3. Govindaraja, Smritimafijari (Western India). Paper. A.D, 1410. 6. Nepalese. 43. Pali-leaf. A.D. ya-gandavyiha (Nepal). 1166. 32. Kalyanavarman, Saravali (Nepal). A.D, 1286. Palm-leaf. Palm- t i-prajfiaparamita (Nepal). leaf. (:xitith cent. | 7 Avabie and Persian. Naskhz. 3. The Kor'an Paper. [xiith cent.] 85. Nasru ‘lah “ibn Muhammad, Kalilah wa-Dimnah (Khujandah in Ma wara ‘n-Nahr). Naskhi. Paper. A.D. 1259. 49. Poems of Nizami, ete. Naskhz and Nasta'lik. Paper. A.D. 1410-11. 93. Gulistan of Sa‘di (Fathpir in India). Nas- ta'lik. Paper. A.D. 1582. 50. Bostan of Sa‘di (Agra). Nasta‘lik. Paper. A.D. 1629. IV. ETHIOPIC MANUSORIPTS. 62. Epistles of S. Paul (Jerusalem). Vellum. A.D. 378. 10. Life of Lalibala. Vellum. Circa A.D. 1400. 24, Acts of Fasiladas and ‘Abba Nob. Vellum. A.D. 1478-94. bl. Gadla ’Abau Kédasan or Lives of the holy Fathers. Vellum. A.D. 1586. NON-SEMITIC LANGUAGES. e. Bengali. 81. Pafichakara and Guhyavali-vivriti. A.D. 1198-99. Palm-leaf. (Sh 33. Kalachakra-tantra (Magadha or Bihar). Palm-leaf. A.D. 1446. 82. Ashtasabdika. Palm-leaf. [Date uncertain. | Ravanavaha or Setubandha. Palm-leaf. [Date uncertain. ] 69. Ganesa Daivajiia, Buddhivilasini. Paper. A.D. 1658. € Jaina. 58. Acharaiga or Acharasitra (Western India). Palm-leaf. A.D. 1291. ikachirya-kathanakam (Western India). n. Nandinagar. 70. Rigveda (Southern India). cent. ?] 6. Sarada. Palm-leaf. (xvith 44, Maharnava (Kashmir). Birch-bark. [xvith cent. ?] B. Tiseran Manuscripts :— 45. Ta shi tseg pai do. Uchhen. Paper. [Date uncertain. | 46. Ton phud la mai gyud pa dang rig dzin gyud pai chhod sprin zhugs s‘ho. Uchhen. Paper. {Date uncertain. | IV. COPTIC MANUSCRIPTS. 42. Pistis Sophia. Tneials. Vellum. (Date uncertain. } 80. Gospel of S. Luke. Uneials. Vellum. [Date uncertain. | 100. Panegyric on ’Abba Pisentius. Uncials. Vellum. A.D. 918. 92. Life of Onuphrius. Uneials. Vellum. A.D. 979: Alphabet of the Sarada Characters, with Plate XLIV. Table of Ancient Arithmetical Figures, with Plate LX XIV. The Hebrew Alphabet, with P! late LXXXVII. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. Prats I. The leaves, 464 and 47a, correspond to p. 69, 1. 11—p. 70, 1. 6, and p. 70, Il. 6-16, in Professor Hegelins printed text (London, 1879). A comparison with plates LVII]. and XVII. shows that the as some of the general features of the Jaina hand. X. This manuscript is probably somewhat older than we had supposed, the writing being almost with that of pl. LXIL. identice Prats XVI. See Bendall’s Catalogue of the Buddhist Sanskrit MSS. in the University Library, Cambridge (1883), where the last leaf is reproduced (pl. I. 3), and the colophon more fully read, pp. 3, 4, and Histor. Introd., p. v From this it appears that two kings, Nirbhaya and Rudradeva, were co-regents in A.D. 1008. Compare also Bendall’s paper in the Verhandlungen des fiinften internationalen Orientalisten-Conyresses gehalten zu Berlin, Il. ii, p- 194.—In 1. 18, for “ancient Bengali” read “modified Kutila.” See pl. XCIV., and Bendall’s Catalogue, Pa Introd., p. xxiv. Prare XVIL, 1. 2. For “Chandra-gomipada” read ‘‘Chandragomin.” See Bendall’s Catalogue, pp. 31, 180, and W. Wassiliew, Der Buddhismus, pp. 52, 207.—L. 10. For “ancient Bengali” read in Nepal.” early Devanagari, as used Puare XVIII. For some notes on the peculiarities of Jaina writing see Weber's Bhayavati (Abhandl. der Berl Akad. for 1865, pp. 883-4) and Jacobi’s Kalpa-sitra (Abhandl. fiir d. Kunde d. Morgenlandes, Bd vii, p. 18, note). Prates XXY. and XXVI. On this document compare the description of pl. LXIV., and see Clermont-Ganneau Origine Perse des Monuments Araméens d'E sgypte, in the Revue Archéologique, 1878-79, t. xxxvi, p. 93 sqq., t. xxvii, p- 21 sqq., especially p. 26. Puate XXIX. Several scholars, including Professor Huting of Strassburg, think that this inscription is of a later period than that to which we have assigned it. They suppose that at least one hundred has been omitted in stating the date. A. Contr. [11]29 would be = A.D. 818, A. Contr. [12]29 = A.D. 918. Any later date seems to be out of the question. Prate XXXI. On the historical points involved see Bendall’s Catalogue, pp. 151-2, and the Histor. Introd., p. v. Compare above pl. XVIL—L. 21. Hodgson’s Bhanjin-mola is merely Nepalese writing of the xvth or xvith cent. Prare XXXII, 1. 15 sqq. See Bendall’s Catalogue, Palacogr. Introd., p. xxiii, where doubts are raised as om between N » pe dominant feature to the connex palese and Uri for want of proof of communication between Nepal and Orissa, and partly because the lasted there only from the xiith to the xvth cent. referred to was never universally prevalent in Nepal and Prarr XLUI,, 1. 7. Ananda-deva reigned circa A.D. 1161-82. See Bendall's Catalogue, Chronolog. Appendix I. Prare XLIY., note. On Kutila see the des on pl. XXXII. a the note ription of pl. XCIV.; and on the position of Uri Pratt XLY., 1. 15. The British Museum possesses a copy of a Tibetan book with a date, printed at Peking, A.D. 1735. Puarr LY. See Iudae Harizii Macamae P. de Lagarde studio et sumptibus editae, p. 71, 1. 1l—p. 72, 1. 1. Parva LYIL, Il. 13-15. See Bendall’s Catalogue, p. 124. Prater LXIII. On a different, and ve ift 'y plausible, explanation of the mysterious word hs der Deutschen Morgenliindischen Gesellschaft, Ba x3 mi and the preceding xv (1881), p. 442 sq. numerals, see Praetorius in the Pirate LXXIY. See the Corpus Inscriptionum Semiticarum, t. 1., fasc. 1, pp. 109-112. Pratt LXXXVII. See also Kauty d. D. M. G., Bd xxx sch in the Zeitschrift des Deutschen Palaestina-Vereins, Bd y, Heft 3, p. 2 i (1s Guthe in the where a local error in our description is corrected. Prats LXXXVIII. See the Corpus Inseriptionum Semiticarum, t. 1., fasc. 2, pp. 187-190. Prarer LXXXIL—Sansxrir anp Prannit. 1. Campripcr. Universiry Lisrary. App. MS. 1654. 2.—[Date uncerTArn.] 2. Cortection or Dr. RAsenpravata Mirra, or Carcutra.—[DatEe UNCERTAIN. il, l/ | VHE Ashtasabdikd, a work on grammar, of the school of Panini, as may be seen from its termi- nology and from the frequent citations of that author. On palm-leaves; about 13% in. by 2; five lines on a page. Written by a scribe called Jatidhara Sarman, at a village the name of which appears to be Rashauli, in Samyat 452. The date is expressed in an abbreviated form, # [or a] i< sa, and the era to which it refers is doubtful. As this manuscript forms part of the collection acquired by Dr. D. Wright at Kathmandu, it might naturally be assumed that the cha ali writing, for 7 or n indifferently, should be read as ind that the whole expression should be interpreted to mean’ “ Nepal Samvat 452°= A.D. 13: Nor are the uinst this view; for we can cite at least one clear case acter which stands, as usual in Beng n; peculiarly Bengali features of the handwriting decisive as of a manuscript written in Nepal in a hand precisely similar to that current in Bengal at the same period (see Bendall's Catalogue of the Buddhist Sanskrit MSS. in the University Library, Cambridge, pp. xxii. 182, and plate II. 2). On the other hand, in Dr. Rajendralala Mitra’s Notices of Sanskrit Mi vol. v., pl. 8, we find this same abbreviation referred, with great verisimilitude, in the case of a manuscript similar in handwriting to that before us, to the era of Lakshmana Sena, the first year of which was A.D. 1107 (see Journal of the Asiatic Society of ham’s Survey, vol. xvi., Introd., p. vi). On this supposition the date of our Bengal, vol, x\vii., p. 399, and Cunnin, manuscript would be A.D. 1559. Unfortunately, the execution of the lithographs which illustrate Dr. R. M.’s phical conclusions. We would call Notices is not such as to warrant us in basing upon them any exact palae attention in particular to vol. v., pl. 1, which refers, possibly by an oversight, to a manuscript which is not described in the text of this volume or (apparently) a other of the series. The date reads »[*?]iz || wa, Jos, The era is stated by the editor to be the Saka; but no explanation is given of the character immediately preceding the abbreviation 2: (Samrat), which in the lithograph closely resembles the ambiguous n or / under discussion. Whichever date be finally accepted, when further materials for accurate generalisation as to Bengali handwriting are placed before us, the present manuscript forms an interesting link between the writing of plate LXXXI. and that of plates XXNIII. and LXIX. The plate represents f. 35d. Punctuation, ete. The dandas have a peculiar twist | Initial i and w are nearly the same as in modern Ben- on in 1, 1, fourth letter, | gali (though without the flourish at the top); and so are | the letters ch, #, t, d, dh, n, p, bh, y, and sh. The form to the left—The mark of de is of a kind common also in Nepalese manuscripts. Writing. The general character of the writing is | of Z varies; compare jalam in 1, 1 with the same word much less bold and legible than in plate LXXXI. It | in. 8, where it resembles » (see the description of plate has all the angularity of the Bengali type, as exem- | LXIX.). The letter d, which we called transitional in plified in the letters &, v, and r, when single (shaped the description of plate LXXXL, is here of the usual as in plate LXIX.) or superseript. The shape of initial | Bengali type; and /, which was there pure Devanagari, a is rather peculiar, being neither pure Devanagari nor shows as yet only slight symptoms of change. The closely resembling any Bengali form as yet noticed. anusvara is written above the line, as in Deva jalam suddhafm] vahati || at hra L ah sa sa [deleted] varna” [Panini, vi. 1, 101] iti dirghah | kasyah nadyah abhyah stribhyah srinomi [sic] |j vam cha” (Pan, ha kabhyam stribhyam dharma rinomi || vii, 8, 114] | kasyah striya dharmam idam | “ ani (2) chapa” [Pan. vii. 3, 105] ity etvam || ay-adesah kayoh dhanam | “ami sarvanamna [read *nah] sut” [Pan vii. 1, 52] iti sudagamah | atvabandhalopah | kasam strmam bhartarasya devadattah [read bhartary devad? ?] | 8) (83) mnibhya” (Pan. vii. 8, 116] iti heram avriddhih | hrasvah | kasyam nadyam jalam suddha[m] vahati | etvam yoh prativasati sobha | pa-karalopah | kasu strishu prativasati t “neram nadya- (4) lakshmih | “ pafichamyas tasi” [ vy. 4, 44] na pumyvad bhavah | chapanivrittih | “ku tiho[h]” “ kvatiti (Pan. vii. 2, 104-5] ku-bhavah kutah | sarvam purvvavatah [read vat] | “saptamyastat” [Pan. v. 3, 10, wrongly quoted| kutra kada karhi sarvam pirvavat | napumsake ki- (5) masabdat svad: svamor napumsakad” [Pan. vii. 1, 23] iti svamor luk | vibhakter abhayat kadeso bhavati | kim vadati brahmano [? jyam || dvivachanadau kim ah ka iti ka- nh | anena sarvanama uchyate || “ [The letter % (very faint), at the upper left-hand corner of the page, denotes apparently that the case-suffixes of the dative, ablative, genitive and locative, ne, nasi, fas, ni, are under discussion.] Tue Ravanaviha or Setubandha, a poem ascribed to Prayarasena. On palm-leaves; about 133 in. by 2; five lines in a page. The leaves are numbered from 1 to 68, but there are really 69, as the scribe has wrongly repeated the number 2. This work has been edited by Professor Dr. S. Gold- 1 the plate corresponds with Book vii., 456-51, of ge i schmidt (Strassburg, 1880), and the pa his edition. The notes, or commentary, are in a different ink from the text, and the writing is more modern. They are usually placed on the margins, but sometimes between the lines, and do not extend beyond page 65. ‘As to the date of this manuscript, Dr. Rajendralala Mitra writes as follows, in the Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, no, vii., July 1880, p. 120:— ©The most important’ circumstance connected with the codex under notice is its date. This is Prakrit thus: siri lakkhanassa amadema suvahare raja veviie | posammi-siiranandasi supakshe chadamasa dinsvahe le to me; but the doskhamvissdgame likhitast vaninatheneti. Two of the words of this extract are not intell purport of the whole is clear enough :—it means that the manuscript was completed by one Vaninatha, on Monday, the 16th of the waxing moon in the month of Pausha (Jit, when the sun sojourned in the constellation Pushya) of the year of the king Lakshmana 102. The figures of the year are given in three words, dosa kha vissa, the first of which, dosa, means ‘ the arms’ the second, kha, ‘the sky’=a cypher; and the third, vissa, ‘ the wniverse’=1. They have, according to the usual rule, to be read from the right side. I have elsewhere noticed that the era of Lakshmana Sena begins from the year 1106 (Journal, vol. xlvii., p. 399), and that the date therefore corresponds with A.D. 1208.” This statement the learned writer subsequently reconsidered; for in his Notices of Sanskrit MSS., vol. v., pt. ii, pp. 800-1, where a lithographed facsimile is given (pl. v.), he furnishes a transcript which differs in d into supakkhe, and vanindthena is altered several points from that just quoted. The impossible swpakshe is corr into vdninathena, which ought, however, according to the facsimile, to be vantnathena. The word chadamasa appears as chaitdaghasra. Before considering further details of writir of Miinster, believes Dr. F ala Mitra’s (1) the difficulty of the expression “the 16th of the waxing moon,” for the 16th of the month would be the first we think it well to place on record that Professor Dr. Jacobi, islation to be untenable on several astronomical grounds; viz. ajendral, day of the waning moon; (2) that the explanation “when the sun sojourned in the constellation Pushya” is untenable, (a) because in Prakrit “in Pushya” would be expressed by pisammi, not posammi (which is equivalent to paushe), and (b) because at the moment of the full moon of Pausha, the moon herself is in the constellation Pushya, and the sun is 180° off, at the diametrically opposite part of the ecliptic; (3) that the 16th of Pausha, A.D. 1208, fell, not on a Monday, but on a Wednesday. ‘The transcription itself, however, requires further correction, the result of which is that the date 102 must be given up. Indeed, even according to the editc showing, it could hardly be right, for visva (in Prakrit vi and Roth sub voc., and Burnell’s South Indian Palaeography, 2nd edit., p. 78). Our principal emendations are these: (1) The somewhat ambiguous character which Dr. R. M. transcribes skha, certainly does not contain kh at all. *s own ) seems never to mean 1, but always 13 (see Buéhtlingk It is found expressing mba, su or sva (see the plate, Il, 1 and 3), and mu, but is distinctly different from 4h, which never has a top. (2) Whatever be the value of the rather doubtful letter rendered y in ‘agame, there is clearly a long a between it and the following m; so that, if the character be really g (as seems most probable), the end of the compound word is not *ayame but °yame=grame, in which ease the supposed date would be in reality the name of the village in which the manuscript was written. We also observe that Dr. R. M. has vitiated ibs transcript by repeatedly mistaking the form of initial a, firstly for sw (for the real sw see 1. 1 of the plate, in the word livase). The word which ruchi, i. 9); and si supakkhe written on the fourteenth lunar day of the bright half of the month), These remarks suffice to show that the interpretation of this colophon is a problem the solution of which remains with those who have access to the manuscript itself suanta), and secondly for nsv (the word which he gives as dinsvahe being really diahe precedes this last is surely neither chadamasa nor chaiidaghasra, but chatiddahi (see Vi should be read siapakkhe = sitapakshe (so that the manuscript was Writing. The forms of the letters in this manuscript are almost, if not entirely, identical with those of no. 1. [The Committee haye to thank Dr. Rajendralala Mitra, the owner of the manuscript, and the Rey. Dr. Hoernle, the Philologi the best of four that were most kindly placed at their disposal. The extreme faintness of the al Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, for this photograph, bluish-grey ink, and the damaged state of the manuscript, rendered it impossible to obtain better impressions, and the photograph of the last page is almost. illegible.] PALHOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY. ORIENTAL SERIES. The following titles are to be pasted over the first and third lines of the lettering of Plate LX XXII. :— ASHTASABDIKA.—IDATE UNCERTAINI RAVANAVAHA.—IDATE UNCERTAIN 2 Tue Ravanaviha or Setubandha, a poem ascribed to Prayarasena. On palm-leayes ; about 134 in. by 2; five lines in a page. The leaves are numbered from 1 to 68, but there are really 69, as the ae scribe has wrongly repeated the number 4 This work has been edited by Professor Dr. 8. Gold- schmidt (Strassburg, 1880), and the passage in the plate corresponds with Book vii., 456-51, of his edition. The notes, or commentary, are in a different ink from the text, and the writing is more modern. They are usually placed on the margins, but sometimes between the lines, and do not extend beyond page 65. As to the date of this manuscript, Dr. Rajendralala Mitra writes as follows, in the Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, no. vii., July 1880, p. 120:— riven in “The most important’ circumstance connected with the codex under notice is its date. This is jie | posammi-siranandasi supakshe chadamasa dinsvahe | Prakrit thus: siri lakkhanassa amadema suvahare raja wu Two of the words of this extract are not intelligible to me; but the purport of the whole is clear enough :—it means that the manuscript was completed by one Vaninatha, on Monday, the 16th of the waxing moon in the month of Pausha (lit, when the sun sojourned in the constellation Pushya) of doskhamvissagame likhitast waninatheneti. the year of the king Lakshmana 102. The figures of the year are given in three words, dosa kha vissa, the first of =a cypher; and the third, vissa, ‘the universe’=1. it side. I have elsewhere noticed that the era of which, dosa, means ‘the arms’=2; the second, kha, ‘ the s They have, according to the usual rule, to be read from the ri; Lakshmana Sena begins from the year 1106 (Journal, vol. xlvii., p. 399), and that the date therefore co onds with A.D. 1208.” This statement the learned writer snhseanently reeansidarad + far in hie Mats Coon eV Aakers ree } [The Committee have to thank Dr. Rajendralala Mit Dr. Hoernle, the Philological Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, for this photograph w “mat A foleh ? the owner of the manusc ipt, and the Rey. the best of four that were most kindly placed at their disposal. The extreme faintness of the bluish- better impressions, and the photograph of the last page is almost illegible.] ey ink, and the damaged state of the manuscript, rendered it impossible to obtain PALMOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY. ORIENTAL SERIES. Wiru the present Part VIII. of the Series are issued the following :— Title-page. Notice. Table of Plates. . 3 in the classified order which should be followed in binding. Additions and Corrections. Reyised Description of Plate LXXXII. to supersede the letterpress formerly issued. Revised Titles for Plate LX XXII. Messrs. W. Crowes & Sons (Limited), Duke Street, Stamford Street, S.E., will undertake bind the Series on the following terms :— Ww wo Half-morocco, cloth sides, marbled edges, joints guarded . . £: Whole morocco, % 3 to dislak 33, PALAZOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY. COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT. E. A. BOND, Esq., KEEPER OF THE MSS., British MusEuM, President. W. Dr G. BIRCH, Esq. British MUSEUM. J. W. BONE, Esq. B.A, F.S.A. Rev. H. O. COXE, M.A., BopLey’s LIBRARIAN, OXFORD. Mons. L. DELISLE, Director or THE NATIONAL LIBRARY, PARIS; MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTE. Sir T. DUFFUS HARDY, Knt., D.C.L.,, Deputy KEEPER OF THE PUBLIC RECORDS. J. WINTER JONES, Esq. PRincIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH MUSEUM, Rey. PRoressor LIGHTFOOT, D.D., Canon or St. PAUL’s, WILLIAM MASKELL, Esq. E, M. THOMPSON, Esq., AssIST. KEEPER OF THE MSS., BRITISH MusEuM, Hon. Sec. PROFESSOR Dr. W. WATTENBACH, BERLIN. W. ALDIS WRIGHT, Esq, M.A, TRIN. COLL., CAMBRIDGE. PROFESSOR W. WRIGHT, LL.D., QuEENS’ COLL,, CAMBRIDGE. Sir M. DIGBY WYATT, KnrT, M.A, F.S.A. FACSIMILES OF ANCIENT MANUSCRIPTS. ORIENTAL SERIES. Part I, EDITED BY WILLIAM WRIGHT, LLD., PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE. CONTENTS. 1. Ganaratnamahodadhi. Sanskrit. A.D. 1229. 9. Rupamala. Sanskrit. A,D. 1380. 8. Smritimanjari. Sanskrit. A.D.1410. 4. Gospels. Armenian. A.D.1181. 5. Passport. Arabic. A.D. 750. 6. Garibu ‘I-Hadit. Arabic. A.D. 866. 7. Poems. Arabic. A.D.990. 8,9. Kitabu ‘l-’Abniya. Persian. A.D. 1055-6. 10. Life of Lalibala. thiopic. A.D. 1400-1434. 11. Theophania of Eusebius. Syriac. A.D, 411. 12. Pentateuch. Hebrew~-Samaritan. A.D. 1362-3. 18. Machbereth. Hebrew. A.D. 1091. 14. ditto. ditto. A.D. 1189. 15. Rashion Baba Mési‘a. Hebrew. A.D. 1190. PHOTOGRAPHED AND PRINTED IN FACSIMILE By SPENCER, SAWYER, BIRD ann CO. London: PRINTED BY GILBERT & RIVINGTON, 52, ST. JOHN’S SQUARE, CLERKENWELL, anv 28, WHITEFRIARS STREET, EC. 1875. [All rights reserved. | — uanliene cena neater enn aint lei “ZIL LIBMSNVS ‘ALGIN0§ SILWISW TVAOY ‘672i av HOVGOHVWVNLVYVNVD ‘VNYNVHOYVA sala aon ee Ian BwI)e2 ain iene) Prats I.—Sansxrir. RoyaL Asratic Socrery. Sanskrit 112.—A.D. 1229. COMMENTARY by Pandit Vardhamana on his own work entitled Ganaratnamahodadhi, a A grammatical treatise of great value and rarity. On palm-leaf, about 173 178 leaves, with 4 or 5 lines in a page. Probably written in Rajputana; dated “ Samyak (sic) inches by 23; 1151, in the year virodhi of the Jupiter-cycle.” This latter specification seems to show that the Saka, and not the Vikramaditya, era is intended ; so that the date would be A.D. 1229 (and not A.D. 1094). For a Sanskrit MS. this is a very high antiquity, since the learned Rajendralila Mitra says on [ty Xoo Oe of Sanskrit MSS., no. is a Report inserted in his Notic “The oldest palm-leaf manuscript I haye seen bears date Samvat 1189=A.C. 1182, and the oldest paper manuscript as aforesaid is Samyat 1367=A.C. 1310; but such records are exceedingly rare, and the general run is from 150 to 250 years.” Ruling. The text is bounded by double vertical lines 1. 1, col. 2, however, we find # ho, and in 1. 4, col. 2, on the right and left of each column. near the end, w dhye, as well as in 1. 6, col. 2, near the Writing. Devanagari, not differing much from that end, ¥ ple, according to the usual method of writing in vase TAv Northern: Tadia even gone cen tasiee lator | these diphthongs. The diphthongs a and aw are formed like e and 0, with the addition of an upper stroke, as in Forms of letters. Observe initial in iti, 1. 2, col. 2; ~ = 1. 3, col. 1, near the end, rat shthaw. The avagraha L 9, col. 2 (t d initial o in ofa”, 1.9, col. 1 ‘ : “ . 9, col. 2 (twice); and initial o in ohan, 1. 9, col. 1. . eae & aie (ty ) 5 a Mi) z has a slightly peculiar form in 1. 2, col. 1, near the When not initial, ¢ is usually represented by an upright | middle, and 1. 7, col. 1, near the beginning, viz. ¢ yang . 7, col. 1, nez g g, Viz. &. stroke before the consonant which it follows in sound, Anusvara is either a dot or a circlet, as in 1. 1, col. 1 as ti fe; and o by two strokes, one before and the | at the beginning, namti gachchhamti. other after the consonant, as tat zo. At the end of figures in red circles on the right and lef [The Committee have to acknowledge the assistance of Professor Cowell of Cambridge, Professor ggeling of Edinburgh, and Dr. Rost, Librarian of the India Office, in describing this plate and plates II. and III.] "9991 LIMMSNVS ‘AYVHAIT 301440 VICNI ‘oselav = “WIVWYdNd ‘ILVASVYVSVIVINIA REET bib BL) pls ee BB Bub dab bn |b) Be nihs Ry ewe dV WIE Mie E Es oye Wp pte Us Ue Hye = Ma ee ee eee pobier Seegpinr EE Dae) wit 2) Gr tb B yy) iz pe dit [EUnet [heb la le Eb) oP he SE a VE eB Un 2y Dv U6 Eye ih) Geese Ye [v) S31 we Ue Ballo Sh Tee thee Be ib EYE hae HL Uns LY 1B) fa lke Us =ha A 1B 2) Wp & ELBE 2.2) Db) ©) 2) 9) WUE Ich WN NS Pee {IB 9), apy 2iPb Vw be BYE 3) hee ibe |) te 2 13) 21GE WAL) pp BEM R Je] UPL T tLe UND) Ee Ey) ee Ue by |b) = yjSb>)Po Spb be by yey ig) LoS PELE ana | {Bi hy Fe e\2) lh) Sa ke by, $3 bya nl Pe telewtegnes) Pratt IL.—Sansxnrir. InpiA OFrrice Liprary. Te Rupamala, a grammatical work by Vimalasé with from 8 to 11 lines in a page. Western India, and dated Samyat 1487= Ruling. Double lines bounding the text on the right and left. Writing. Devanagari, not deviating widely from the ordinary type. Forms of Letters. The diphthong e is usually expressed by a stroke before its consonant, as jt me; and o by Written “here in the ancient city, D. 1380. Sanskrir 1666.—A.D. 1380. rasyati. On paper, about 9} in. by 88; 112 leayes, * probably somewhere in a stroke before and another after, as mm go; but the ordinary forms also occur, as @ fve, 1. 3, near the near the end. beginning, & ¢ho, 1. 2 The diphthongs ai and au are formed by the addition of an upper stroke, as ta dhai, 1. 8, middle, wit nau, ibid. Anusvara is cither a dot or a circlet, as in 1. 1, towards the end, dambheh \ didambhi. d ty 4 pa on) RE Mee: eee = Aqeaas ae ardara Aram GOVINDARAJA, SMRITIMANJARI. A.D. 1410. INDIA OFFICE LIBRARY, SANSKRIT 1736, Prats III.—Sansxnrir. Iypra Orrice Liprary. Sanskrit 1736.—A.D. 1410. 152 leaves, with from 9 to 11 lines in a i bee Smritimanjari, a work on religious observances and penances, compiled by Goyindaraja, the son of Bhattamadhaya. On paper, about 9} in. by 3%; page. Samvat 1467= A.D. 1410. Ruling. Single or double lines bounding the text on the right and left. ri, similar to that in plate IT. Writing. Devan Forms of Letters. The diphthongs ¢ and o have both Written in the yillage of Vasurayi (in Western India), by Pandit Nilakantha, and dated forms, as in plate II.; c.g. ra pe, # fe; mm go, m go. The other diphthongs are * ai, aw, as in @ raw at the end of 1.2. The anusvara is indicated by a dot more usually than by a circlet (Il. 17, 19). Valsy art “pusgk crnrune ae SUUPSEOSCUAL puu © OFU2R& wrerusr iby EVvuusyvenr a CUT QOLU, Cr BUS Nev TTr SEE CPP LIPS by bFQTTLDb peaieen SER” ermreuD TPF ESC PORE- grime pst enna brorreuuew”; rat PAT UE pH ULleeesrcuspy es Luar cup, Puy 30 LP OUaSsE VE 9 Su epuy te IQUCPCRRUET, PUUPSCUP OT! Capt nF >-UP ure urwEe pope pst: SOLE ULES 7 THE GOSPELS. A.D. 1181. BRIT. MUS., ORIENTAL 8l. Puate TY.—ARMENIAN. 3UM. ORIENTAL 81.—A.D 1181. British Mu fe four Gospels, preceded by the Epistle of Eusebius to Carpianus and the Eusebian Canons, and accompanied by a harmony at the foot of each page. The Ammonian Sections and Eusebian Canons are noted on the margins. On yellum; small quarto, about in. by 6%; 377 leaves. Written in the convent of Trazarg, in Cilicia, by a scribe named Thoros, A.M. 6606, A. Armen. 630, A.D. 11[81]. The plate contains S. John, ch. vii. 832—37. Gatherings. Usually of twelve leayes, though ten, | each Gospel is of a large size, and variously coloured | and flourished. The first few words are written in large | fourteen and sixteen also occur, and the last has only ight. They are signed with letters on the verso of the capitals, gilt over red ink, on a dark blue back-ground last leaf. (see ff. 9 a, 112 a, 181 a, 290 a). The beginning of each Gospel is surmounted by an ornamental head-p resembling those in contemporary Greek manuscripts, with figures of birds, ete. A portrait of the Evangelist Ruling. On one side only, with a dry point, guided | 4 a 5 . f | by prickings on the margin. The text is bounded by | single vertical lines. x 2 = pikes js | is prefixed. The Epistle of Eusebius to Carpianus and Writing. Capitals; occasional marks of aceentuation the Canons are enclosed in frames, composed of pillars, or intonation, in red. | supporting entablatures, which are surmounted by figures Ornamentation. The initials of the capitula are large, | of birds and other ornaments, the whole being richly those of the sections smaller. Both are ornamented, coloured. At the beg the former being painted of various colours, and gilt; abbat of the convent of the latter written with red ink gilt. The first letter of | manuscript, which was written by his order. nning uzarg, offering to our Lord this s a picture of Samuel, the [The Committee haye to acknowledge the help of the Rev. S. Baronian of Constantinople in describing this plate.] "S] TVLNAIYO “SNIN “LIHS “OSL ‘A'V “LYOdSSVd JIGVHV Prats V.—Arapic. British Museum. Orzenran 15.—A.D. 750. PERMIT, granted in the month of Rabi I., A.H. 133 (7 Oct.—5 Noy., A.D. 750), by Hadim, the freedman of ‘Abu Musa, and Sabib ’ibn , the governors of the district of Munf or Memphis under ‘Abd ’al-Malik ‘ibn Yazid, the ‘Amir of Egypt, to a Copt, whose name is now scarcely legible, from a place called Dair ‘Abi Hirmis, or the Convent of ’Aba Hirmis, allowing him to work at ‘al-Fustat (Old Cairo) till the end of the month of Rabi‘ II. (4 Dec.). On papyrus, about 8 in. by 8%; much mutilated on both margins, but especially on the left. The name of the scribe was “Ibrahim. See Mémoires de l’Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres, t. x., p. 65; Journal Asiatique, t. ix., 1826, p. Silvestre, Paléographie Universelle, 1°” partie, Paris, 1841, écritures Arabes, pl. 1, and f. 192 verso; Description des A ntiquités composant la Collection de feu M. A. Raifé, par F, Lenormant, Paris, 1867, p. 53, no. 438 bis; Catal. Codd. MSS. Orientt. qui in Museo Britannico asseryantur : pars secunda, Codices Arabicos amplectens, p. 760, no. MDcL. Writing. A rather inclegant Nashi, entirely destitute the line, as in Ls) and blh.Wb, 1. 5; at other times not, of diacritical points. as in p>, 1.2, and Jie, 1.7, The form of 3 in 2, 1. 5, Forms of Letters. Observe the final ) of —)\) and is peculiar and exaggerated. The long vowel @ is occa- Aus[la), 1. 8, as compared with the final J of Joo, 1.5, | sionallynot expressed, as in WAS, 1. 2, Juol and Ob, 1.6, or J>¥I, 1. 8. Final | is sometimes prolonged below for WUS, oh, wow. pe crest alll ee) 4 Lyell gel] eee oh ey wo is) a pe gy SS Ide] 9 fal) Ladle. 4 hufley) Cade BS GIS Oop op Gl ape] 3 [he] 3395 oye Umte® site? Sel eye ONE stew Vel alae] 4 Meea es aaycore ee re neers [xe] > § blew Jrar st Lol 5 [aNlely galdd], 8 Bs LAD! ap, ah GH) LN allel] 6 FIM Md Lo ya2 WS alll al ad Sle Gye aid fad] 7 Le 3] platLel 8S Lels 3 SoM le] 8 Roby ey Hs] Ku Je [a2] 9 1 In the name of God, the compassionate, the merciful. P 2 This is a permit from Hadim, the freedman of ‘Abu Musa, and Sabib ’ibn , [the two governors of the ‘Amir] : ; 8 ‘Abd ’al-Malik ’ibn Yazid oyer the district of Munf (Memphis), to Flbik W—kr (or W—fr), having a grizzled beard, ee 4 stout, of a clear complexion, with moles on his face, an inhabitant of Dair Abi Hirmis in the district [of Munf}. f ee 5 We allow him to work at ’al-Fustat with his family (?) . : tots ene ine 6 [And] we grant him leave till the end of the month of Rabi‘ II., in the year 133. 7 [And] whosoever meets him of the officials of the ‘Amir,—may God prosper him !—let him not treat him, until ie ie 8 the expiry of this period, otherwise than well. And Ibrahim wrote it [in the month of] 9 Rabi‘ L., in the year 183. —s oe | me it os ladles Re ibaa : Alb lb sa eee O91 5¢ ate 0 pone Werte : FAS ani igsistlesgiotes’ 3 Test Lge? AR 9 Shims 9S Gs Fu F shoe! sah S wade ei a ris C911 .081 oss, 4 Fewlss O wails 45 Hs Feb ods ete eles Mee Gls te Aw pelea Achebe, ye ee oe pe: ¥ at PR ous SE st ‘ABU ‘OBAID, GARIBU 'L-HADIT. a.p. 866. LEIDEN, UNIV. LIBR., COD. 298 WARNER. Prare VI.—Arasic. Lemen. Untversiry Lisrary. Cop. 298 Warner.—A.D. 866. ee Garibu ’I-Hadit of ‘Abia ‘Obaid ‘al-Kasim ’ibn Sallam (+ A.H. 224= A.D. 838-9), a treatise on the rare and curious words in the sayings of Muhammad and his Companions. On paper ; small folio; 241 leaves. Dated Du ’1-Ka'da, A.H. 252 (13 Noy.—12 Dec., A.D. 866). See Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlindischen Gesellschaft, Bd xy ii, p. 781, and Catal. Codd. Orientt. Bibl. Acad. Lugduno-Batave, vol. iv., no. mpcoxxy. This is probably one of the oldest paper MSS. in existence. Gatherings. The kurrasas or quires consist of 20 ; oy, 1 1; Su, 1 8. In lam-alif the right-hand leaves, except the sixteenth, which has 22. | limb is the ’alif, e.g. 1 0), Ibis gS (3), L 18. Wr The writing stands midway between Kifi 1, somewhat resembling that of old Magribi | ; 5 | cs_is also written |Z; e.g. \yp. 1.10. The most curious and Spanish) MSS. ‘The diacritical points are | feature in this manu | | ipt, however, is that ; is some- occasionally omitted. times written with one point below, » 2; at other times Punctuation. © at the end of a sentence, ll. 10, 12, whilst when 14, 19. Forms of Letters. Frequently » ) Ve), to distin- guish these letters from 3 ; 4s b; also (ad &s, as with two points above and one below, final it is PHONE, og: — Hamza is r arely aps essed. with |, e.g. Spit 7; generally i stand for itl. For opposed to 7 >¢. Cis written (3, and Cw occa- sionally has three points below, 42. > appears as in 1.17. Observe the shape of final = in Il. 4, as distinguished from the final J in Il. 8, 16,19. Final | usually projects below the line, but som inyariably, e. g. | | | | & 35 we have usually 4 5, sometimes { § Ho il initial is | | written \\. The tanwin of damma is”. Tasdid has the one form ~ as well as »; in combination with fatha, », 1. 4, as well as the common ¢. Gadzma is indicated by >; in 1, 20 it is written over \ as a long vowel, in eA, j Zbl eli, 4 os (read Soy Ue! as &hs (ye [read i ey be] - Me ie ‘s Ale FH 2 Lye yaw iB) od, rates Sets ols ys GA GBI ol o4 5,2 > (ys! wb 5 I SS ye nll s jrlly eyo! ve 6 sees eae gs Suey os Le rae) (Sas = cr bey 7 abl, Jape Jol S dle? Ge GE JS 8 i be esl Ww sii BOGS [originally Gey] Ges wks 9 ic) a oh, ee Ibysp et 10 [read o>) > we e5 te) A ley 3) oo) ai ial ee gee eck ls yin, 12 anny ibs Jas xaste Ss os) is (originally beg] Ls oe A op! 13 wer el elp 14 eres Weel ex 55 ool Sy Le 65) SS oe 15 Wile Bis, Wits s Jey uel 16 Wve ES ¥ 5 ol Ble 9) ale 17 o Egtsd Sls 19 \gn0 Hl ab wae ES, eo fl oe 20 DIWAN OF ABU ’L-ASWAD. A.D. 990. LEIPZIG, UNIV. LIBR., D.C.33 (REFAIYA.) Puarr VII.—Arasic. Letrzic. | small quarto; 67 leaves. (81 March—30 April A.D. 990). Bd xviii., p. 220. See Zeitse! Writing. A good, clear Nashi. The diacritical points are frequently wanting. Punctuation. at the end of a sentence, 1. 12. Forms of Letters. »\s Ge Ce & in contradistine- tion tod & OS < U? ¢5 but , is distinguished from ; thus, 5. Final | sometimes projects below the line, as in 5p), 1.4, oy, 1.12. Final <<, @, is often written G * eee = Es tree _, i.e. with the *imala, e. Remark 3 for 3 in 1. s- > Hamza is frequently expressed with \, but the vowel s s fatha is then commonly omitted, as ah 1. 3, for ls University Liprary HE Diwans, or collected poems, of Abi Talib, ‘Abu ’1-’Aswad ’ad-Du’ali, and Suhaim. Written at Bagdad , D.C. 83 (Rera'tya).—A.D. 990. On paper ; , by ‘Afif ‘ibn ’As‘ad, in ‘al-Muharram A.H. 380 hrift der Deutschen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, oe ey Fa on the other hand, ,,\ for .,! in 1. 9, and Wyol for Wel in l.1. We find 3 for Sin ° ch, 1.9. 1 initial is merely | } in 3. ll. 8, 6. Tasdid has the form ,», sometimes eo pall Do 1k the vowel 3, 1. 13; also sometimes with fatha, as in With damma it is written over Gazma has the shape >; it is written over s a long vowel in eds 1. 18.—Observe the omission Dae Ben) of long @ in , =, L. 4, for lw 5 and the stroke, merely to fill up the line, in jh5i93), 1. 4, A a2 oe Cel ee Si Lal 2p gol JU 1 jes {> aa mb Fe a) 32 GI ppd! dL 2 Je fie ALS Gh ot oe HE gh 3 — a nd la GI SEs Ua Unall oes Dee ee ees res’! eo Lage Od et Jl pod sa 15255 6 joe BE JS sash Hs Ios Gin pa lest 7 sul wis 3 yal = pale w Sato a \pediy 9g eeb 45 ody lad pay pedo |p keel ail og 9 ad 10 CAD Cy op FS yp She ee yy! J ie 2 aac) al ge Sel O8 ill 12 (3505 be Je Gent Jey ged SEL GIS cis i an rbeccoailSaisssblilaiesinsdls I Qirlaili gl mde soavsidlsoaidsers © ahiapadsson Gill anlasblasl sie al Fathiailbe sisybsarrsatex ctl, : saysraderenSllpsle aiskol wails gooles 4 eadardopabsainss sts aoa : aithsloey |5 cate Nboslys aise sbsen td LSliaasaiirb5ans’as aA hel raily iain - sesbalsbls! Sheiiais Sb slbioul poiigssiols i bilssca°S 5S aslysll aga ; \. denen) aaristas|ailely asiobal Zins b aSposvsblmenrascissnabbol ECan SERRE NNT Boma ware MUWAFFAK AL-HARAWI, KITABU ’L-ABNIYA. A.D. 1055-1056. VIENNA, HOFBIBLIOTHEK, A.F. 340 (83.) ita oe an Tee taaxtal t ee canals ay os ilalse pen dabil ia aitsenman: eZ) ie Lyell algtras b Yeas sions oy5 sijas |) Sea vaxrla vale oul ae : a ip i aus PR & | peegadea loners cl Soaalabcn ; TH Silamoshail_oaesoed a3 sbads : Ais theses Fars Fr a Dp gee 63 5p w9 Sam shal spats MUWAFFAK AL-HARAWi, KITABU 'L-ABNIYA. A.D. 1055 - 1056. VIENNA, HOFBIBLIOTHEK, A.F 340 (83.) Puates VIII. anp 1X.—Pprsian. VIENNA. fb Kitabu ’1-’Abniya ‘an Haka’iki =A.D. 961—976). 1055—21 Jan. 1056), by ‘Ali, the son of the well-known poet ‘Ahmad ‘4l-’Asadi of ' at the court of Mahmid of G On paper ; small quarto; 219 leaves. Horsiptioturx, A.F. 340 (83).—A.D. 1055—56. l’Adwiya, a medical work, composed by ‘Aba Mansur Mu- waffak ’ibn ‘Ali ’al-Harawi (i. e. of Herat), for ‘al-Mansur ‘ibn Nuh the Samanide (A.H. 50—365 447 (24 Dec. s, who flourished Written in Sauwal, A.H. a. See the edition of F. R. Seligmann, Codex Vindobonensis sive Medici Abu Mansur Muwaffak bin Ali Heratensis Liber Fundamentorum Pharmacologiw, pars I prole- gomena et textum continens, 1859; and Flugel, die Arabischen, Persischen und Tiirkischen Handschriften der kaiserlich-kéniglichen Hofbibliothek zu Wien, Bd IL., p.é Gatherings. The kurrasas, 28 in number, consist of 8 leaves, except the first and last, which have now only 6 and 5 respectively. Writing. Kifi passing into Nashi, but more Kific in appearance than even the older iAsaiie manuscript in plate VI. Words are occasionally divided between two lines, as S) | ix, er las sh lay & | \S Punctuation and Ornamentation. Three, less fre- quently four, red or green dots at the end of a clause or sentence. ‘The title of the book and the headings of the chapters are in large characters, partly flourished Kufi; the titles of the smaller sections are written with red or green paint, Forms of Letters. On the peculiarities of this manu- script see Seligmann’s preface, pp. x3 are the principal v.—xxvili. The following letter —3 oceurs for _3 in the words ee, sh a > wypl, and oil, e. g. SGI, pl. viii, 1.3 oy. substituted for © after a vowel in all pure Deen SS fe words, as dy, db. and J are frequently used ad of and <% ; stands for 3; instead of $, n os and si, pl. viii, 1. 5,6. The rarely Wo b, in or $, we find ¢ ¢,, and more (Gea © scribe uses. > we & conthniteingia ion to 5 58 ck usb. Final | pro- oy or S& stands for &. Appended to oils >, ete. we find Sand ra for Sand x, jects slightly below the line. 534, no. 1465. as 2b, pl. viii. 1. 10, é> \yeaP —The fat is some- 9; after s< by ., or hamza, or both, as ja SENdloy, oa esa and 3) sls, pl. viii 1.10, g p> Graiity, Madda is indicated by \\ or 7, or is un- on times expressed by kasra, as in ly &-, pl. viii Sdd5 Noy marked, as Soll, pl. viii. 1. 4, pl. viii. 1. 10, Gb, pl. viii. 1.13; Tasdid is »; occasionally + 3), ¥ occurs for %, as in Jy), jy, Gazma is °; it is sometimes 2 of written over , and .s as long vowels, as in or, Ss, pl. ix. 1 8. SHS, pl. viii. 1.11. The diphthongs au and ai are indi- cated either in the usual way, as ,., osy> or else by + a peculiar sign « written over the ipaeeatiiag aoEso ner, with or without gazma ; as Shop sy oF B3 oo Se, oa ae he es and even ZO? (p. rrr). Similarly, in the case of the J, 4\,, followed by a long or short a, as Sil, pl viii. L 2, 49, >, pl. viii.1. 6, cus; Observe too, in the case of the Boge ee SEP; o(p- roi). The (p. ros), G8 ie) (D- rer), ay> as Usas=* cs is also sometimes indicated by a special sign, 7, as dy>, pl. viii. lL. 1, us (p- ¥+); ag kule, for -3 2 by hula, 3% (p. »1) , Cogan 5925 (p. 11) 2 Plate VIII. (See Seligmann’s edition, p. se, 1. 15—p. no, 1. Sb We 9.5) Sede Ohl S Jie db 95) S pS 0d) sled gl Le SF oS Oday# Ab OT Eye, Dos Od,98 Cojo hd 3) SOd,13 3b Whdy g) Spey . LAG Eda 35) pala BSS beh 8, wit WaT Ul, 33g fe EON 2 sly = is 5! Ge 5! ore oe Yatlel noisy “ aS Gpve B wd RW SI Sh KES oe ete » 05 Wb sl ia Sc ge KS We 99 0599 GE ayes = 3p) hw gl WS) ad Oye dy DUNGY DE 3S), Gaj8d 959 ~ MET 4 0d) ES ay b 1, urge oy) o} lt WS) Ky 2xSy * ~ O25 x | Vell 25 SS p3 |, haw Bl MEO « RES Mens « Oo9 te ws pos BES = S051 p 1S Bp glovil S Spey pS Fa - BF ober 9 ed Costs ow wll, Ob Plate IX. (See Seligmann’s edition, p. 11, 1. 11—p. 110, 1. vn JIM ie Je e igs S wldry pi 8 Ge! vies! GBT SE 3) sel 9S aay Caaty abe = Shey Syd ear band ane S shy > camry ol id wo? 3} Gil she dp CHS J, bipbayey = as dq Iysdaey IS 05, TP? DBL ESE I, MOST gd y55 | ond Gthlay oy L gis Boh 2p My lee cat pall ghd peoeal i ee te es oe wl ds We, BRE S-cnf J Sdxe Khpwry Say & B0ate «Cane lid 3) yh lab wes, 9.) bo wo 9 os Sp) 839 F108) canes oS 2 3 Ghd Loeb, 10 OE ols! uss ee ce oes, 5p o” 11 SP A? 52g SS yas BLES 2045 12 ps ee Sb xs DAPA: AN G ++ AMANK ALR PAAADT' PEN 7:AtH:UNO1) VW PRADA, 3 MLATAL AAA © Ch¥heyn7aVle DALE7ANITR™ NAT MAMAN: —© PEOVONALUG 96090: o7AAN & WwINAPERUEN Ha:TWHOON: — nA ShNW:4 UDAE:ALUG, — 46.00: 0770 HISTORY OF LALIBALA. A.D. 1400-1434. BRIT. MUS., ORIENTAL 719. IAs, THIOPIC. British Mus M. ORIENTAL 719.—A.D, 1400—84. dee History of king Lalibala of Lasta, surnamed Gabra Maskal or “the Servant of the Cross.” On stout vellum; quarto, about 9 inches by 7; 168 leaves; double columns ; of the first third of the xv century, certainly before A.D. 1484. The date appears from a deed of gift on f. 163 a, in which king Zar’a Ya‘kob, surnamed Kwastantinos or Constantine, who began to reign in that year, has with his own hand substituted his name for that of the original donor: wahabku ‘ana [Zara Ya‘hob wa-sema mangestya Kwastantinos] la-zati mashafa (sic) Gadla Lalibala ete. This is the oldest book in the Makdala (Magdala) collection, the date of which can be fixed with an approach to certainty; and there are probably but few, if any, older Ge’ez manuscripts in Europe. Gatherings. Of eight leaves, not numbered. Ruling. On one side only, with a dry point, guided 23 on the outer ma by pricki gin, and not extending beyond the text. The columns are bounded by vertical lines. Punctuation. Two dots between each word, as usual in Athiopic manuscripts. For stops, different combi- nations of black and red points, as in col. 1, ll. 5, 8, 18; col. 2, ll. 7, 16. The names of Lalzbala and Maskal Kébra ave written in red, col. 1, ll. 5, 6, 16, 19; col. 2, Il. 1, 11, 19. Forms of Letters. Notwithstanding the age of this manuscript, the o of the form M» has alw a small PRY :, f. 82a, connecting stroke ; pé is , as in AS Ast col.; Oi ngular, and so is the upper part of K, P,&, well as the right “window ” of ] letters exhibit curved forms, which disappear at a later period, e.g. M, Ml, A, and especially H. Observe the shape of @ in col. 1, 1. 3. Imost tr and “h, ars O , or that of his father », to fill up a double vertical lines. | vacant space at the end of a line, as in Il. 8 and 13. ROK DAYS! IY DMI QIP TUR gerry a9 ness wee . Aymw yA YI BANAL WAL OTD INSS [UST pr Dior pay aapady 3719 79D) NID HID»9 HHP 14 799 Bon BIDVAIIK I9DYy OROLNINS NID! AK Dry Jaasy yeux qin nKIIn ID: 217% wie rove wa avuonns aie anaes Lb apa dy wpa mr a 05 i WOE WK WAP ID YANKAT aine05i ew 16 won NES Li wis yD W357) I j6 D9? SAL S996 NTH) qdo JN i aval ane mapa vely awsp) pavaly #71 | "pa IRIE 99 INTO) sw ww qyelp wprny 0 eA | ARIUS TNNNG 2 TS7ID (Lp Kvasdon IVD DIVE (191908 ; Kup pre eee a2 DnduE priaee and ees peony vey A away i svi arena prude | : Wyn) 48 wwop) W597) wH StI I ID ED Wh Twp wap Ionia ase Sic wp) maw | Bn yan 1s 935 oArin gi D-II wd WD | aga rainy nD) Kw sy 4p) 599 aI 099 0003 ours yous 34 jyspye aI) Jno» p49 ane on ney pans pepanes snnc3dnt nopnaday “MpnDID 4993 sm pas vant endasy gp2 1045 DOWNS 37 aw PVD me ( Kap pew pds Duwnady vw pres isan) mids ax on aypest | Brer-yas wo nsad PNsw7n 93 ade mW yp | Aan yo 12) apy cays jones viop: ped pup - ep muy Wp KIayK awinn ov onuK ID © | pr minns mow phayeriww es) wed asp sas DK ‘| To G10) cine nanse pd wy yor rns vn72 now) i] RASHI ON BABA METSTI'A. A.D. 1190. BRIT. MUS., ORIENTAL. 73. Pare XV.—HeEprew. Britiso Museum. Orrenra 73.—A.D. 1190. Te Commentary of Shélomoh Yischaki (Rashi) on the Talmudic tract Baba Mési'a, (see the Babylonian Talmud, Baba Més Written, probably at Mosul, for David, the Rosh hag-Golah or Exiliarch, in the month of Nisan, A. Contract. (1)501= April, A.D. 1190, only 85 years after the death of the author, A.D. 1105. a , f. 86 a). On paper; octavo, about 9% in. by 62; 188 leaves. Gatherings. Of ten leaves, marked with catchwords, | Writing. The writing, which depends from the but not signed. | line, is Oriental, betray ing in the forms of some letters, Ruled. On one side only, with a dry point. The particularly 8 and 3, the influence of a Greek Ashké: text is bounded by single vertical lines. | teacher. Vowel points are occasionally added. Aah. PALAZOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY. COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT. E. A. BOND, Esq, KEEPER OF THE MSS., British Museum, President. W. DE G. BIRCH, EsQ, BRITISH MusEuM. J. W. BONE, Esq, BA, F.S.A. Rev. H. 0. C , M.A., BODLEy’s LIBRARIAN, OXFORD. Mons. L. DELISLE, Director or THE NATIONAL Lisprary, PARIS; MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTE. J. WINTER JONES, Esq, PrrNcrpAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH MusEUM. REv. PRoFEssoR LIGHTFOOT, D.D., Canon oF St. PAUL'S. LLIAM MASKELL, Eso. ‘ M. THOMPSON, Esq., AssIsTANT KEEPER OF THE MSS., British Museum, Hon. Sec. WARNER, Esq, M.A., BRITISH MUSEUM. ProFessor Dr. W. WATTENBACH, BERLIN. Proressor J. O. WESTWOOD, Oxrorp. W. ALDIS WRIGHT, Esq, M.A,, TRIN. COLL., CAMBRIDGE, ProFEssor W. WRIGHT, LL.D,, QUEENS’ COLL., CAMBRIDGE. FACSIMILES OF ANCIENT MANUSCRIPTS, ETC. ORIENTAL SERIES. Parr II. EDITED BY WILLIAM WRIGHT, LL.D., PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE. CONTENTS. 16. Ashtasahasrika-prajnaparamita. Sanskrit. A.D. 1008. 17. Sishyalekha. Sanskrit. A.D. 1084. 18. Sri-kalikacharya-kathanakam. Sanskrit. A.D.1404. 19. Genealogical Work. Arabic. [VIJIth Century.] 20. Lives of Saints, etc. Arabic. A.D. 885. 91. Gospel of S. Luke. Arabic. A.D. 993. 92. Arabic Coins. A.D, 640—1246, 923. Gulistan. Persian. A.D. 1582. 94. Acts of Fasiladas. A£thiopic. A.D. 1478-94. 25,26. Fragments ofa Tale. Egyptian Aramaic. [Late Ptolemaic Period.] 27. Basil on the Holy Spirit. Syriac. A.D. 509. 28. Pentateuch, Hebrew-Samaritan and Arabic. A.D. 1219. 29. Hebrew Inscription. A.D. 718. 30. Sepher ham-Mishkal. Hebrew. A.D. 1363-4. PHOTOGRAPHED AND PRINTED IN FACSIMILE BY THE AUTOTYPE COMPANY. London: PRINTED BY GILBERT & RIVINGTON, 52, ST. JOHN’S SQUARE, CLERKENWELL, anp 28, WHITEFRIARS STREET, E.C, 1877. [Ad rights reserved.| Wie le; PALAOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY. COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT. KEEPER OF THE MSS., BritisH Mu Bibermrin- slo Beeyiie usin PS a= geure enact of Prare XVIII.—Sanskrir (PRAKrit). Roya Astatic Socrrry. Sanskrit 34.—A.D. 1404. a,” by Bha- vinally 112) leaves, with 6 lines of text on each page. This is a Jaina manuscript, written in Western India, and dated Samyat 1461 = A.D. 1404. A WORK entitled S1-halikacharya-hathanakam, or “the History of the holy Kalikacha vadevasiiri, with a marginal commentary. On paper; about 12f inches by Bis G(s Ruling. The text is written in two columns of unequal the case of 7 this difference is less marked. The diphthongs breadth, bounded by two pairs of lines on the right and left e and 0 haye two forms, as in plates II. and III. The diph- of each column. The space between each pair of these lines thongs ai and aw are expressed by the combination of the is coloured red. Between the two columns is a circular two forms of ¢ and 0, as weIe:, sahasraih, wea, gaurava figure, coloured red and black, sometimes relieved with a (upper margin of col. 2): but the forms * and % also occur, little yellow, in the centre of which is a hole, through which as Sei, chaityam, 1, saw (margin of col. 1,1, 15). The passed the string that held the leaves together. To the anuswara is generally indicated by a circlet in the first line right of the page is a red circlet, containing the number of | of cach column, and a dot in the rest. At the end of Il. 4 the leaf (in the plate, 52): and to the left a similar cirelet, and 5, in col. 2, it is represented by a circlet placed after exhibiting the same number, expressed by other signs and | the letter, with virama under it. letters. | Ornamentation. There are miniatures on the leaves Writing. Large bold Devanagari, of the Jaina type. numbered 16, 17, 41, 42, 48, 52, 59, 101, and 102. The glosses are in a smaller character, A little vertical Our plate seems to represent the saint sitting cross-legged, stroke above the line is often employed, in the text, to mark | holding in his hands a small sacrificial cup or basin, and the division of the words, which are, as usual, written con- surrounded by grotesque figures of demons, animals, birds, tinuously. Glosses are indicated by two small lines over ete. The colouring is brilliant, red, pink, yellow, green, the word glossed. Three vertical strokes over a letter (e.g., | blue, black and white paints being all used. The yellow ya, col. 1, 1, 4) mean that it is to be deleted. colour of the human figure and of the second circle of orna- Forms of letters. The vowel 7 has usually a larger and ment is heightened by spots of gold, and the outer circle bolder form in the first line of the page than elsewhere; in is similarly touched with silver. = marddayena mananigrahena = 2 = yiryena | visishtotsahona = 1 = arjjavena mayanigrahena = 1 | =kshantya krodhanigra | =laghavena kriyisu dakshatvena | athaya laghayam dravyato | hena=2 x anuttarae gauravatrayatyagas tena = 2 ‘lpopadhitvam | bhavato = muktya nirlobhataya | kva chit guttie ityapi pathas tatra guttie | anuttarae tutthi guptyadikaya = 3 = satyasamya | ttarenam virienam | anuttarenam ayyavenam e| x3 | | anuttarenam ma matapahsucharitasopachitapha | lanirvanamarggena | satyam stnri ddayvenam | anuttarenam laghavenam | anu | ttarae ravamtie a tam | samyamah pranidaya tapo dva 7 : one , E ae E 5 —tushtya manahpra hlatya - 1 nam dagabhedam tesham sushtu vidhivachcha | |nuttarae inuttie | anuttarae tutthie | a nuttare sachchasamja ritam acharanam satyasamyamatapah F | 5 vasuchari Vavachiyaphalani vvanamageenam aoa tam | upachaya | | matavasuchariyasoyavachiyaphalar n geg@enam nam upa | aitbosm || sale lappanam bhayemanassa | duvalasasamva chehharaim chiikkam pachaye na yvarttate so ya? 12 ma’ | pal | pachitam | satyasamyamatapahsuchari ge = | STAGas ee P eee Hy ca |taim terasamassa samvachchharassa amtar vatta- manassa | jese tena sopachitam sphitam phalam mukti lak nit shanam yasya sa tatha | sa chasau namarggascha ratnatrayalaksha | = * | yato ’nendtmajiianam eva mokshasya pradhanam sadhanam ityuk- nas tenatmanam bhavayato vasa tam = 4 = trayodagasya va | Sok rshasya madhye pakshadhika shanmasala -kshane varttamane ityar thah = 1 “6ZEUN “1053 NI “AN3IWYO “SW ‘17 TVAOW. ‘NITYW3a (4N39 nillIA) “WHOM 1V3ID0T1V3ENAD oP F op S ee Bd KE ee TP qe eG C poy py S: oe LS CE p SS p 6 orp 6 IT IP OWI S vo ss Ce fo jor & VK VS =a Gy = v ba ©) ope we I IS Ops VX Sf gr HK BS wwe je LST GIO HK OY VP OH Ep © ret | ww 6 6 IP oe eI CRIB HOS ST PS pe Gf WT el rey se so oS iy Ce YX UP G5)" 1K x Pee Mba Tz KE PT INS IK pes hore Pore ye & Fite or 1S UE We ge Pruarre XIX.—Araprio. Bertry. Roya Lrprary. "| \HIS volume consists of twenty-four vellum leaves, with Kifi writing. famous traveller Carsten Niebuhr. Ms. Orrent. ry Forro Nr. 879, Four. 23 anp 24.—[viii Cen. It once belonged to the Twenty-two of these leaves contain portions of eight manu- scripts of the Kor'an, but the remaining two (foll. 23 and 24) were discovered by the late Professor Roediger to be fragments of a genealogical and historical treatise. This is, it is believed, the only example extant in Europe of a Muhammadan work of profane literature in the Kufi character. See ramentbliitter mit altarabischer Schrift). On vellum, about 11 inches by 9; fifteen lines on each page, except f. 24 a, where there are only fourteen. Writing. Kiufi, with diacritical points in the form of small slanting lines. These are, however, occasionally omitted, and sometimes wrongly placed. Punctuation. coloured with red and blue, of which the plate exhibits Figures of different sizes and shapes, one. One or more strokes are sometimes used, at or near the end of a line, to fill up a vacant space; e.g. f, 23-a, ll. 9, 10, 12 f. 24. a, last line, -lays Forms of Letters, ete. In 33 placed over or under one another, 3 0 3; but in 4 side 23 b, last line, -, bpeley ela 5 SAE 5 ,and & the strokes are by side, one over each apex, «1 scripts %, see pl. VI.). Initial = the centre, ¢ (compare = in Wright’s Catalogue of (as in some later manu- akes the stroke in Probably written during the latter half of the second cent. of the Hijra (A.D. 718—815). Syriac MSS. in the British Museum, p. 404, col. 1), Observe the shape of medial = = and = in such words (fol. 24.6, 1.9). Final os tS Vs or c, either with or without points. Final ¢ seems to be always unpointed—There are no traces of ‘Words are freely divided at the end of a line; e. 23a, 1.16, Ges lls 17, 285s, 1. 10; l= |,4,; 112, abie|,, Long @ is omitted not only in a} (£. 28 a, 1. 18), We (f. 238 a, 1.6), rc (f. 28 a, 1. 10), wl (f. 6, 1.9), and aye0 (f. 240, 1.18); but also in Jie (f. 23 8, 1.1), bat (f. 24a, 1.1), and eles! (ibid.), for Jie, yibas, and ial On f. 23 a, 1.15, and f, 23 2, as sss (fol. 28 a, 1. 2), ve, tasdid, gazm, ete 1. 12, we find ~43 for site OF 22753!) Ble Oe Ge OH, 1 dyiaS xis nS Jats asl Dye 9 Feats} oe LS sts gned al 3 HK BI lool agdo Qn ¥ Chi! Jaks 4 gee Kenly Vege] Vogel Ws acdls ar 5 \ 45 ON ayo} reveal ed! ees )$) 6 1 3 xrwoly Wh Ody, spol] Van 7 ren ore save) ws ;i5) o> ee! wi xg £253 Gye Alyed Leg? yey ants el, 9 — pity Npaty gS sie Ep Voy 3l Wy 10 ro a dyes} reset) eely le oy a9 bey 015 Logedl ue ple yy 12 xalosy doled all] Oey (read wayn's) was, alain 13 Kel dy (read eo) ew (gst PP oxen alyeY 14 ResSy) re) wey alll dss (read sasady) warns ao, iis} XX. 4 al is pes one “8 iL sya s Ta ite at 4 py i at pasate ia) ll arya fag LIVES OF SAINTS, ETC. A.D. 885. ROME, VATICAN LIB. COD. ARAB. 71. Prarr XX.—Aranre. Rome. Vatican Lisrary. Cop. Aran. 71.—A.D. 885. VOLUME containing lives of Saints and ascetic discourses. See A Mai, Scriptorum Veterum Nova { Collectio, t. iv., Codices Arabici vel a Christianis scripti vel ad r igionem Christianam spectantes, p. 143, no. Ixxi. On vellum; octayo; 236 leaves (not 226, as stated by Mai, loc. cit.). Written by a monk of . Saba, ben le Lwzsil] G4, near Jerusalem, at the expense of a monk named Isaac, for the convent of Mount Sinai, Usa] ign yb »aJ, in the month of the first Rabi’, A.H. 272 = A.D. 88 (Mai, or rather Assemani, has made a mistake in giving the date as A.H. 172 = A.D. 788). Dy Gatherings, Of eight leaves, signed with Greek | | and J, ll. 1, 2, 4, 7, and compare them with those in majuscule letters. pl. VI. Final | projects a little below the line. In Ruling. On one side only, with a dry point, guided | /4™~alif the righthand limb is the ’alif, Final os is by prickings on the margin. The text is bounded by | either jas in 3,11, or _, asin 3 1.3, 3,183 single vertical lines. by itself it is 2 as in. yal, lL il, Occasionally we find | for (5 maksira, as in Ses (<3), 1. 16. The points of final 3 are omitted; e. S, 1. 4, vole; 1. 5, atl! and x=]; ete.—Instead of & 35 we have - +2 inl 112; dave, I 8,15; 22, 1.17; Cull, 1. 19.—The vowel damma is written in 4, 1.3; but the marks over dai, Writing. Kati, inclining to Nashi. The diacritical points seem to be very carefully added. Punctuation. with two points (Il. 5, 6, 7, ete.) or a single point (ll. 6, 10, 14) for slighter pauses. at the end of a sentence, ll. A, 8, etc.; 1. 3, and 21, 1. 6, seem to be merely accidental blots. Forms of letters, etc. Observe the shapes of final Y —ajl and ENS are written defectively, but oul, 1.15. Sb cs pill NG Sly all YI tb) 28S gyorg 1 Sees ES Ol aged be JS CEM, Lull gio ed 2 Oassly (0d) Spas jee! UI pall Spall IBD ye Grisly eae 8 od, de eds Ue cell sale Ty3Ny sort! SS Gye 4 eV be J Sw, aac! Sag aust nm (ie) rl opal 5 Wl odsd wy! . dl ous! b os 3 of Jui .. Are Seb 4 cae) Bo! dad) UE all] ous, b Jos El whats 7 a8) SF Seal FI Geant! Id JB dase 2 WI Nde Gye g 9 Gaal Jo (6o) cssly cb lal ate de Goatall ayy as 2 rity ay. Jl SU ol Jas G15 oF ays carob ley JI 10 » reny Cals be oly Spel Ed! LG sor ds 11 comb) J Opi MI I ILI GG. lb all bie CAB 12 nga hiss jlo Jalil ee Lb z alll edel dll 13 Untetiyl le SSE 2 iy 358 Gaal hab wb 14 roel Ss Oyo Pl jake Jolie pr WI OLSY Cgao le 15 (Bie) gee? ally abally xoyy G9 Wplbl Je tas 16 rw alle Iphely Oe yas? acles 3 cop CaaS pol I peal LM 17 pddenz OF asl) Iyalbs .. US;3) be aclas pe-HI bab, 18 wad SS eye OV ale! lo Guaesdsl le pool Le = ete [The Committee have to acknowledge the kind assistance of Dr. I. Guidi of Rome in describing this plate and plate XXI.] is rege AS asthonsy DG 2" bb sissies pr 2 Sees eho 3 uta we ge gnrabs. Shale sidan aly dias : eh Se a5 ae meee ; é ran 5 Sh | a are asia ee I i GOSPEL OF S.LUKE. ap. 393. ROME, VATICAN LIB. COD. ARAB. 18. Prare XXL—Anraste. Rome. Vatican Liprary. Cop. Aran. 18.—A.D. 993. HE Gospel of S. Luke, in an unpublished translation, of which the author is unknown, composed T in rhymed prose. See A. Mai, Seriptorum Veterum Nova Collectio, t. iv., Codices Arabici etc., p- 61, no. xviii, On paper; small quarto; 94 leaves. Written at Cairo, pan , in Ragab, A.H. 383 = A.D. 993. Gatherings. Of ten leaves, not numbered. The peels 1. 2; final | does not project below the line. leaves themselves, howeyer, are numbered with Coptic Final ¢ is not dotted; c.g. S35, 1. Bs Five Les aOb- arithmetical figures (i,e., Greek letters); e.g., in the plate, 66. vowels have their ordinary forms; save that ” is written elas, q slear Nashi. The diacritic: ants Aan eee: Aa, eRe Writing. A good, clear Nashi. The diacritical points Zin 8, 1h eS aera, Te Ga aad Ra dete Ls. serve the form of ye in yy), 1 5, and were 1. 9.—The are occasionally yrantne: Neither is there anything unusual in the forms of hamza, D ion. A small space is left blank at the end s ae oe w “ EMO ANON i ey, 1.8, Gr, 175 tasdid, C53 and bles, 11; and of each rhyming clause. Three dots are placed at the 2, 5 : 2 ee 5 ‘ e / madda, #L3), 1. 9. Hamza is often omitted, even when close of 1. 4, which is likewise the end of a rhyming the accompanying vowel is written; as in wll 7, abl, clause. ° a8 1 : vs F Se Ghihig ghibg Chants giibe oeacsbg Forms of Letters, ete. = 35% ¢ and ¢ or 5, in con- 1, ce , halts ay! 1.7. Gazma is circular, or nearly so . : P 4 cH 2S) Oe, cote : we it over - as » vowels in L tradistinction to + 3 jas and = or «. Initial WS is (ep, 1.3); we find it over |, 4» cs as long vowels in Bee, either &, 1. 2, or 3, Il. 1,5; final is WU, 13,8. | 1 5, *Alif is joined to the next letter in J&, ll. 2, 9, and 1, 4,— 3, sda and pen! are written defectively, but Wal», 1. 4. S. LUKE, Cu. xvr. 24—29. ose Vd i Goee EHS ye ye SLI OBS ail 1 55) 550 hu Spada J pe ye 2 HHS gad, Ber 3 ps, Wile S Ube SP 3 se Sode Spa ZWllab dle 4 eS Wipe pai oye B05 iy Lead acl ys ody 5 a lial 3 ge Ys PS oe SI syle nd le 6 cde pte Wad GF ek da) G6 JB jaoe 7 Suoll 1d Wyo2 Spall a ab Gael ee beak LE 8 AoMy gage ad! (oi) pap ad JB jee!) S1Gall welded 9 ARABIC COINS. A.D. 640-1246. BRITISH MUSEUM. and the mint, variously read Yasd and Adh{arbaijan the words alll om. ], are in Pablawi. Struck in Persia by an Arab rey . A (Oby. only). Am. 20 (a.p. 641). Governor under ‘Omar, On the oby. marg. als. The other inseriptions, on both sides, are in Pablawi. inscriptions, including the | On ¢ exact limits of this transitional period. Tt began at different times in different parts of the Muslim empire ; and in some places the chaste style of the old Kifi was retained almost to the last. Perhaps, however, it may be roughly defined as extending from the 4th to the middle of the 7th century of the Hijrah. Nos. 8 to 11 are examples of the development of the 4th century, in Persia (8 and 9), North Africa (10), and Spain (11). Of these, Spain had made the greatest advance, and Persia the least. No. 12, struck rather later, represents the peculiar ornamentation by connecting curves which found favour, amongst others, with the ‘ah. Ghaznawis of North-western India Persia under tho Saljikis long retained much of the simplicity of the old Kifi(see no, 18, Au, 485, 4.p. 1092, where, however, an ornamental final , and a «sof the Naskhi form, Moghal invasion (4.x. ¢ instead of — , may be observed); but on the .p, 1258) a mixed Kiifi and Naskhi character was introduced, which soon gave placo to illformed Naskhi. The coinage of the Khalifahs, restricted as it generally was after the 3rd century of the Hijrah to Baghdad and its immediate vicinity, nev r ached any great degree of orna- mentation; see no. 21, struck 13 years before the final overthrow of the Khilafah. Proceeding westward, we find that, in Syria and Diyar-Bakr, the Arabic character had advanced much nearer to Naskhi than in Per Nos. 17 and 18, both struck by tho ’Urtuki Turkumiins in Diydr-bakr, in a.u.578 (a.p. 1182), aro examples of two difforent developments. No. 17 retains much of the simplicity and coarseness of tho enrliost Kati (cp. no. 4), but combines with this the occasional final curves of transitional Kofi and a marginal in ption in pure Naskhi; whilst no. 18 is one of the most perfect examples im existence of transitional Kafi of the highly ornamented kind. Still journeying westward, we see how peculiar was the form of character de- veloped in Egypt, under the later Fatimis and the ’Aiyabis (nos. 15 and 19), in the 6th century of the Hijrah. No. 20 represent the writing employed on the coins of the Saljaki Sultins of Asia Minor at the beginning of the seventh century; and in nos. 14 and 16 wo seo tho latest stage of Kati ornamentation on the numismatic monuments of North-west Africa and Spain. Soon after this, Naskhi was everywhere dominant. Twenty years after no. 14 was struck, the succeeding dynasty of tho hids introduced Naskhi in Africa; and halfa contury after no. 16, the Bani Nasr did the same in Spain. In Bgypt and ia, the precedent of the earlier ’Aiytbis was noglected, and mil issued a Naskhi coinage in a.m. 615 (a.p. 1218); in ia Minor, Kai-Kubad, succocding the Kai-Khusra who struck no. 20, followed the common example and adopted Naskhi; and in Pe dual deterioration of the coinage through a mixed character to Naskhi. sia, the downfall of the Khalifahs meant the gr 3. A (Ob. only). a.m. 28 (a.p. 648). Governor under ‘Othman. Struck in Persia by an Arab oby, marg. .41) ally. Tho other insoriptions, on both sides, are in hlawi. 4, A, Aum. 19 or 20 (a.p. 640) Pal Struck at Tabariyah (Tiberias), in sstine, by an Arab Governor under ‘Omar. On tho reverse marg, & -b and in Greek lotters THBEPLAAO. 3, N. aat. 77 (a.p. 696). Struck, probably at Damascus, in Syria, by the "Um: h ‘Abd~’al-Malik. Oby. Area. Rey. Area. alll aot alll ak e deal! ly ds Marg: 32! sy god aby! all Jy) test Marg, aw B43 pull Wa 5 all pe as geal le aid ones 6, A. a.m, 79 (a.v. 698). *Al-Kiifah, in ‘Trak ‘Arabi. ’Umawi Khalifah, ‘Abd-'al-Malik. Rev. Area, all) sol ali Oby. Area, as on (5). yah J teal Adan d Marg. (B Byath pall Wa Gs all pos sal Wye Cantera? Marg. 52! wos gadly abayl alll Jywy dene et Fs AS gral de phd ). Al-Bagrah, in ‘Trak ‘Arabi, ‘Abbasi Khalifah, eo 7, A. act 182 (4.0. 79 Oby. Area, as on (5). eve areas KUNG szej) Seas onl Yl ay jel Loe Kea Headly papell Na Gap all py Soeloies Bay etal Marg. os fy a8 on (6). . Aut, 809 (A., 921). ‘Ash-Shash (Tashkand), in Transoxania. Samani, Nasr ibn Ahmad, e Rev. Area, a Oby. Area, as on (5). ——s Marg. (Inner). AUN papal! Wa G25 all pe MENS BL aby a AWY joskell (outer). Stepey dar yey JS ge Vl all declined MN ja Cosepall Marg., as on (6). 9. MR. AW. 884 (ap. 94 Madinat-'as-Salam (Baghdad), ‘Arabi. Buwaibi, Mu’ ad-daulah. Oby. Area, aU! YI all ¥ Rey. Area. a 3 dyt Yadey aU dey emt A Syod) pee Co ae pos a) eb ea, Url ole Marg. (Jnnor). 299 pall Wa Gay alll op ol il ae (outer), as on (8). Marg,, as on (8). 10. 4. 7 (A.D, 948). ‘Al-Mahdiyah, in Tinis. Fiatimi, ’Al- Oby. Area, plat Rey, Area, Jeol roi peers oun US, a yal esa at Marg. og3 42 Raga jLyoll Wa 439 all poe Marg,, as on (6). BUS, ells poo Eee ye Fal 11. AT. act. 857 (a., 968). Madinat- Khalifah of Spain, ‘Al-Hakam m1 Zahra, in Spain, "Umawi Oby. Arca. Way Rey. Arca. well sey alll peel pla Bey owes! jel ale My _parceell Marg, to Yajl toe) pall Wa Qs al pe ca BL My gees a Marg. as on (6) but stopping at de, 12, AR. am. 422 (av. 1081)? Walwalij or Walw: Ghaznawi, Mas‘ad 1. Oby. Area, due Rey. Area, my Way fang wl aksys aby jot) iz, in Tokharistan. Marg. (9) jlo pos! Wa op3 all pas] ! : Marg,, obscure, Rasyly oi2e9 (8) oe] m (Baghdad). 13. AT, anit. 485 (s.p. 1092), Madinat~’ Malik-Shah. Oby, Area, all YW ll 9 Rey, Area. a A ey Y rasy Fa ill yey taee & geste! p LY} wy ade all be = Ay 3B dot De b Greyell peel ris alle Marg, (inner). i240) gill Se G35 all pee ad tie Ll 23 3a) ons JS ox nl 14, A’. Ast. 501 (A.p, 1107). ‘Aghmat, in Morocco, Murabit (Al- moravide), ‘Ali ‘ibn Yusuf. Oby. Area, al! 1 al 9 Rey. Area. Phyl all Jury dost fe lala Marg, a Je of ls SLE der ow AY OB ots ou! s, in Egypt. Fatimi, 15, AT. amt. 517 or 519 (A.D. 1128 or 112 Al?Amir biahkm-Allah. Oby, Area, Je Roy. Area. puM pats ayaiall Marg, (inner). ce all Jy, toot all Yi all Y Marg. (inner). jeel all glenn p¥) Je sl a gs uxerell (outer). 13> 3-8 pel pens ll pe ray A py see ¢ (vic) Hamat Ae au Tes Lash Lode pill 16, A’. Am, 565 (a.v. 1169). Mursiyah (Murcia), in Spain. Mu- hammad ‘ibn Sa‘d. Oby, Area, alll VI all ¥ Rey, Area, pled a) Jyoy dont SI ae aM) ae pel jel oeeyl eel der gh dest par me dy We (sie) Ja 5 pedl oensl all peat Marg., as on (14). 17. . aw. 578 (ap. 11 Kutb-’ad-din. Rov. Oby. marg. (tic) fh Gedy yrwry abet Kaifa, 18. AB. a.m. 578 (A.p, 1182) ~ad-din, [Hig Urtuki, Nu Rev. Oby, marg. gle [Ie peel ys] all pal le HL Gundy yes 19. AY. Amt. 587 (4.0. 1191), “ALK Salah-’ad-din (Saladin). hirah (Cain in Bgypt. Oby. Area. (uy Rov. Area ener deol e Marg. (inner), gal poldl cote! gl Yl dl ¥ Marg. (inner). yall the HL ella! Jle osazell peel all (outer), Wie 43-3 ppl penpl all mp ++ (outer), 29s eal slay} alll Jay deer BL eds yslety gu te Fabel pull ade al lo AF gual le sad Gel yah (Caesarea), in Anatolia. Oby. Area, aL tall Roy. Area, pest! oll lll hl oelly Liall ole Sel al pal se gall sl ote ole! on Marg. poll (sie) da G3 a par Marg. slid G2! roy sadly yey Joy! sll ge ley gl (sic) oS Aa a sy oy gral ge 21, A. a.m. 643 (ap, 1245). Madinat~’a: Khalifah, ‘Al-Mustalgim. Jim (Baghdad). ‘Abbasi ayy Rev, Area, aU aly ES J depres oy a by AU Ly ance weasel pool GE aa Marg. pull tte joo! We ape alll ae Marg. Gel unas gad aby Bly gays EH te ade yall ge GULISTAN. a.p. 1582. ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY, PERSIAN 233 Prats XXIII.—Perrstran. toyaL Astatic Socrery. ae Gulistan, or Rose-garden, of Sa‘di. Written at Fathpur (Futtehpore), A-H. 990 = A.D. 15 929 233 A—A.D. 15 PERSIAN On paper; small folio, about 123 inches by 73; 127 leaves. 2 by the celebrated scribe Muhammad Husain of Kashmir, surnamed Zarin-kalam or “ Golden-pen,” the best penman at the court of the emperor Akbar. The companion volume to this manuscript, viz. the Bostan of Sa‘di, was in the possession of the late Dr. D. Forbes (see his Catalogue of Oriental Manuscripts, London, 1866, p. 78, no. 243), and is now, it is believed, in the splendid collection of the Earl of Crawford and Balcarres. Writing. A beautiful Nasta‘lik. Ornamentation. The yellowish paper is sprinkled with gold-dust. Each page is surrounded by lines of red, gold Fol. 3 a contains On f. 3bisa Almost every page exhibits drawings of and blue, the crosslines being also gilt. a picture of Sa‘di instructing his pupils. brilliant ‘wawan. animals, birds and flowers, delicately and beautifully co- loured. The margins contain similar figures, of larger size, At the foot of f. 125 a (sce plate) is a drawing representing the scribe and in golden outlines on a blue-grey ground. artist seated upon a carpet and engaged in the execution of their task. The former holds a sheet of paper, on which is written ee wy o> ah Eye ysl al, “God is most great! portrait of Husain Golden-pen ;” the latter, one on which is inscribed ec, “the work of Ma- gly aly Pyie nohar, the son of Basawan.” The scribe is seated on a blue cushion ; his upper garment is purple, with a pattern worked in gold; his under garment bright green. He is barefooted, and his purple slippers lie behind him. A servant stands | behind, dr | and a black turban. sed in yellow and red, with a striped kamarband He seems to be engaged in fanning | the scribe. The artist is clad in a bright red dress, with a The box behind Of the three vases which’ stand upon it, the one in the centre is striped kamarband and a golden turban. him is also coloured red, with golden handles, etc. blue, the other two white. The vase containing flowers | is light pink. Between the two principal figures lie a book with its case (black and gold), writing implements, ete. peer) wll, all, ase xb 2 Ue UI, ial, 1 2 pee? or? OS ey Wb ale OY? Nea tere Spot) yer est pill CON all gil 4 Raga phny H3y35 abl 25 or Ryleands pend 5 Bbut yas 3 6 one sal if Vase See 1:OoO Wn gO NAC: NU AS: Oath. 12:7 2a | Pe tAd Beh aN eho GF: PAneNha: AmMEOTNOL | AIAN de hich PA: 3 (YE: | “EME: h¥O: ON Fuly: \ ANNeI OH PANE Ay: “AN; -TN:hde ANhALC:ON 4 KUAVLANM nba gee: e ACTS OF FASILADAS AND ABBA NOB. a.D. 1478-94. BRIT. MUS. ORIENTAL 706. Pare XXIV.—rmorte, British Museum. OrrentaL 706.—Brtween A.D. 1478 anv 1494. ‘4 | \HE Acts of Fasiladas, or Basilides, and of ‘Abba Nob, the former of which were translated from Coptic into Athiopic by Simeon, a monk of the convent of S. Antony, A.M. 6889 = A.D. 1397. On vellum ; quarto, about 114 inches by 94; 202 leaves; two columns. g the reign Written duri of ‘Eskéndér, or Alexander, surnamed Kiwastantinés, or Constantine (II.), A.M. 6911—6986 = A.D. 1478 —1494. See Wright's is a beautiful specimen of calligraphy, Gatherings. Of eight leaves, except the last, which has only five ; not numbered. Ruling. On one side only, with a dry point, guided by prickings on the outer margin. The columns are bounded by single vertical lines. Punctuation. As in plate X. In red are written lines 1, 3, and 5, of both columns; the numerals ®; and © ; (24) in col. 2, 1. 8; the names of f-; (Nob) in col, 1, 1.8; and king AMABEC : (’Eskéndér) in col, 2, 1. 8: and the letter = (the initial of =MM3M.¢r :, Kw end of col, 2, 1. 10. astantinés) at the atalogue of the Aithiopic MSS. in the British Museum, no, cels ii. This volume Forms of letters. and the curved form of others, are usually not so strongly The triangular shape of some letters marked as in plate X. Here, too, the vowel of the letter a has mostly a connecting stroke, as in col. 2, 1. 3, 1.20°: gadio ; but we find the other form in col, 2, 1. 5, Rte'F : salotz. This latter form disappears after the xvm cent. Pé is R, as in ANKae4 :, f. 135 a, col. 2, 1. 4. Ornamentation. The ornament in the plate, f. 134 a, consists of white interlaced figures with red outlines, the intermediate spaces being filled in with green. That on f, 3 wis more richly coloured with red, yellow and blue. See Wright’s Catalogue, plate IIT. EGYPTIAN ARAMAIC PAPYRUS. (Late Procemaic PERIOD) BRITISH MUSEUM. Prates XXV. anp XXVI.—Eeyprian ArAmarc. British Museum. Papyrus OVI#. (Late Proremarc or rarty Roman.] | Eee ema of a tale, composed either by a heathen Aramean, who was hostile to the Egyptian religion, or by an Egyptian Jew as a Haggidah on Exodus, ch. i.,—more probably the latter. There remain only two torn leaves, the first of which is reproduced in these two plates. On papyrus; much mutilated both to the right and left; the original length of the lines cannot be determined; the di sions of the columns on the recto and verso do not correspond. The language is Aramaic, strongly tinged with Phcenician or Hebrew; the character is Egyptian-Aramaic cursive, approximating in many forms to the Hebrew square letters; the words are separated by small spaces. This papyrus once formed part of the collection of the Due de Blacas. It was first published and deciphered by Michelangelo Lanci in his work entitled “La Sacra Scrittura illustrata con monumenti Fenico-Assirj ed Egiziani” (Roma, 1827), pp. 18, 19, and Tav. 1° e 2°, translated into French by the Abbé . Andrée (Orange, 1844) ; and re-edited by Gesenius in his “ Scripturae Linguaeque Phoeniciae Monumenta quotquot supersunt” (Leipzig, 1837), pp. 286—245 and Tabb. 31—33 (fairly good reproductions of Lanci’s plates). Monuments of this class are exc ively rare in the libraries and museums of Europe. See F. F. Beer, “ In: riptiones et papyri veteres Semitici quotquot in Agypto reperti sunt, partic. prima” (Leipzig, 1833); Barges, “ Papyrus gypto-araméen appartenant au Musée du Louvre” (Paris, 1862); De Vogiié, “Syrie Centrale, Inscriptions Sémitiques” (Paris, 1868), p. 125 seqq. and Pl. 16; Ariodante Fabretti, “Tl Museo di Antichita della R. Universita di Torino” (1872) ; F. Lenormant, “ Essai sur la Propagation de T'Al- phabet Phénicien,” t.i., 1°°livr., pl. xi.; 2” livr., pp. 227—237, and pl. xix. ; Silvestre, “Paléographie Univer- selle” (Paris, 1841), t. i., pl. 12; Lepsius, “Denkmiler, Abth. vi., Bl. 124 (Bd xii.), Papyrus-fragmente in Phonicischer Cursivschrift.” The fragments of this papyrus are now preserved between thin plates of glass, in consequence of which the holes in the papyrus appear in the photograph as dark spots. As they have suffered a good deal since the first facsimile was given by Lanci, the now missing or injured letters are marked in the following transcription with a stroke above; doubtful letters, with a query. The translation is, of course, only tentative. Reoro. Pr. XXV. soe et eee pmb. Nba xh vee eee eee eee omnbs oD uN sere ap por sy omrp 8 peseace - = = = = = = = = = 958) JIM ya) 4 hen oe 2 = - == -- - [fla oman? mpry 6 se eeee 35 wos bupy aba mabpnn 6 settee ANID 2 WN TW ANID 7 eee ee Foye sds pwrsny ond saccsee Pa Wb Spies a8 es boo a 1, nec impleatur venter eorum pa[ne] - - - - - ------ 2. quisque dolores deorum suorum - - - - = - - 3. statuta eorum donec aedificabunt ur[bem] - - = - - - - 4. et diebus aliis edat -.- - - - = - - - = = Dig usee) Use patties tometmer|(2t]| eal let- aC 6. et ponderet (i.c., consideret) id in corde suo et interficiat {USCC en dominus suus et liberet quisque filios domini x GS Seo So Sa Se eS eS wo panem et congregabuntur dii Aigypti - - - - - - Qua a em annos et = “=< = = = == Verso. Pr. XXVI. -- Siwy sob waman by wabd---------- 1 too ee nooo my ons wna I2------- 2 -- - Syoox xobosmbownmpqa------ 3 ----m Jon a9n3 Jan wn nbulpl - - - -- 4 pee ----Snaw xa maw vy ssaw qo pm -- 5 ; z -~ = - phn dew pam xb quan qoxa-- 6 +--+: yon ------ Nada cbs by w---- 7 1. ------- filiis meis ob ——— regis et audiit - - - - - -- Boe ass ae filius Punsh, ille cunctatus est(?). Respondit rex = - - - - - - = = 5 = = = = - 3.------ filius Punsh verba quae rex dixerat, et - - - - 4.- - - - - interfecisti eos, eas cum gladio fortitudinis GlOwetm tas ae ek et ea a ee a em 5. -------- et captivos, quos fecisti hoe anno - - - - = --- - 6. - - - - in (?) illis, et ossa tua non descendent in Oreum, et umbra tua - Recto, pl. XXY., 1. 3. The last word is doubtless the equi- valent of the Hebrew mp, Syr. lupo, but its precise form must remain uncertain.—L.4. Lanciand Gesenius give )nK, incorrectly. Theplural termination .is written defectively, both here and in 1. 9; but the dual _ in full, in 1. 8, p39.— L, 5. Lanci and Gesenius give mp1, but the first letter is certainly y, not, as in jy , 1. 8. [am might possibly be (njam, “et immolet,” but itis doubtful whether t is used in this dialect for Aramaic 4 except in the pronouns.—L. 6. After the 5 given by Lanci and Gesenius, we seem to discern the upper and lower portions of a ).—L. 7. The black mark oyer the 7 of 7w in the photograph is merely a hole in the papyrus; but the » of wx is really written over the line.—L. 8. The mark or letter between the w and the } of }wi2n resembles » more than any other letter, but it ought to be y, as the form pw22n is grammatically incorrect ; besides in pl. XXVL, 1. 6, we find pnm; therefore read yuan. The black mark above is again nothing but a hole in the papyrus. Verso, pl. XXVI., 1. 1. Lanci and Gesenius read Nq73n, - - - - - super milia regis - - -------+----- * propter splendorem regis,” but the fourth letter seems to be clearly a3. Perhaps xaman is an Egyptian word, with the feminine article n prefixed, like xan in the inscription of Carpentras, 1. 1, and ct “crocodile,” in Arabic (Coptic, xecag). The Dictionaries of Hieroglyphs actually acknowledge a radical ba-ba, meaning “ rayonner, resplen- der, briller,” corresponding to Coptic Roy Koy, “splendere.” , also in Il. 3, 5, and ny in 1. 5, are the usual forms in this dialect, instead of 7 and Nt.—L, 2. wp is the reading of the papyrus, not wi (Lanci, Gesenius). It seems to be an Egyptian name, pi-wnsh or p-unsh, Coptic moron, “the wolf.”—L. 4. Lanci and Gesenius read wrongly yon. —L. 5. The first letter of the line may be either n or x, but more probably the former. The third letter of the next word is quite uncertain; Lanci and Gesenius have taken it for a .—L.6. The black marks above and below the word })nm are merely the holes in the papyrus mentioned above.—L. 7. The last letter is clearly x, and not mn (Lanci and Gesenius). [For assistance in describing these two plates the Committee are much indebted to Professor Dr. Néldeke and Dr. Euting of Strassburg. ] XXVI. EGYPTIAN ARAMAIC PAPYRUS. (Late PToLemaic PERIOD.) BRITISH MUSEUM. e ss ; * ree E ger Sees ¢€ ae hi hIO7 293 Se <3 BASIL ON THE HOLY SPIRIT. BRIT. MUS., on el eu xO mass ina mia ete suan iaios Decaes relxcistinaa eas uasSaee adl>s os8ean aca aasasxss na sen +5355 RE Snarciasa, esa aga : Sa < pinecone yinoslr< ono ADD. MS. 14,542. A.D. 509. Prate XXVII.—Syrtac. Britist Mussum. Apprrronan 14,542.—A.D. 509. y | \HE Treatise of Basil of Caesarea on the Holy Spirit. On vellum; small quarto, about 93 inches by 7%; 94 leaves of Arabia (the district around Damascus), by a monk named Jacob, A. Gr. 820=A.D. 509. Wright's Catalogue of Syriac MSS. in the British Museum, p. 416, no. pxuvi. The plate, f M Tom. xxxii.). Gatherings. Of eight leaves, signed with Syriac arith- metical figures on the recto of the first leaf, and with Syriac letters on the verso of the last; e.g., £47 a, ps (245); £. 54, 4 (7). Ruling. Faint lines, drawn with a dry point. The columns are also marked off by faint side-lines. Writing. A fine, regular E The title and ngéla. subscription of the work, as well as the running title, are rubricated. In the plate erasures have been made in col. 2, ll. 10, 11, and in the running title. Punctuation. Other points besides the final stop are occasionally used, e. ‘amass, f. 27 a, col. 2, 1, penult.; and the diacritical points are abundantly added @ pr. manu, At the end of paragraphs we find various combinations of points and cirelets, red and black. ; two columns. Written in the convent of Patntr (qa1sa), in the Roman province See b of the - corresponds with part of ch. 43 of the Greek text, col. 148 in Migne’s edition (Patrologia Greece Forms of Letters. co is not connected, col. 1, 1. 18; col. 2, 1.1, x exhibits its oldest forms (see pl. xi.), col. 1, IL. 8, 18, 15; col. 2, 1. 15. Initial 4, col. 2, I. 2, 8, differs from s., col. 1, 1. 16, as in pl. xi. The cursive writing on f. 94 @ is remarkable. There we find not only connected », but re in the forms J J §, and 3 > for casa. See pl. iv. of the facsimiles appended to Wright’s Catalogue of Syriac MSS. Ornamentation. The running titles are usually orna- mented with different combinations of dots and lines or figures of leaves (see ff, 31 6,47 0, 510,53). In the plate, however, we find a ewer and chalice, coloured green and shaded with black, the mouth of each yessel being red, XXVIII. : “0 ee met sete AY wersy QUyH hea h mircega ss ern SB, eZ swgpanwe? 8 = a ‘gareeana 2 rely sy ge an A «He OT asad "a 2. Maco Viel RYAN A ROY ANSI BT DER ALI ING Ay s : Ua moMQadn wy RO esse 1 a ae ‘tsi p64 aR AM OY z Ce eee nates 3 aS Ne gums Sian ope oy eae sly Ute SS rs vee ze : a eines * PEL RRADN 4 4 op won Dat cua g see 4 Bs 5 ees EN, BRBIN DAOGO8 tH “Hh Rawwg ! n> wea SG we aeh a 1B MEMORY We — Y AQOO YY Wy pees ‘a Bd oy MeN engs o 2 oma 79 w “TAA TRUS Vv ag woah Rep dkeomny 6 7 oa, ee DBs “2-4 Wwe A osey'cso's, Bu ny -miang as BS WN whee ao ad 20 PPR? as “SN Ae = SOA WA ORS of Sania et “PN mut rg : PENTATEUCH, HEBREW-SAMARITAN AND ARABIC. CAMBRIDGE, UNIV. LIB. ADD. MS. 714. BON E a a | 2 a s | A.D. 1219. Prarn XXVIII.—Samariran. Campriper. Unxiverstry Lisrary. Apprtronat MS. 714.—A.D. 1219. I/ | \HE Pentateuch, Hebrew text and Arabic translation, both in Samaritan characters. On vellum ; about 1£ ; inches by 10%; 312 leaves (of which one at the beginning and seven at the end have been supplied by a modern hand on paper) ; two columns of from 35 to 38 lines. The Hebrew text is on the right, the Arabic translation on the left. This manuscript was written A.H. 616 = A.D. 1219, by ASNDS OFAN D2 TWD) IN ID ANAT AN 72 ANTI °AN (ie., of Saréphath), for the priest ANDDY 97 OTIS 72 maby =) now (in Arabic, ..é=). A statement to this effect is made both in Samaritan and Arabic in a space marked off down the centre of each column from Deut. i. 1 to Deut. some atique, vill iii. 11. The Samaritan notice is printed in full in the Journal Asi série, t.i., no. 3, April 1873, iations from the version of Abu f alll y8, Gen. i. 13, etc.; da= instead of Es (SP), Gen. i. 14, ete. Remark the use of >» Persian ham, for the Hebrew BD) in p- 368 (where for p) read py). The Arabic translation offers many v: Sa‘d, as published by Profes or Kuenen of Leiden, e.. Ky Aue y, instead of , 1. 30 of our plate. Gatherings. Usually of ten leaves, though some placed, as in x), I. 15, 28; _»ss}, 1. 22. The tanwin have only eight. is marked in Ks, 1. 18, and Gs, 1. 38. Vulgar forms are frequent, such as |yinG, Ivey, 1. 45 Ip tai and Ruling. On one side, with a dry point, guided by I, Il. 28, 29. prickings on the margins. The columns are marked off by double vertical lines. Punctuation. A single point, as usual, after each Writing. The writing, which depends from the ruled word, except at the end of a line. At the end of a line, is not so flowing as in Plate XII., but exhibits section, —: Also the following: -, ., ~, <’, anno ON mom aN 2 atm? Onan TT AN D+ Da9'34 3 D2>° Mp ‘MT NS OVI AN" TANS 4 prbx mm maw * OYIIN 927 mT ND oy [In describing this plate the Committee have to acknowledge the valuable assistance of Mr. R. L. 3ensly, Fellow of Caius College, Cambridge. ] “WNASNW HSILIWa ‘814 ‘Ov ‘“NOILdIYISNI M3AYSaH Prare XXIX.—Herrew. British Musrum.—A.D. 718. PITAPH of Mashta, the daughter of David, who died at Aden, in South Arabia, on the 12th of Ab, A. Contr. [10]29=A.D. 718. The inscription is cut on a stone slab, measuring 18 inches by 15. The plate is a reduced copy. See Levy in the Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlindischen Gesell- schaft, Bd xxi, pp. 156—160, and Lenormant, E: 2” livr., p. 275. ai sur la Propagation de YAlphabet Phénicien, t. i., The inscription is regularly engraved in letters about one inch high. The words are separated by small spaces. The character is the square Hebrew, not differing very notably from the later familiar forms. We may call attention, however, to the shape of 9, 7, 8, °, }, and D. Contractions and numerical letter distinguished by a superimposed mark over each letter. are meen nody math) appx 1 DPT myn mpm 2 na dn Nnwe monn 3 DOTA yyyn TWonT pin 4: AM IT Dw NDT 5 nw ax wont 3) on 6 maw) 25 7 1. Was gathered to her long home the woman, 2. the accomplished, the modest, the charitable, 4. the aged, the pious, the humble, the 3. the pious, Mashta (may her rest be g mry!), the daughter of ‘ood, 5. the God-fearing David (may the Spirit of God give him rest!), 6. on the 12th day of the month of Ab, in the year 7. 29 of Contracts. Line 1. mpbiy mad mppya. Compare Gen. xxy. 8, 2d Kings xxii. 20, and Eccles. xii. 5.—Line 2. aypy mp7, might certainly mean “aged,” but is more lik “accomplished,” “learned ;? see 1, 4. NPAT is the tradi- tional pronunciation of this feminine of pyy.—Line 8. pM is the feminine of pT, instead of which the more common Rabbinic form is mont, by way of distinction from the name of the unclean bird mond, che stork. Nw) seems to be a not uncommon name for women among the Jews of South Arabia. The mother of the poet ndxp Hoya yaw, who flourished about A.D. 1570, was so called (see Levy, loc. cit., p. 157). The correct pronuncia- tion is uncertain ; it has been suggested that it is meant for The letters 5M are a con- 10. the feminine of myn, Moses. ah, xi. traction of a3 ANMI WA, taken from Isaiah, Till the discovery of this and other tombstones at Aden, the oldest instances of the use of this formula were of the xili™ cent.; see Zunz, Zur Geschichte und Literatur, p. 34: “aged” or —Line 4. 7 may here signify either “leamed;” but mapa in 1. 2 almost certainly means “accomplished,” for xnwi was evidently unmarried (other- wise her husband would have been mentioned along with, or instead of, her father), and it appears from 1. 5 that both father and daughter died within the space of one year. xv yay for wyt, as in Num. xii. 8.—Line 5. oy ative), instead of ON NI or NY (taking oyav as an accu m7 is written in The mm, to avoid using the name of God. full, as in the later Biblical books, instead of 17. letters 44 are a contraction of a2 M7 M7, taken from ah, Lxiii, 14, by Zunz, loc. cit., p. 355, With the Jews of Arabia its use is strictly limited to the The oldest examples of this formula given oth do not go beyond the x" cent. period of one year after death, consistently with the Jewish s not exceeding twelve belief in a judgment in ordinary ca months,—Lines 6,7. nivaw> 5 nw can hardly mean any- The thousand thing but “in the year 29 of Contracts.” is omitted; but that a hundred or hundreds should also be ” left out is very The term now), “of stars. ” was not employed for many centuries after unlikely. or “contrae! ) the introduction of the Seleucian era, the older formule being om ma (Racireias “ENgjvov, Ist Mace. i. 10), yond py? py madpd, >, Dm pyed or W prod, and finally mw. [In describing this plate and plate XXX. the Committee have received much assistance from the Rev. Dr. Schiller-Szinessy of Cambridge. ] pe wo inn bn pre ppl ‘on _ (w)0h PIRYPY es DW wrlyap MP OP) WP - {ShSoBnow yi sp 0 se ade of Ae fe ee §” 5 AV Ss yy ovens "2977 sete = ope (ards WIND ms opp pit Pf WP py) * inh § 391969) S277 PH Kee whys palo,’ an roa shaver op ponsna) Pb RSP IY byes pn) i aphanbsop cal ; wp yabaoady (is . 02D spy {eet AWA pt e.g : poet ryop rs Rly Mow? ibe é my’ aed IpPpPSe yp) pop spr ? ope yl ons none pi) IPP AP oy wks pig pape pei ady wipe pe espperm ' ii) ese, 12) panne LoD oso» vals baby Benbe pr piasop vase ph omnow fs : + pop pel (7 op oy * man oe SEPHER HAM-MISHKAL. a.p. CAMBRIDGE, UNIV. LIB. Dd. 11. 22. 1363-4. Prats XXX.—Husrew. Campripcr. University Linrary. Dp. 11. 22.—A.D. 1363—64. HE work variously entitled Sépher ham-Mishkal, or Sépher Shekel hak-Kodesh, or Sépher han- Nephesh ha-Chakhamah, “the Book of the Intelligent Soul,” composed by Rabbi Mosheh ben ra in Spain, for a certain Rabbi 2; 81 leaves. Written by Yéshu ah (7YIw) ben Rabbi Shelomoh, for his own use, in the month of Tebeth, A.M. 5124 = A.D. 1363-4, Shem-tob of Leon (the reputed author of the Zohar), at Guadal Ya‘akob, A.M. 5050= A.D. 1290. On paper; octayo, about 8$ inches by at Mostaghanem (O)NIND1, dito), east of Oran in Algiers. It is probably the oldest extant copy of this work, which has been printed, though only in part, at Basel in 1608. Paper. Of Italian manufacture; ribbed; the water- | Writing. A fine African Séphardi in Rabbinic characters. marks are flower-bud with two leaves, bell, and pair of | The seribe has generally filled up a vacant space at the end scales, the first of which is an almost certain indication of of a line with a letter or two from the first word of the paper of the latter half of the xiv cent. next line ; but here and there he has used letters of his Gatherings. Of from 10 to 16 leaves; not signed. own name or that of his father, such as » (ff. 7 5, 8 b, 14 b, Catchwords occur, but irregularly. 29 a), 7 (£. 11D), part of aw (f. 19 b), and 5 (f. 29 a). uel PALHIOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY. COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT. E. A. BOND, Esq, KEEPER OF THE MSS., BRITISH MUSEUM, President. W. DE G. BIRCH, Esq., BRITISH MUSEUM, J. W. BONE, Esq, B.A, F.S.A. Rev. H. O. COXE, M.A., BopLEy’s LIBRARIAN, OXFORD. Mons. L. DELISLE, DirEcToR OF THE NATIONAL LIBRARY, PARIS, MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTE. J. WINTER JONES, Esq, PRINCIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH MUSEUM. Rey. Proressor LIGHTFOOT, D.D., Canon oF St. PAur’s. WILLIAM MASKELL, Esq, M.A. PROFESSOR J. RUSKIN, D.C.L., OxrorD. E. M. THOMPSON, Es@., ASSISTANT KEEPER OF THE MSS,, BRITISH MuSEUM, Hon. Sec. G. F. WARNER, Esq, M.A., BRiTIsH MusEuM, Hon. Treas. Proressor Dr. W, WATTENBACH, BERLIN, PROFESSOR J. O. WESTWOOD, OxForD. W. ALDIS WRIGHT, Esq, M.A. TRIN. COLL. CAMBRIDGE. PROFESSOR W. WRIGHT, LL.D., QUEENS’ COLL, CAMBRIDGE. FACSIMILES OF ANCIENT MANUSCRIPTS. ORIENTAL SERIES. Para sie EDITED BY WILLIAM WRIGHT, LL.D. PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE. CONTENTS. 31. Ashtasahasrika-prajfiaparamita. Sanskrit. A.D. 1015. 32. Kalyanavarman, Saravali. Sanskrit. A.D. 1286. 33. Kalachakra-tantra. Sanskrit. A.D. 1446. 34. Royal Patent or Privilege. Arabic. A.D. 868-884. 35. ‘Abu ‘l-‘Ala ’al~-Ma‘arri, Siktu ‘z-Zand. Arabic. A.D. 1082-83. 36. Yahya ‘ibn ‘Adam, Kitabu ‘l-~Harag. Arabic. A.D. 1096. 37. Kamil of *Al-Mubarrad. Arabic. A.D, 1167. 38. ‘Ibn Hallikan, Wafayatu ‘l-’A‘yan. Arabic. A.D. 1257. 39. Pentateuch. Syriac. A.D. 464. 4Q. Former and Latter Prophets. Hebrew. [XIIth Century.] 4). Wagiographa. Hebrew. A.D. 1347. 42, Pistis Sophia. Coptic. [WIIth Century.] PHOTOGRAPHED AND PRINTED IN FACSIMILE BY THE AUTOTYPE COMPANY. London: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS. 1878. [All rights reserved.| ‘EvVSI SW ‘GGV “s!71 ‘AINN ‘AD901Y¥saNVvd S101 GV “WLINWH Vd VNCWHd -YWINSVHVSVLHSV et ate een AXXX Prarr XXXI.—Sansxrir. Campriver. Unrversiry Lisrary. Apprtionat MS. 1643.—A.D. 1015. HE Ashtaschasrikd-prajnaparamita (see Plate XVI). 91. 485 i | \ On palm-leaf (except f. 1, which is modern colophon, f. paper), about 21} in. by 223 leaves, with six lines in a page. According to the 222 b, which is rather obscurely worded in some places, it was written in Nepal, in the year 135 = A.D. 1015, when Rudradeva and Lakshmikamadeva enjoyed half the kingdom of Raji Bhojadeva, by one Sujatabhadra, in the Srilhamvihara (or Srilhan Vihar). According to another statement, in a different character and handwriting, beginning in the middle of the last line of f. 222 b, this book was rescued from the hands of unbelieving people (i.¢., of non-Buddhists) by one Ardrakarund-vajra, in the 259 = A.D. 1139, in the reign of Raja Manadeya. ., p- 269) and in Dr. D. Wright's History of Nepal, p- 813, as the successor of Bhojadeva, but the name of the co-regent Rudradeva does not occur, at any ve Lakshmikamadeva is named both in Prinsep’s Essays on Indian Antiquities (ed. Thomas, vol. rate in this place, in either list; he seems, however, to be the same king who is mentioned in Plate XVI. It would appear, therefore, that the dates of early Nepalese history must be learned from the colophons of the old MSS. in London, Paris, and Cambridge. This is one of the MSS. purchased by Dr. D. Wright at Kathmandi. Ruling. The columns are bounded by double side- | is occasionally represented, at the end of a line or divi- lines. The holes for pegs or strings are in the centres | sion of a page, by a hooked figure over its consonant to of the spaces between the columns. the right, as in khalwd, col. 1, Ist half, 1. 4; na kam, Writing. Ancient Bengali (compare Hodgson, col. 3, 2nd half, at the end. wo small lines or points serve as a hyphen in pariva-rito, col. 3, 1. 3. Ornamentation. This manuscript contains many pic- tures, usually highly coloured. In the page before us we have, to the left, the sri-kanakachaitya, or “ Golden Temple,’ depicted in yellow. and red, on a deep-blue ; the enclosing circlet is white, Asiatic Researches, vol. xvi. p. 417, and the second plate). The footnotes (1. 7) to columns 1 and 3 are in a different character, viz., Hodgson’s Bhanjin-mola or Bhwanjin-mola. Each page is divided into 3 columns of nearly equal breadth, the first and third of which are sometimes subdivided by the insertion of pictures. The inside column is reproduced in great part in the second half of the plate. of the leaf in letter-numerals, or partly so; to the ground, with white star with two yellow lines at the left-hand opening; the outer ; and the exterior border square is red, with white sta is white. To the right is the Lokandtha, or “ Lord of To the left of the page is the number in arithmetical figures (in the plate, 123). Forms of Letters, ete. See in general Plate XVI. The letter 7 before a consonant is represented by a small horizontal line to the left of the letter, as in nirvanam, col. 1, 2nd half, 1.1; drydshta, col. 2,1. 3. The diph- thong ¢ sometimes takes the form of =, as in paramite, col. 1, 2nd half, 1. 2, at the end. The long vowel @ 1 [ya]vadasya devaputrah kshipra(-) va kalpavasesham va char ntam etad avochat | maha(- mn ribhimau kalpam devaputra bhagava(-) n bhagavan ya(-) trih parami pha vi(-) avacharas cha devapu(-) pratishthanteti || © || ary | 108 || atha khalv a(-) mahasatvah saha sramanenaivasyam gambhira antam diram gatva antarhitah trah kamadhatau prati(-) ni(-) vanta(-) m etad avochat | yo bhagavan bodhisatvo ramita(-) yam adhimuchyate | nava am. shtasahasrikayam prajilaparam yushman subhitir bhaga lo iyate na samliyate na(-) yatishthate na dhanvayati cha dharayishyati | bhavayist kutro(-) yah subhate bodhisatvo adhimokshyate | navaleshyate na samleshyate navasth ty enam gambhiram ¢ papamnah | bhagavan aha | mahasatvah saha srava(. na kam(-) In a different character, beside the first picture, uttara the second picture, mahavire buddhartipakalokana(-) yanapu J [For the description of this plate the Committee ar taram nirvanam pratikamkshi(-) d uta prajilaparamite(- pradakshinikritya bhagavato ‘ntikad gamishyama am. prajiia na vichikitsati | na kam(-) the World,” in the form of Mahavira Buddha, clad in red, ona green ground; the building is coloured red, yellow and white ; the side-figures are red and yellow, on a dark- Between the columns is depicted the vaji blue ground. ujra, painted red on a white ground. The boards are lacquered, and painted with figures on the inside, in a style superior to that of Plate XX XIII. tavyam | na tv eva tesham sraddhanusa- atha khalu te kamavachara ripava(-) charas cha ) ) a bhagavatah padau Ssirobhir abhivandya i(-) ty ukt ty arochya prakrantas te shthanta ripavacharas cha devaputra brahmaloke rito nama trayodasamah am achintyapariva= a kshaty abhinandati cha | darganam sravanam prajiaparamitam sa bha(-) gavam kutas chyutva nenaivasyam gambhirayam prajhaparamitayam te na dhanvayishyati na vichikitsishyati | =) nasya(-) Beside rushapuramandale srikanakachaityah | 11 thah | 12 e indebted to Professors Eggeling and Cowell.] ‘9c! OV ‘6EVI'SW TVLNZIYO"SNW ‘LINE ‘TIVAVEVS ‘NVAYVAVNYVATY “TIXXX Prater XXXIL—Sansxrir. British Mus fate apage. The A.D. 1286, in and 121, which are on paper), about 13 in. by 2}; ast 6 leaves contain astrological diagrams only. M. ORIENTAL 1439.—A.D. 1286. Saravali, a treatise on horoscopes, by Kalyanavarman. On palm-leaf (except ff. 15, 33, 55, 89, ie 121 leaves, with from 5 to 8 lines in Written in Nepal, in the year 406, = the reign of Ananta-malla-deva, f. 110, samvat 406 chaitrasula (read saudi) tritiydyam sukravasare kritika (read krittika) nakshatre raja rdjadhirajaparamesvara 877 srt Anantamalladevasya vijayardjye likhitam idam pustako ‘yam samdptah. Compare the name of “ Anwanta mall deva” in Prinsep’s Essays. ? 4 pian T a ) ed. Thomas, vol. ii., p. 270. This MS. was purchased Ruling. None. Near the middle of each leaf is a square ce, pierced in the centre for a string. Writing. The writing, though resembling in many points that of Plate XVI, and possessing several features in common with the Bengali alphabet, may nevertheless be regarded as constituting a distinct character, which is perhaps best designated by the name of Nepalese. Tits dominant feature is the hook-shaped curve on the top of most of the letters, instead of the connecting trans verse line of the bala-band (or “ top-bound”) Devanagari character; and in this leading characteristic it may be said to furnish the connecting link between the ordinary Devanagari and the Uriya alphabet.—The marginal writing on f. 365 (see plate) is in a different ink and by a later hand, more resembling that of Plate XVII.—To the right of each leaf, on the verso, is its number in arith- metical fi ives ; to the left, in letter-numerals, which have not, however, been carried beyond f. 38 b. Forms of Letters, ete. Some letters have a peculiarly archaic and uncommon shape.—Initial 7 (in indawh, f. 36 b, Us s somewhat like that noticed in Plates XVI. and XVIL, and closely resembles the form used in inscriptions previous to the xiith cent. See the Comparative Table of Sanskrit Alphabets in Prinsep, vol. ii, p. 40, and the yodgame jagad idam pratibodham eti madhyamgate prasarati prakritikriy at Kathmandi by Dr. D. Wright. Indian Antiquary, vol. i., p. 80, vol. ii., p. 258. also found in Jaina manuscripts.—Gh (in ghana, f. 3 1. 5, janghah, 1. 6) shows the three vertical strokes noticeable in the same older sources——Ph (of which there is no example in the plate) is distinguished from h only by the curve at the right-hand side of the upper half of the letter being more rounded inwards. Where it occurs in connection with other letters (as in sphuta, f. 1,1. 6), it has no resemblance to its original shape. — Y in con- junction with a preceding consonant (as in éakyate, f. 1, 1. 8, vakyah, f. 36 6, 1. 4) looks more like a dimi- nished dh,—The palatal nasal (in chafichalo, f. 36, 1. 1) hardly differs from the dental nasal (in mandalikah, f. 36, 1. 3).—There is no distinction between } and ».—As for the occasional interchange of § and s, n and x, final ira and the nasal corresponding to the following consonant, they have been tacitly corrected in the tran- anu Other errors of a merely clerical nature have scription. been set right within brackets, but no attempt has been made to correct passages which are so corrupt as f. 1, 1, 4. Ornamentation. The wooden boards are lacquered and painted with figures on the inside, but these are now much defaced. isu | astamgate Fol. 1. (1) . iryayah || sv: svapa[read pijti nisvasiti [ead tye ?] kamatram bhanu{h] sa esha ja- (2) yati prakataprabhavah | vistarak itini munibhih parihritya puratanani sastrani | horatantram rachitam. Varahamiharena samkshepat || rasidasavarggabhipa- adas tiyogayurdday: yatas tena || ata eva tyaktva tebhyah si de yabhittvagata bhrantyeha yasy: sahasa ya: gatah || horam vyapya ta[read va Kalyanavarmma kriti || hora ritanam sishya- pra | © || svibhit- [read (Jdhyayah | (1) la bhra [ie ‘d svadasa |dinam | vishayavibhagam [read gah] spas vistarebhyo yavananarendradirachitasastrebhyah | sakal tesvaro rachayati spashtam sa saray , 36] || sauragrihadrishtih || tha [#e., 20] || adityacharah || tha [ie., 20] || seva tam[(read tijkartum na sakyate lam asaram am samu{djdhritya || devagrama yam praposhanabalad [corrected at the top of the page into t 5) ete , aa at oe oe mapayanpraposhanabalad] brahmandasatpanjaraih [altered into panjarena] | kirttih simhavilasiniva alim | sriman sastravinirmmalikritamanah nam sphutatarartha [read a] Sisivajalachcha [delete chcha] Kalyanavarmmasilan nadiva Svalread SaJravali bhrit] | Kalyanavarmmarachit m Saravalyam atarah — prathamo Fol. 365. ampraptavittah sahaja titah sahasi mamsalubdhah kamarttah kshamajanuh kunakhatanukachas chafichalo mana- (2) chittah | padmankah panipadau [read de] vitatasutajano vartularaktanetrah || sasnehas tapabhiru[r] vranasa- hitasirah strimato [read rato] meshah indauh [read mesha indau] || atyugrakaro nripatih pranatana{m] mardavam bha- (8) jati jatah | virah sangramaruchi [read chi] ravina drishte gasini mesheh [read she] || dantakshirugbhi [read ni?] tapto vis ‘ivikshataga mirtira[read miitra}krichchhrarttah_|| cha | budhadrishte meshasthe ni savibo- nripateh ikah syat [read syan] meshe kuje kshite sa- yah vijr vipulakirttih || bahubhrityadhanasamriddho sadvakyah syan mata [read syat satam ?] himaragmau [here the line at the foot of the page, added by another (5) tha[read dhajbhipatir vvapi | meshagrihe drishte bhave jatah || meshadrishtih || vyadhorasko [’}tidata scribe, is to be inserted] sanina [read ravina] ghanakutilakachah kamukah larttisilah | kanta[h] kanyaprajava- h | madhyante bhogabhogi prithukaracharanaskanda[ read ta{read shtha}kakudi subhagatih kshantiyuktau gavindau (6) n vrishasamanayano hamsahela[read la] prachar: dhajjanvasyajanghah | sanka{h] pa[r]}svasyapri || karshakam ati- adachatushpadadhanaih samriddham cha | prayongi[read yogi]kam prakurute vrishe [read (7) karmmakaram dvi kshitas chandrah || atikamam kujadrishto yuvati krite nashtasaramitrajanam | hridayaharam he] ravivil narinam matur a- (8) 3 [pointing to line 3 from below] drishte guruna puman jatah | krayavikrayavit prajiio gunayan nripasatkrito mahavibhavah | rajanikare meshasthe sukrena nirikshite bhavati || taskaramukhyo mirkhah parannabhoji vilagachittag cha | meshasthe himarasmau [For the description of this plate the Committee are indebted to Dr. Haas, of the British Museum.] “VOECISW ‘COV ‘Sil AINN ‘390IYaWNVvd ‘9¢bl AV “WHINVL-VYNVHOVIV™ “TOXXX Prats XXXITI.—Sansxnir. Campripce. Untversiry Lisrary. Appirionan MS. 1364.—A.D. 1446. es) Aes Kalachakra-tantra. On palm leaf, about 13} in. by 24; 128 leaves, with six lines in a page. Written in the village of Keraki, by Jaya-rama-datta, the kayastha (kayath or government clerk) of the village of Jhiara, in Magadha (S. Bihar), for the bhikshu Sri-jfiana, and dated ‘“ Wednes- day, the thirteenth day of the dark fortnight of Bhadra, in the year of the Vikramaditya era 1503,” corresponding with A.D. 1446. This manuscript, which is in excellent preservation, forms part of the collection made by Dr. D. Wright at Kathmandi. Ruling. The text is bounded by two triplets of lines at the end of the first half of 1.2. The addition of an | on the right and left. In the middle of each leaf is a | upper stroke forms ai and au, as in tasmai, at the be- square space, pierced in the centre for a string. | ginning of 1.1; aih, in the first half of 1. 5. The Writing Forms of Letters, ete. Observe initial i at the begin- deyadharmmo "yam, 1. 2, duhkhaprasamo ’stu, 1. 6; but ning of the second and third portions of 1. 1. The it is denoted by a special sign in namo ’stu, at the be- diphthong ¢ is expressed by a slightly curved stroke before its consonant, as in ye, at the beginning of 1. 2, or te, at the beginning of Il. 5, 6; o is formed by a ginning of 1. 1. Ornamentation. The boards are lacquered and or mented, both inside and outside, with paintings of gods, similar stroke before, and a straight line after, the con- | demons, and animals. Old Bengali, fine and regular. clision of an initial a is generally not expressed, as in a | | sonant, as in namo, near the beginning of 1. 1, or yo, | 1 tasmai namo ’stu || 231 || iti dvadasasahasrikadibuddhoddhrite srimati kalachakre jfanapatalah pafichamah || || iti srimat-kalachakratantrarajah samaptah || || 2 ye dharmma hetuprabhava hetum teshim tathagato hy avadat | teshafi cha yo nirodha evam vadi mahasramanah || deyadharmmo yam pravaramahayananvayayinam || {| 3 srimachéakyabhikshusrijfianasrikanam yad atra punyam tad bhavaty acharyopa(-) dhyayamatapitripar- vangamam kritva sakalasatvaraser anuttara samyaksambodhijnanaphalala(-) 4 pbhayeti || || paramabhattaraketyadirajavali ptirvavat sri- madvikramadityadevapadanam atitarajye sam®° 1503 bhadravadi 13 budhe likhyapi(-) 5 teyam érimat...(the word sakya has been blotted out) bhikshusrijfianagikaih | likhiteyam magadhadesi(-) yakajharagramasasanikakaranakayasthasrijayaramadatteneti | kerakigramavasthi- 6 tena || subham astu || | anena saddharmmarasimritena sarvajfiadoshodbhavasitalena | klesanalaprajvalitan- tarasya lokasya duhkhaprasamo stu nityam || [For the description of this plate the Committee are indebted to Professors Eggeling and Cowell. | XXXIV. PATENT OF AHMAD IBN TULON, BRIT. MUS., ADD. MS. 12,137, A.D. 868-884. Pirate XXXIV.—Arapic, British Museum. Apprrionan 12,137.—A.D. 868-884. ROYAL patent, or deed of privilege, granted by “Ahmad ‘ibn Tiliin, the ruler of Egypt from A A.H. 254 to A.H. 270,= A.D. 868—884, to one ‘Ahmad ‘ibn Kara. On vellum, about n. by 52; much mutilated, especially on the left side and below, so that not a single line is entirely legible. It forms the fly-leaf, fol. 1, of the Syriac manuscript Add. 12,137; see Wright’s Catalogue of ac MSS. in the British Museum, p. 52, col. 1. Writing. Kufi, strongly inclining to Nashi, entirely l projects below the line in ywlwl, Il. 2,3, and &, 1. 5. 2, é destitute of diacritical points. Forms of Letters. Observe the form of Sin & CaM, dye, Il 2,3; gc, 1 3. Final g is reverted in and «3S, 1. 4, as compared with the longer }. Final Tee Final 3 seems hardly to differ in form from 3; PONY As Nitta os! 5) Je olla Ceased creo |ol! el wr i i oa a) (?) kes Va 2 =, Owing to the yellowish colour of the parchment, this autotype is in some places scarcely so clear as the original.—At the beginning of 1. 2, the word ji is distinct, and only the middle letter in j,5 is doubtful. Just after the mutilation, the word \» seems certain; the middle letter can only be ., not x—At the beginning of 1. 3, two letters are illegible (the second may be ,), but ). is clear. The s in s},35 is uncertain, and there is room for a letter before 1\.—In 1. 4, the , at the commencement is clear, and there can be no doubt whatever about the word In 1.5, ous, and g are certain. A letter is wanting afters. The reading JLX) «. is doubtful; the words look almost more like JL Ww. “Sil 80D “aIT ‘AINA “a9dIYaWVvd €e-z901 GV “ONVZ-Z, NLXIS Woe IC oy p mptehs eed Siecie e, Le aC ee oa esas f oye & 4) Z a At abasic : j sd Fe it e eS 37 * ai Mom x] ati— [ pe oo V4 ; Vaya as am Vy ia PSC Nia BAPAC eT I | abatements Beals |. | orp sea © OS Sg ON. adhe WM 2 jal Pl | alpine SeSpey eee prance ain Dai OF 4 Prare XXXV.—Aranic Campriper. Untversiry Lisrary, Qa. 115 (Burexnarpr).—A.D. 1082-83. as Sthtu’e-Zand (“ Sparks from the Flint”), a collection of poems by the lind poet “Abu Ala ‘al-Ma‘arri (born A.H. 363=A.D, 973, died A.H. 449=A.D. 1057), with the commentary of his pupil, the famous grammarian Abii Zakariya Yahya ‘ibn ‘Ali ’at-Tibrizi (born A.H. 421=A.D. 1030, died 1 x0\< . Coe ei > d A.H. 502=A.D. 1109), entitled Biyds Nz! bin g CLAN OW. On stout’ oriental paper; octavo, about in. by 5§. The yolume originally consisted of 252 leaves, numbered with arit imetical figures at the upper -left-hand corner of the recto of each; but there are now seven leaves prefixed, with writing by different hands of much later date and at the end there are two blank leaves. It was written by a pupil of ’At-Tibrizi, named “Abu ‘LI sim ‘Ali ‘ibn ’al-Husain ‘ibn ‘Ali ‘al-Kunbaii ‘al-Wasiti, for his own lad (Madinatu ’s-Salim), A.H. 475= A.D. 1082-83. The following are the principal contents of the title-page, which is much damaged. -lé,3)_ OU use, with his left hand (f. ro. b), at Ba SN toe wwe “ - U-> we - ~ e ue on e dS ished © MW sy Syl Gey EN Glee op A ee gy Deed eM cel oth ge Hapdy Nyt btw OS oetinn G2 oS 2 5 oe 2 ey A WG) Sr aed ds ut te Hy gl ALY De 3 J Jaw, clad. Below are five lines of writing, over which a later possessor has noted in red ink at) m=, cols) bs ike, “this is the handwriting of the commentator, may God have had merey upon him.” geil) y=! gh CUS Ie cla Be oe eed oe de el eb cust Ball ge $3 eam (f pyq D) eis BIG ILy (HH shy (f pee-vor) BS ot ee Sy gil, casual Hsl,5 < My Det alyny de Whey Al Wolo Leyl paring unet Ke sya) cubed h This is probably the finest manuscript of the Siktu ’z-Zand extant, and ought to be taken as the basis of any European edition. The left half of the plate represents f, lor a. Gatherings. Of ten leaves, except the last, which has . ; nae (a. Tee 1 twelve. They are marked, at the top of the first page of | a ea) Bs sass (Ll ymca ese rn is often written over the long vowels @, 7% a; as cach, thus: f. of a, Oz!) bike sas pastas FL AN ay | Bes Syl) Le pond eal. UUG, L 1; Gaye, L 11; ys, L 8. Tasdid is either Writing. A good Nashi, rather cramped, but per- 2 fectly clear, and fully pointed. | = or “, as in ogxu, |, 18. For madda we find ~, as Punctuation. © at the end of a sentence, ll. 3, 7, | . ~ x ee oid inl, abe in sbaill, 1. 17; but also Xs, as in aside. Sila is usually 5 Forms of Letters, etc. =, 2 3} ?, less frequently | se ae ee ; ; =, but sometimes Je, as in ,~=!,, Hamza is not u~ ye, a8 distinguished from = 35 2 ) % = Goat | : ai Ih D3 Wp, IL 1 Ge ht; as xi, 1 12—As | always expressed; as lam-alif the ’alif is turned to the ri pressed with kasra, it is placed either over or under the as in Joly, 1.21. In the case of ‘alif maksira remark the spelling to the vowels, observe = or ” for = or nee » _ sas ; | alif; as tS}, 1.19; gi, 1. QL. tor fo) ; x ln Be | 1 ee al a || je eM cil bl \,. Ge ones) oye DR oy Se eel Re ese iy al AON gull Be recto of which Al-Kunbai has written: _.t35 AB 66 —. Wai) (f tor 6) abst Xt 5 eeu) 2a . all; that is to say, “a present from ’At-Tibrizi, in his own handwriting, in explanation of the word Gillik, to be appended to the commentary on the verse beginning, ‘O brethren of ours between the Euphrates and Gillik.’” This note is as follows. Biles ys al 0d ese (originally 4.541) 43d 4&3 Je & “yee oy Sse Oo? cody eo Aa say ge The words Ltée» 4 in I, 1, and the second and third oe in Ll. 7, are subsequent insertions, *At-Tibrizi distinguishes >» 4 2s s from <3 54 andi: minal (ow e calerie : Iss =e e 5 4 4 4 and #; and writes = or » for =. Ul, 1, 5, 6. The shape of sila is very marked in 1. 6, Hels Hamza is omitted in Il. tie 4,5, : ee ee oe ~ me U2) gf Ad ate aa) bray pet ie i pe 1p Jot Sele Whe pala pe er? » des. ih habe | t 135 eet ssebeohley! Ret 34 Waele i (i Jabtsois o& es ea : Se eorhis = ree ay : : fe, 5S) 9 ASL _90 pc aC EY me Uecsergpen pea pe seil blend elle Dae Wah Ale yl st> EE Bisa | OLS tou upace ierene PS Glue let ety HESS 5 ts dws Dpastlabe a Glo Ron | AY Silat ol Lob 3 = ae Papas Salsa | aes tes teeta ih all) a | fe) E ¢ plese, eto ss ie s “go Uy) YAHYA IBN ADAM, KITABU ‘L-HARAG. ao. 1096. COLLECTION OF M.SCH ISIE IND (lize Pirate XXXVI.—Aranie. Cotiection or M. Scuermr, no. 117.—A.D. 1096. Ce Kitabu -Hardg, or “Book of the Land-tax,” of “Abi Zakariya Yahya ‘ibn "Adam ‘ibn Sulaiman ‘al-Koragi (died A.H. 203,= A.D. 818-9). Paper; small quarto, about 8 in. by 53; 96 leaves, of which the first is blank. This volume contains the whole work, in four parts, as read with his pupils, in the year A.H. 489,= A.D. 1096, by the lawyer Abi ‘Abd~allah ’al-Hosain ‘ibn ‘Ali ‘ibn “Ahmad ‘Ibn ’al-Busii ‘al-Bundar (born A.H. 404,= A.D. 1013-14; died A.H. 497,= A.D. 1103-4). According to the title-pages of the four parts (ff. 2a, 22a, 42a, and 70a), and to notes on ff. 22 6 and 426, ’Abu ’l-Kasim ‘Ali ‘ibn ‘Ahmad ‘Ibn ’al-Busri ‘al-Bundar, and his son ‘Aba ‘Abd~allah ’al- Hosain (who was then eleven years of age), heard this work explained, in the years A.H. 415 and 416 (A.D. 1024-25), by “Abi Muhammad ‘Abd~allah ‘ibn Yahya ‘ibn ‘Abd~al-gabbar ’as-Sukkari, who had it from “Abi ‘Ali “Ismail ‘ibn Muhammad ‘ibn ‘Ismail ‘as-Saffir, from "Abi Muhammad ’al-Hasan ‘ibn ‘Ali ‘ibn ‘Affan ’al-Amiri ’al-Kifi, from the author. The manuscript contains many interesting saméd's and ‘igdzas, of which the plate exhibits one, dated A.H. 559= A.D. 1164. It was left as a wak/, or pious legacy, to the college called ‘ad-Diyiiya, situated at the foot of the hill of Kasiyiin, near Damascus, by the sheikh ‘Ali ‘al-Mausili, f. 2 a, exe U8, woos haw Ze olyall Rwy rhly syikne XW asm, _heyl! Je; and there it served as a text-book, in the year A.H. 725,=A.D. 1325, for a female professor of law, ’Umm Muhammad bint Takiyi ‘d-din “Abi "Ishak ‘Tbrahim ‘ibn “Ali ‘ibn ‘Ahmad ‘ibn Fadl ‘Ibn ’al-Wasiti, f. 96a. Gatherings. Four in number, of 20, 20, 28, and 26 points are often wanting. leaves. The leaves of the third quire are numbered with Punetuation. © at the end of a paragraph. Arabic words (zl, S36, 3, ete.) from 1 to 14. The Forms of Letters, ete. =, 3, » OY m 10, as distin- c first and last leaves of the manuscript, ff. 1 and 96, are | merely fly-leay guished from +, 5, 4, 4.—Tasdid has the form ~, p. 2, rely y-leaves. i a 1. 3, of the plate. Writing. A hurriedly written Nashi. The diaeritical San capt Vd ld dyjed) Ions a) Coysdl lal 1 £400. auc alll us) ols! CH yt Rey aS et to ‘oil 2 Karly Gee?y's cb Redd! al le 3 aes ope dey pelle ele pyr Leds ee otly umptey 4 GOs ce jl sbcl oly eee Or! pos) 5 = iyi! Edy wl ploy ee AN clase eel ae wb le JS de I! 3 Needy) wh a2 Opecty jLyall Led pore Ld 10 & Cod WB Geel!) Elle EDs gee Ul Ka S lnc! N pte So 3 ol sl, 12 > gle So os Outen) 13 Le ale & Rees ye) 14 Zp Le yo dy jexu) eter luce ) Eas wilh 2 Sl aye dee pee 8 i cr de nl ph Leg) Jol agi all Quel aN de et ot a\b sy lgil (sie) ») oo Lisl) as) Corledl, dyed) oval oy EY oF? (ats Sol) See (a cp deste SI Bd SS sel cy Gael Oeste pls Lee? GE ea ee Y walS Gp Xoeto oy? aM ome eg or OSs el ) sl aU) Rate Gy deste re) OS OY val en) Ce pisll eel ees) ee EM) col Ball carte ALM Gye quell Jie ule Cutdy Eredy EB Ke cob one ob pls alls alll ?») pe Cp Oeeto oy & \) Soxd «o> wy 3 sues ge qs ia 5) sil ce Spe or ee Ge eee 0 eh As these two samd‘s are repeated verbatim in four places in the manuscript, the above reading is certain, with the exception of the name Glum>, or jh, which is always left wholly unpointed. F, 95a leaves no doubt as to the position of the «, which is there represented by a long stroke, ,w4.—=- [For the loan of this and other valuable MSS. the Committee are indebted to the liberality of M. Schefer, who has also assisted in describing this plate. ] 10 10f XXXVIL. ship ve heigl gli td ase shite gaa zs op Slt euls = Bis tela gpd : ‘gee M ie Sb5... pate eat =~ odie ng BNI Bg RY Saha Te LL sna gel ere 5 lk someone a sites eck le neice PA +b aes ay ifs risk liaisons ts Jed zh ™ (aa sae Ea Lida aa : Re ‘tae = Soe ee asa Lehibis Slr : = a ap; jhe 5 ple Kew sjlitspgh ibis se5 fe psehey £18 Sista se gob its Se Speen oS sa8 sje Sh ofp tis! lish. ds dys fa a ESTES Wee wiies Se Gus Sb Bi she ass FU oe pike Us wna: ole Ae lela Laight raat RSi33)5 1s Ar ca aoa and ite " Saltese 5,58 (ey, Ppl araESn Ags sity ea “ea Shiai igllst Bil aden biggie ” Bilinet Sse et ops ee ‘ele laws ata las etree eaeAsB Sk lie e ‘ye iho ig a0) 3 PES: Wine 2 al} Nats ts Fae die Ay ie s THE KAMIL OF AL-MUBARRAD. ap. 1167, i CAMBRIDGE. UNIV. LIB. Qa, 42 PLare XXXVII.—Arapsro. Campriper. Untversiry Lrprary, Qa. 42 (BurckHARDT).—A.D. 1167. fa Kamil, a historical, poetical and grammatical anthology, compiled by the celebrated gram- marian ‘Abu ‘1-‘Abbas Muhammad ‘ibn Yazid ’al-’Azdi ‘al-Ba 11, commonly called “Al-Mubarrad (born A.H. 210 = A.D. 825-6, or, according to others, A.H. 207 = A.D. 822-3; see Fliigel, Die grammatischen Schulen der Araber, p. 92). Small folio, about 10} in. by 74; 288 leaves. The first half of this volume, ff. 1-145, is written in a plain Eastern Nashi, of the xviith cent. on European paper, and does not concern us in this place. The second half, ff. 146-284, is written on a stout (probably Spanish) paper, in a neat, regular, Western Nashi, and was finished on the 7th of Sha‘ban, A.H. 562,=30th May, A.D. 1167. The plate represents f. 173 b. See Wright's edition of the Kamil, prefatory notice, and the text from 1 tees JE Ke) oh aehiy I Gatherings. Mostly of ten leaves, sometimes of eight and of trelve. and their diacritical points, e.g., Céad, 1. 9, Sy, 1. 12, Ruling. There are no lines for the writing, but the as 1h ese ass, 1,19. The same is often the case with text is bounded by very faint side-lines, drawn with a oe ae dry point. gazma, which is here a round spot, e.g., ytdt, 1 1, 85, Writing. Magribi or Western (African - Spanish) es Nashi, fully pointed. oat , 1.16. Madda is a straight line, e.g., slyai, Forms of Letters, etc. = and in contradistinction to ' . is € a sands. Final § often projects a little below the line, - eos ae: has at times its common form -, e.g., yiuall, 1. 1, ysxgll, €.g., elves, 1.11; vle,, 1.13. Remark the forms of JS, , 1.19. Hamza has its ordinary shape, Tasdid 1, 2, in which case we sometimes find = for «, as in a ay: ; but more usually = is represented by ~. (¢.g., ! eg. in US, Ld WO gies We randiss, leo 0 gets 235 also of initial s, e.g., in 44,, 1. 2; G and & are, of course, Las 55) 1h HE, Pes Ih UNS <= lor ae es elontt, ae pointed » and G; & sometimes has the point over the vw o-s wa, 1.17) or F (e.g gail, Le. peal!) ; and + by © perpendicular line, instead of in the angle, e.g., in _.s, S ak 3 il, 1.8). With the tanwin we have the forms 1, 14.—The vowels exhibit the usual forms, the tanwin of | mS) ees a a cone Sym) yam 8S, Le. Ney yay he See oERD Z . damma being marked by ~, e.g., ob, 1. 16, wae yary - Of sila we have not noted 1. 18. They are sometimes placed between the letters an example. Atsle 6) eral ele te) ww gray ous Je, yee 6 eb Ce 6 6 Ms I Soda UG co pill GB GF Chey (io) oo 5 of el el Gees lnjlen BS Soulless, 9 JE Yee WS 10 11 12 pes ole) 3 ple 4d, 13 Pes oe) Ge 4 pad ae iad ce eo ure 15 wow ws AWS) at ibe 16 és ) Va [marg. Lila XXXVI. eae Ree ior ee hcg ag cal leva , greene! edger pe G 5A itn . Seen wth Joule y|pVo Fi SOS oe: Pier ea rel e 71 Bi baressls pT Nd pall eas Bla =e a PE wcib iin bel uutrdiieks § ie 3 Hats ee Eile bai Nios Pes Ln Yee bie alee ain Sale Lihi a BLS, ALA iD sad soit, NE F. Poialels GR so Li] ie eee of ap: ae | Sheba 3 # oo. 4 ot feast ee Boj acHl SUS fox ime) a] eae F : thie flats c2i2 Podcast 4 BN Lala Hie pene aS? es spl ah 91s he) (all eh eriny Xl A): oA tS p ex oe ilims Ebola, Sr c PUGS Mie Bid bie6th Ml yy byl dvi VEEL lab iys % es 4 Namco! LI aptacree 2 sap \ He : heb plgpgsens + ee 7 bes Br é 3 : fae face: ee ES tur oa — IBN HALLIKAN, WAFAYATU L-AYAN. AD. 1257 BRIT. MUS., ADD. MS. 25,735. Prarke XXXVIUI—Arasie British Museum. Apprrionat 25,735.—A.D. 1257. nee Wafayatu ‘Il Atyain, or Biographical Dictionary, of Samsu ‘d-din ‘Abu ’L‘Abbias ‘Ahmad ‘ibn Muhammad ‘ibn Hallikan, or Khallikin (born A.H. 608= A.D. 1211, died A-H. 681 = A.D. 1282). On paper; quarto, about 10 in. by 7}; 285 leaves. This volume, which contains the first and second parts of the work, is in the ‘handwriting of the autl hor himself, and was completed by him at Cairo on Friday, the 4th (according to Wiistenfeld’s Ver; Tabellen, the 5th) of the Ist Rabr, A.H. 655=22: 22nd (or 23rd) March, A.D. 1257. See Catalogus codd. MSS. Orientt. qui in Museo Britannico asservantur: pars secunda, codic vleichur ¢ 5 Arabicos amplectens, no. MDV., pp. 685-7, and compare p. 172 of the same work. The British Museum also possesses the fourth part of the Dictionary in the author's autog raph (but imperfect), Orient. 1281. The name of ‘Ibn Khallikin is to be pronounced as we have written it, not “ Khillikin,” teste seipso. In Add. 25,735, f. 3a, we read obs, and on one of the fly-leaves of the Gotha MS. of "Al-Istahri’s Ge aphy, which once belonged to him, ols, the point over the = being omitted. f. 1546, contains part of the lives of Togtikin ‘ibn ‘Aiyab and Tala ‘ibn Ruzzik. See the edition of Wiistenfeld, nos. 309, 310; and the translation of De Slane, vol. i, pp. 655-8. The plate, Gatherings. Mostly of 10 leaves, signed with Arabic f 1 tt F ‘ited Beith 3 Be tr Renee. : contrast to = and 3. Hamza is ed, e.g., in arithmetical figures at the upper left-hand corner of the COATES OS EOE gs iarreiaah rer ccna first page. inl. 15, The tanwin of damma is written ? in Jss, 1. 3, Writing, A flowing Nashi. The diacritical points - a : By 1, Gazma occurs over the long vowel 7 in are 0 F and «52, 1. ionally omitted, especially in the case of final . orms of Letters, ete. Frequently = and jw, by way the words yu} (lower margin) and oe, 1. 11. 2 Vest cle al 2) seals {upper margin] eel 5 ac afl Se ses) Qs Syncs iy [right margin] \ ence rmelan)| Be Reh \s ver margin] kale : o a ae ) ail) gree. gull pos) C3 yt Jus {lower margin] dyle Cte ree Cee ee OD Val 8 cay oeell US GQ ek ce pel ally gia Gale dive us ; a i c slealt bl oss dyexiel! cre) wy» Jalil 2) gill Jody Ul be gle GMb Bled Klee ok ail Lal yall Spal _prrig syclly ral pW LLY S Shy) soy a2 ; Awa i) 3 asad, Coa werdyly teed Kw Syl ety pe wre pte El og Med, CH (reste Wall) oo ge Leal 3 Lee WEE oy le Credy wae dod Sab cle Ge Cid, atl) om baal Jat aJ,s SRS Urey || PENTATEUCH. ap. 464. BRIT. MUS. ADD. MS. 14425. Pirate XXXIX.—Syrrac. 3ziTIsH Museum. Apprrronat 14,425.—A.D. 464. VP YNHE Books of Genesis, Exodus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy. 103 in. by 83; Diyar-bekr, A. Gr. On vellum; large quarto, about 230 leaves; two columns. The first two books were written at Amid, or 775 = A.D. 464, when Mar Mara, or Maras, was bishop of that see (see Assemani, Bibl. Orient., t. i, p. 256; Le Quien, Oriens Christ., t. ii, col. 992), by the deacon Yihannan, or John. The other two books were written by another scribe, but appear to be of the See Wright's Catalogue of Syriac MSS. in the British Museum, p. 3, no. III, and plate II. of the facsimiles. same date. This is believed to be the oldest dated Biblical manuscript in Europe, and is nearly equal in age to the Codex Alexandrinus. contains Exodus, ch. xiiii 8—17, from the Spo . L-Aassa), The plate, f 77a of the manuscript, words Him “Sgs, .om to the words bi), bjols Gatherings. Of ten leave ed with the letters | diacritical points are also added; e.g. col. 1, ll. 1 (+s), of the Syriac alphabet at the foot of the first pa | 2 (Asst), 4 (UL), 19 (Wer). At the end of a Ruling. No lines for the writing. The columns are paragraph we find different combinations of points and marked off by faint lines, drawn with a dry point, at | circlets, partly in red; eg., col. 1, 1. 13; col..2, 1. 24. the top and sides. | Forms of Letters. 9 is not connected with a follow- Wr | ing letter (see col. 1, 1. 6); the connection with final J cumevee in col. 1, 1. 12, is to be understood by the light of col. 2, Ancient Estrang: ot in the forms of » , hardly inclining to and 3, more particularly when these letters are connected with a previous letter. i, 2, @, cies Gaal fi coams to he comamad ath o See especially col. 1, Il. 3 (cps), 19 (Less); eal 2, preceding o and , Similarl Wh MO (les oy Ges Whe eee ome! Cans || caine cain call, 1, 0, OM, a, Sin oan He of the several books, and the running titles, are oldest forma (os in plates XI. and XXVIL), eg, coll 1, tubricated: | hia Gel 1 ELC, MO ao cha couena lengthened stroke of initial o and 4 in col. 1, Il. , final 4 is joined to a Punctuation. Tolerably complete, double as well as single points being used; e.g., col. 1, ll. 1 (.90), 14 Gbats15s), 25 (Joana); col. 2, 1. 2 (gars). The | 14, 17, 27, 28; col. 2, Il. 4, 9, 21, 23, 25. XL. hall ieee Se & 40 (ce a Ne : NNT THN abr AN 2 Lae ‘mppraaary PRYOR rN penne oes pryete = ONSTWRTTI 1 Sty? MONy = MIND spon 7 eda? naotwndos ¢ en ‘MITIDNY ZUNE © La eee Oca 1 yn min TN Vee peated h roto Pua apn ons taN) Bubeial Tnnanbhe wai = 2 Pw Toren, PApyiTeR : Parana hyn: nwa? * goo Belted von Faget , orem f woes b 2h oer tape booms | oven f eves Ky fod a oe Son yak LUI “DKID) Tip) ° WIHT ro Sees 995m & $e th aop 33 ”? (oA 7 S ¢Z ty bs Ne? pee ; ge se miss? y SON FBET facile ae 373 wy TAA TWIN ‘ yaw sASsB 2 pm Onn onD AIP AABN WMO YTIN ‘ sypa TiN 2 Dy 2 opr TPS ont wow an Ln PONY ypu) cpr ipamynoe : INVA Na oy opoty > A TavATIYS INN yP — Pea mu TWONYT pK we oe, b WvID § » allt aller jes ops FORMER AND LATTER PROPHETS. (xt Cent) BRIT. MUS. HARLEIAN MS, 5720. eS Prarr XL.—Hresrew British M M. Harteran MS. 5720.—[XIIrn cent. ] p™ of the Old Testament, namely, the Former and Latter Prophets, beginning with Joshua, ch, vii. 22, and ending with Ezekiel, ch. xly. 19. On vellum; large quarto, about 134 in. by 12; 322 leaves ; 3 columns, of 21 lines. Written either in Persia, Babylonia, or S. Arabia. This MS., which is one of the oldest Biblical Hebrew MSS. in the British Museum, seems to be of the xiith cent. The plate, which represents f. 169 5 according to the present pagination, contains 2nd Kings, ch. xix. 99-35 ae : ie eoeeseney 2 : : i 22—35. It offers no less than nine variations from the fextus receplus ; as appears from the following collation, made with Jacob ben Chaiyim’s first edition of the Rabbinic Bible with the Massoreth (Venice, 1524-5), which is the only authoritative Massoretic text. II. Kings, MS. Text, Recept. xix, 23. 1 DI ma yw yuna = Bb | fei nny) mn) my iN mON mADS ” yoawny pola 7) 29. mwowa mewn m é nao sia) oie | bp i min The text is accompanied by the Masora magna and Masora parva; the former on the upper and lower margins, the latter on the side-margins and between the columns. These are of eat importance, as they exhibit the critical apparatus in its earliest form, before the passages of Scripture were written in full, and before the headings of the rubrics, and the numbers contained in them, were fixed. The variations between the recensions of Ben Ashér and Ben Naphtali in verses 27 and 28 (col. 2, Il. 4, 5) are new; at least they do not occur in the printed Massoreth. The variant in y. 25 (col. 1, 1. 16), adduced from the codex called Machzoraé Roba (outer margin), is likewise new. Considering the fresh materials yielded by this single page, the value of this MS. for the textual criticism of the Old Testament must be rated very his Gatherings. Of 8 leaves, with the exception of the text exhibits the vowel-points and accents, and rapheh 23rd and 24th, which (as noted by the rubricator at the with 22723, when aspirated, with final silent 7 (eg., beginning of each) have 10 leaves. They are signed col. 1, 1. 8, ANS); 1 10, ‘HAY; col. 2, 1. 17, TM), with letters at the top of the inner margin of the first page. Eleven leaves are wanting at the beginning ; one 23—xiii. 6); one in Judges (ch. ii. ii. 80); and and occasionally with other lett to mark the absence of daghesh forte (e.g., col. 2, 1. 5, 7F2aNw)). Methegh is ug! J S zene! ig leaf in Joshua (ch. xi 8—iii, 7); one in Ezekiel (ch. xvi, I8—x3 sometimes omitted; as in col. 2, 1. 3, Nw; 1. 8, a considerable number at the end, for of quire 42 poIwM; col. 3, 1. 9, mdb. As in many old Hebrew only the first leaf remains, and, besides the last chapter MSS., the left-hand shaft of 7 frequently touches the of Ezekiel, the whole of the Twelve Minor Prophets are | horizontal stroke; e,g., col. 1, 1. 8, HNN and 7p. To missing. fill up a vacant space at the end of a line the scribe Ruling. On one side only, with a dry point. Ver- | uses part of the letter w, perhaps the initial of his tical lines bound the text of each column. | name (Shémi’él, Shim'on, etc.): ¢7., col. 1, Il. 9, 18; Writing. The writing, which depends from the ruled col. 2, ll. 2, 12, 14, 18; col. 3, 1. 21. ling, is a fine bold character of the Sephardi type. ‘The [For the description of this manuscript the Committee are indebted to the eminent Massoretic scholar Dr. C. D. Ginsburg. ] HAGIOGRAPHA. a.pD. 1347 CAMBRIDGE, UNIV. LIB. Ee. 5.9, Prare XLI.—Hersrew. rn CamBripee. Universiry Liprary. Ke. 5. 9.—A.D. 1347. figs of the Old Testament, namely, the Hagiographa (without the five Mégilloth), with the Targim, and the commentaries of Shélémoh ben Yischak (Rashi), Mésheh ben Nachman (Ramban), and an anonymous German author. On vellum; quarto, about 12 in. by 88; 555 leaves; 2 columns. Written by a German scribe, named Chaiyim, and dated Friday, 21st Tebéth, A.M. 5107, =Thursday, 4th January, A.D. 1347. For a more detailed description see Dr. Schiller-Szinessy’s Catalogue of the Hebrew MSS. preserved in the University Library, Cambridge, vol. i., p. 35, no. 25. This manuscript is remarkable for containing the Targiim of Chronicles (otherwise known only in an imperfect copy at Erfurt), which was edited by D. Wilkins (Amsterdam, 1715). It once belonged to Erpenius, and was collated by Kennicott, who added the English names of the books at the beginning and end of each. The plate contains Daniel ch. i. 1-4 (as far as the word oan), with the commentary of Rashi on the outer side-margin, of which we subjoin a transcription. Gatherings. Mostly of 12 leaves, marked with catch- space at the end of a line the scribe uses one or more words at the foot of the last page. letters of the first word of the next line, but also parts of Ruling. On both sides, with a dry point. ‘The text | m and in + combination, these being letters of his own is bounded by side-lines, and lines have been ruled on | name (eg., col. 1, 1.7; col. 2,11. 2,3, 9; marg., Il. 16, 22). the upper and lower margins for the Massoreth; but Ornamentation. The several books (Nehemiah and this space has been left blank, as well as the inner | 2nd Chronicles of course excepted) begin with large initial side-margin. words on an illuminated ground, with various ornamental Writing. The writing of the text, which is between, | designs and grotesque figures. The frontispiece to the rather than on, the ruled lines, is a fine square character | book of Job represents the patriarch seated on the dung- of the German Ashkénazi type; that of the margin is | hill, tormented by Satan, whilst his wife stands before Ashkénazi rabbinic. The text exhibits the vowel-points | him offering evil counsel. In that to Proverbs the and accents, and the mark of rapheh over np2722 | hoopoe is conspicuous among the birds (Talmud Babli, when aspirated. An accidental omission—the word Gittin, f. 686), which are there introduced, as in our $3a—has been supplied on the margin (col. 1, 1. 4). | plate, among the wavy red lines in the upper part of the In the commentary, words to be expunged are marked | Page with dots, as in Il, 4, 18, and 19. To fill up a vacant zo) 'n op mobnd why 1 gwa Joo sim xdm 7 nb was 2 mwa ow opm mabnad yarn 3 ros ja tbs apy mya 4 AMWNAT MIWA NT TM Tb 5 nwa S'n my baa qh wy 32129 6 aay op om oma why 7 sy 73 TIN awn ow whys aby why mwa ow why 9 sy) JD295 maw maw som vy 10 wom) WI TWN Tw ONT 11 'y a apym wan maby new 12 2 9 Dw “4 ay ow 13 jsp cormdan mea b> nypay 4 TON TD TNA Iw MD NWI 15 Zon oxy om bs) omnayn by 16 oa swe odo on Ss mnoen 17 mia nN ony “yn oy mon is popd wads mea ay yas wade 19 mawn nN ow ssamoyvw sy? 2 hon oon ns own aN my 2 27 OMIA NINA MD NAT 2 ‘95 “qyoy> AD nD WN) POINT 23 SIEIWD jOXy OrTVyNw D7 2 's by apa map 755) comap2? 2 “Wa nD ws 26 [In describing this plate the Committee have to acknowledge the assistance of the Rev. Dr. Schiller-Szinessy.] }| | i | it as TAPE | THY ETE ITEOSy! c [oor opr mt ac Toye nine SEE sae SREY CICM Mi EOANTE. PISTIS SOPHIA. (viit! Cent) BRIT. MUS., ADD. MS. 5714. Prare XLIL.—Coprie (Sanipic), Dante rate is T British Museum. Apprrionan 5114,.—VIlrn cenr. HE Pistis Sophia, a gnostic work ascribed to Valentinus, who lived in the second century, but really of later date. On vellum; small quarto, about 83 inches by 63; in Egypt,. probably as earl ; 174 leaves, 2 columns. Written as the seventh century. The text has been edited from this MS. by Schwarze and Petermann (Berlin, 1851). The plate represents f. 11 a. Gatherings. Of eight leaves, with the exception of the first and last, which have six and four respec- tively. They are signed on the first and last leaf of each, at the top, with letters numbered with letters. Four leaves are now wanting after f. 156. Ruling. On one side only, with a dry point, guided by prickings on the ma MS., from f. 104, there is only one ruled line for every two lines of text. The text is bounded by single vertical lines. ; and the pages are also n. In the latter part of the Writing. Uncials. Words are not separated ; letters often smaller at the end of a line. Contractions. Numerous, but of the usual kind; such as IC = inoods, XC = ypiords, IHA or ICA = ioparpr, COp = coryp, R= pvorypiov. A stroke at the end of a line sometimes stands in place of the letter 1. Punetuation, A single point, except at the end of a paragraph, where we sometimes find a colon (:). The Col. 1. 1 €1 OHM N OHTY. aww Me chaipa gait ht To Moc THpOT XIt M2 Naypn 4 it Twwy € mecrt’ Oe 5 mH Oe TF nel enav 6 BRA PIWWK 2RLOT YS 7 pon xe Thtape € poK 8 Ee Tpen F gQswwK wR 9 TMEKENATRLA CHAT 10 grit TKEACTCIC Re 11 ngopit se se[vcTHplon) + gantTe On the upper margin is added : NAT EwyoN MAK XIN M wo T pil 22 ore Nyoph 22h T 12 Me owoely XWK chor 138 nal ev THY QITH 14 aTwaxe € poy’ EIc OH 15 wre Oe aquwK e&or 16 OI Me ovoEIY” 2z20e 17 Oe wa pont ait ov Gent 18 TaphTaac g,1wowk gamtkKxwk eRor Tt TaraKomi&é THPC xe nxwK efor ge TMgo pit an sefectuplion] Tar eT THY OITH MaTwyaxe € poy’ aszow O€ Ga port Bit OF Ge Wa pon QB ow Oenk TAapnTaae gt WWK KATA TKEACT cic BX MI Gopl Ae ax[eorH|plror] et! vap Ke Kovi It ov 30 ely Ne TH EdAagcicToN. Bl KNHY € PATH. acw 2 KTLAO B&R MKOCRLOC™ paragraphs are also indicated by a mark on the left margin of the columns, as in col. 2, 1. 5. Forms of Letters. The ir various letters indicates a somewhat late date. a is angular; 1 often takes the diaeresis, 1 (eg., col. 1, 1. 5); the cros: eularity in the shape of stroke of vis terminated by a dot; the base of a usually projects on either side and is terminated by dots, but we also find the common form (col. 1, 1. 20; col. 2, 1. 81), and so also in the case of x; the forms of € and c are somewhat peculiar; the angular portion of K often does not touch the perpendicular line; the middle stroke of 2 is concave; the cross-stroke of 1 pro- jects very slightly, if at all, and the roke of Tb is dotted; @ is a flattened oval (col. 1, 1. 2), whilst & is concave; pb qq and F descend below the line. Corrections have been made by a very ancient hand, Wor punged by means of small lines and dots, as in col. 1, IL. 24, 25. possibly contemporar are marked to be ex- Col. 2. Te asrove Oe’ mn ov Oem T&peKx! 2& MEKEoo’ THPY ETE Neooe ne RL Mcyopl BX se[-~ecTHIplion]: ac qwne Oe anoK ite pitas e neelectHIplion] mer ga xe THPOT gpal Oae NENACRAA ENT 2TH Noowey Mai aivTaag SIWwWT Olt Tecsnoe ETRMAT. 20W AIP OCOEN EXLAGO ERLS Wo 2cu) 2ig,wA € 1x1 ce’ aw aler ep Tie AH RL Me cTEepewara elo TM owoent Earago EMLAGO € Ae YI € Mos OEM € Meryoon A RROY? ACW ACU TOPTP exit tecepHe Ot BL WAH BR Te CTEPE WILLA ACOCWH THPOT 1 OF CON’ 2ew 2 Ht Ap KN THpos geit mt € ZoeciA THPoT. eit i AVVEAOC THPOT ET TL QUT| acyToptTp TH pow 91 ow con eTRe TutoO K ovoeint er qo OM RRn01. aw 2cOw at € Nentaverd it ow oeMt ET giwwt eT Oo TEE, PALAOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY. COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT. E, A. BOND, Esq, PRINCIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH MUSEUM, President. W. DE G. BIRCH, Esq., BRITISH .MUSEUM. J. W. BONE, Esq., B.A, F.S.A. Rey. H. O. COXE, M.A., BopLry’s LIBRARIAN, OXFORD. Mons. L, DELISLE, Director oF THE NATIONAL LIBRARY, PARIS, MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTE. Tue RicHT REVEREND THE BISHOP or DURHAM. J. WINTER JONES, Esq, LATE PRINCIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH MUSEUM. WILLIAM MASKELL, Esq, M.A. PROFESSOR J. RUSKIN, D.C.L., Oxrorp. E. M. THOMPSON, Esq., KEEPER OF THE MSS., BRITISH MUSEUM, Hon. Sec. G. F. WARNER, Esq, M.A., BRITISH MusEuM, Hon. Treas. ProFessor Dr. W. WATTENBACH, BERLIN. PROFESSOR J. O. WESTWOOD, Oxrorp. W. ALDIS WRIGHT, Esq, M.A. TRIN. COLL, CAMBRIDGE. PROFESSOR W. WRIGHT, LL.D., QUEENS’ COLL., CAMBRIDGE. FACSIMILES OF ANCIENT MANUSCRIPTS. ORIENTAL SERIES. Part IV. EDITED BY WILLIAM WRIGHT, LL.D, PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE. CONTENTS. 43, Arya-Gandavytha. Sanskrit. A.D. 1166. 44, Maharnava. Sanskrit. [XVIth Century.] 45. Tashi tseg pai do. Tibetan. [Date uncertain.] 46. Ton phud lamai gyud pa ete, Tibetan. [Date uncertain.] 47. ’Al-Mutanabbi’, Diwan. Arabic. A.D. 1008. 48. ’Al-Wakidi, Kitabu ‘1 Magazi. Arabic. A.D. 1169. 49. Poems of Nizami, ete. Persian. A.D. 1410-11. 50. Sa‘di, Bostan. Persian. A.D. 1629. 5l. Gadla ’Abau Kédusan. AXthiopic. A.D. 1586. 52. Lives of Saints, efe. Syriac. A.D. 850. 53. Sidra Rabba. Mandaitic. A.D. 1735-36. 54. Pentateuch. Hebrew. [XIIth Century.] 55. ‘Al-Charizi, Tachkémoni. Hebrew. A.D. 1282. 56. Talmiid Yérushalmi. Hebrew. A.D. 1289. PHOTOGRAPHED AND PRINTED IN FACSIMILE BY THE AUTOTYPE COMPANY. . Bondon: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS. 1879. (All Rights reserved, ] Ei E E | e 5 Fi] i Ep ‘2 NOSSGOH ‘LINMSNWS ‘ALSIOOS DILVISVY IVAOY ‘9911 '0'V —WHNAAVONW9-VAYV Leese bein Lb Buaiel THX Pratr XLIII.—Sansxnir. Royar Asiatic Sociery. Sanskrit, Hopeson 2.—A.D. 1166. ft le Arya-gandavyiha, a work on Buddhistic metaphysics, revealed by Bodhisattva Mafijusi on is various occasions to the assembled bhikshus and to certain friends of virtue (halydnamitra), amongst which latter are some minor deities of the Hindi Pantheon and some saintly personages of local repute, amounting in all to the number of fifty-two, as enumerated in the last section (see Cowell and Eggeling’s Catalogue, in the Journal of the R. A. S., new series, yol. viii, p. 3). On Written in Nepal, by ka Pagupati-sura, in the year 286 = A.D. 1166, in the reign of king Anandadeya. The colophon, though much faded in one place, is still legible in full when closely examined, and reads thus: samvat 286 [in palm-leaf, about 223 in. by 2; 289 leaves, with six lines in a page. letter-numerals ] sukle [scil., pukshe] ekadasyam [scil., tithau] adityadi{ ne} paramesvaraparamabhattaraka- mahardjadhirdjasrimadanandadevasya vyjayardjye kdayasthapasupatisurena likhitam. yatha drishteti pari- haryam iti. With the usual acceptation of the Nepal Samvat era (A.D. Tables, this date can be reconciled only on the supposition (applicable likewise to the MS. des in Plate XVI.) that and not in those of the Christian era. If so, Anandadeva's reign would fill up an apparent gap between Rudradeva and Amritadeya. 880), and with Prinsep’s ribed nsep’s dates (see “Useful Tables,” pp. 269, 270) are expressed in Saka years, We have selected f. 26a for reproduction, because it compr s nearly the whole of one chapter, which is comparatively free from the dreary and meaningless repetitions that so greatly diminish the value of the work as a literary composition. For the sake of giving the chapter in full, a few lines have been added to the transcription at the beginning from f. 255, and two words at the end from f. 260. Writing. The character much resembles that of | the letter ha is not unlike either of them, when, as Plate XXXIL, though differing from it in some respects. frequently happens, it is only half finished, In com- Each page is divided into 3 columns of nearly equal | binations like rsha, rva, the repha is somewhat curiously width, separated by blank spaces, in the centre of which | represented by a thin side-stroke mere ly (as in Mr, are holes for pegs or strings. The middle column is Wylie’s Dharani inscription, Journal of the R. A. S., repeated in the second half of the plate. The leaves are new series, vol. v., p. 14). This is the prototype of its numbered on the verso, with letter-numerals on the Bengali form when it stands in the second place. In left and arithmetical figures on the right (see Cowell the case of rma and rya, it takes the thicker form of and Eggeling’s Catalogue, pl. 1, and p. 51, where a the original letter; while in sérddham (I. 5, col. 2) and facsimile of the date is also given). pramardishu (1. 6, col. 3), it is the usual hook over the Forms of Letters, ete. The most striking features | letter. When combined with @, the two together are in the writing of this MS. are the want of uniformity | sometimes very like ga. On the other hand, ga, when in the mode of expressing the same or similar com- preceded by its corresponding nasal or by d, is so binations of letters, and the neglect of the preservation strangely distorted as to be scarcely recognisable. The of those characteristics by which alone some letters can letter g takes a peculiarly slender shape, when it is be accurately distinguished from one another. The enclosed between the two strokes which form 0, or pre- latter remark applies especially to the single letters pa, ceded by the single stroke which represents e. The e¢ ya, and dha; tha and sha; cha and va (ba). Among is usually marked by a top curl only, but is occasionally the combinations, ku closely resembles kta; hri looks (eg., 1. 5, coll. 2, 3; 1. 6, col. 1) drawn quite down, as like hya; and ru (with the vowel w drawn down on in ordinary Bengali, Some of these varieties may be the right hand side of 7) is somewhat like bla. The merely individual freaks of the copyist, as when he vowel u is generally represented by a diminutive va substitutes s for § (even in bhimischa, 1. 4, col. 1) or puts attached to the- foot of the letter, as in Bengali (e anusvara in place of n in the accus. plur. masc.; but charydsu, 1. 6, col. 2); but in guna (1. 6, col. 2), and in they must be borne in mind when reading the many sudh (for sudh) and its derivatives (¢.g., 1. 4, col. 1; strange names which occur in the book, and perhaps 1, 6, col. 2), the ordinary Devanagari shape is employed. also when trying to decipher short inscriptions on coins By itself, « much resembles the combination dra; and or stones. r bhikshavas tvaddarganakamah || atha khalu mafijusrih kumarabhiito mahata bodhisatvavi- agavalokitena pratyuday avochat | ime mafijus kurvitena sarddham parshanmandalapramanena bhimimandalena 1 itya tan Dbhikshin avalokayam asa || atha khalu te bhikshavo maiijusriyah kumarabhiitasya padau sirobhir abhivandyaiijalin pragrihyaitad avochan | anena vayam satpurusha tvaddarganavandanakusalamilena yady api asmaka—] (L. 1, col. 1) m anyat | kugalamilam tvam janishe upadhyayasya yach cha bhavatah sakyamunes tathagatas oratyaksham tena vayam | (col. 2) kugalamilena idriga eva bhavema yz tvam evamriipam cha kiyam ni tava evam ukte pratilabhema eva[m] ipam ghosham evamripani (col. 3) lakshananidrigani vikurvitani yadri taifr] bhikshubhir mai i ustih kumarabhutas (L yanasampra: katamair dasabhi{r] yad uta (col. 3) sarvatatha sarvakugalamilopacha- col, 1) bhikshiin idam avochat | dasabhir aparikhedachittotpadaih samanvagato bhikshavo maha- hitah (col. 2) kulaputro va kuladuhita va tathagatabhimim avakramati prag eva bodhisatyabhamim tadarsanaparyupasanapiy asthaneshv aparikhedachittotpadena (L. 8, col. 1) yeshv anivartyaparikhedachittotpadena [che rest of the line is deleted as an erroneous repetition] (col. 2) sarvadharmaparyeshthishy apari’ sarvabodhisatvaparamitaprayogeshv apari® (col. 3) sarvabodhisatvasamadhiparinish- padaneshv apari’ sarva[r]thaparampa ta [re? An insertion is indicated, but not carried out on the margin| shy apari- (L. 4, col. 1) ° dagadiksarvabuddhakshetrasamudraspharanaparisuddhishy apari’ sa- (col. 2) rvasatvadhatu- vinayeshy apari® sarvakshetrakalpabodhisatvacharyanihareshy apa- (col. 3) ri? sarvabuddhakshetra- amaparamitaprayogaikasatvaparipachana- (L. 5, col. 1) kramena sar vasatvadhatuparipachanenaikatathagatachalaparinishpadaneshv apari’, ebhir — bhi- (col. 2) kshavo dagabhir apfarJikhedachittotpadaih samanvagatah sarddham kulaputrah kuladuhitava samvarttane sarvaku- (col. 3) galamileshu vivarttane sarvasamsaragatibhyah uchchalati | sarvalokavamsebhya ati Amati sarvasrava- (L. 6, col. 1) kapratyekabuddhabhimis cha [bhya is inserted here on the lower margin] sambhavati sarvatathagatakuéalavamseshu sampadyate bodhisatvapranidhaneshu vi- (col. 2) sudhyate sarvatathagataguna- pratipattishu parigudhyate sarvabodhisatvacharyasu samudagachchhati sarvatathaga- (col. 3) tabaleshu pramardishu sarvamaraparapravadinah akramati sarvabodhisatvabhimir asannibhavati [tathagatabhimeh || J [For the description of this and the following Plate the Committee are indebted to Dr. Haas, of the British Museum. ] MAN DHATRI, MAHARNAVA.— (xviT! Cent) INDIA OFFICE LIBRARY, SANSKRIT 3176. Piare XLIV.—S ANSKRIT, Inpra Orrice Liprary. shee Mahdarnava, a treatise on the ex d Sanskrit 3176.—[XVItn cent. ] piatory ceremonies which must be performed to avert ase in general, as well as all its particular forms. On birch-bark, about 73 in. by 64; 410 leaves; 15 Mesh aero Ae A Aare 2 5 : 0 leaves; 15 to 17 lines in a page. Written in Kashmir, about the xvith century, by two scribes, in the so-called Saradai character, to explain which a separate table has been drawn up. The work consisted of at least forty chapters, for it is imperfect at the end, breaking off abruptly in the middle of the fortieth chapter, f. 401a. Of the colophon only two words remain, iti Sripanditah ; and then follows an index with references to the ori It is indirectly attributed to one Mandhatri (also spelled Mandhatri), the son of Madana. Now it must be to this Madana that another Mahdrnava is dedicated, which Pro- fessor Aufrecht, in his Catalogue of the Sanskrit MS in the Bodleian Library, pp. 276-7, has ascribed to Visvegvara as its author; and again, if this Madanapala nal pagination, be identical with the author of the Madanavinoda, we arrive at the last quarter of the ivth cent, as an approx- imate date for the composition of the present work. It is divided into two parts, the first of which, compr ing chapters 1 to 7, ff, 1a—230qa, treats of pray (penance) as a religious observance for the improvement of one’s future condition; while the second part deals more with the past and present, and aims at “ removing the gripe of a particular malady.” The former derives its materials chiefly from the Vedas, especially the Yajurveda; the latter from more modern sources, such as the Puranas and Tantras. The plate represents f. 14a, which is written by the hand of the more careful of the two s The MS. amped with ornamental designs. ribes, wrapped in a leather cover, For much valuable 8 and intere: mirian birch-bark and paper M§ to Dr. Biihler’s Report, printed in the Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society for 1877, No. XXXIVa, Vol. XII, pp. 2 In the following transliteration, the pa inverted commas are quotations from Vedic literature, h- AS: ting information on the subject of K the reader is referred sages within in which must be rectified by Other errors are the numerous mistakes comparison with the printed texts. corrected within brackets. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (8) (7) (8) (9) (10) (41) (12) (13) Svaha varunaya. 12 hedo vayasisishthah yajishtho vahnitamah : vi dipyam [read yad adivyan] iti dvi shpadoshnik d . “tvan no agne varunasya vidvan deva visva dvesham pramumugdhi aman svaha agnivarur sa tvan naw agne vamo bhavati nedishtho asya ushasau dhi” [Zaitt. Samh. 1. 5, 12, 3 and 4] svaha 20 “tvam bha ayasan tavyam uhishe yan no dhehi bhesha ye Sriiyase [read Sreyase] 21. iti prathamo [*Jnw ryanuvakasya trayodasarchasya br: hma svayambhi rishih lingokta devatah adya prast riktih dviti[ya]dyas chatasras trishtubhah shashthi ga) asgy anashtup [read anu°] trayodasi trishtup uchano bhyam . vyashtau a= yafijva no varuno rarano vihi mrilikam suhavo na e= yayam amardana sahi= agne amavav: 4,1, 9] svaha agna- m” [ Taitt. Brahm. 1. akah. yadi= \) arapa- yatri sapta- myadyas tisras trishtubhah dasamy anushtubh ekadagya [corrected into “de 1] chatu- ajya= (14) home viniyogah “ yadidivya trinam aham babhiva ditsan va (15) saiijagara janebhyah agnim atismad indrai cha samvidanau (16) pramuiichatam” s' ha agnaye “yad dhastabhyam chakira kilvisha-” [ Tuite. Ar. 11. 4,1] enay y eae L NOTES ON THE TABLE The alphabet, as we have it before us in this MS., i of an teristic features of eclectic nature, exhibiting side by side the chs Sanskrit writing as developed in different centuries and provinces. the first known specimens In some cases it carries us as far back of distinct Sanskrit letters, while in others h are probably mere intruders—it touches the i But taking it as a whole, it Ll such as the characters for ga and la, whi latest stanc age of Deva in about the middle o! phabet has gone from the time of the Asoka inserip- and a half B.C., to the consolidation of the In this position ant connecting link, which gr helps us in anding rivation from one another, of the modes of writing prevalent in different parts of India. mutual relationship will be best shown by the following the successive evolutions throng which the tions, two centu: Devanagari charac about nine centuries ago. it forms an impor g the affinities, and d Agoka character Cave character Valabhi, Gupta 1 H Gurjara, : and Tibetan Kashmirt Tirhutiya South-Indian alphabets Panjabi‘ Kutila Nandinigavt Gujarati OF SARADA CHARACT ERS. mise the con- By grouping them thus, it becomes easy to reco; tinuity of the changes, the similarity of the different the tendencies towards particularisation which prevail in each group. For our present purpose we leave out of account, firstly, the We group, descended from the Cave character, with its various ramifica- tions, so well defined in Dr. Burnell’s South-Indian Palace phy; slusively used for other ; and, spects, and ern secondly, several alphabets which are e: 1g than Sanskrit, such as Panjabi, Uriya, and Gu , as being a mere deterioration of the langua’ thirdly, the Nandina; Devanagari in the hands of illiter in parallel columns, and in these the Q same (or nearly the same) form as that of the Sirada alph: indicated by a small stroke. The Agoka character is exhaustivel; ed in A. Cumningham’s Corpus Inscriptionum, vol. i. For the Cave character one may consult the Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Aj particularly vol. ii., p. 1, and vol. iii, pt. 2, p. 213. Of the Gupta character the best known specimens are the Allahabad, Kuhaon, and Bhitari pillars, explained in the Jour of the Bengal Branch of the Royal A: iatic Society, vols. vi. and vii. For the Tibetan character see Csoma de Kérés’s Grammar, p. 20, and the Journal of the Bengal Branch of the R. A. &., vol. vii., p. 39, What we understand by the Tirhutiya character may be learned from the inscription described in Colebrooke’s Essays, vol. ii., p. 247 sqq., and from another described in the Journal of the Be 1 Branch of the R. A. S., vol. vi. p. 868. The Kutila char: le. The rest we arrange istence of a letter in the ate pe Socie or is st repre- al Survey, well as various kinds of eral plates published by the specimens in Rajen- The following, then, Archaeolog sented by a facsimile in A. Cunningham p- se character, ai Tho Nepa rf, have been made known in Of the Bengali characti may suffice. vol Devana our own Socie dralala Mitra’s Notices, vol. i is a statistical table of the occurrence of the § other alphabets. radi letters in these a | aime. | Kast, ib Kutita| Dong, [Devantg I | | | | | | Deal | | Tea aoa ill | TEI Stta Talat et Ve Late it | el (eh | Telatal (Ee Observe the thi Beng racter, cor kening of the lower end of a in Nepal. and and tho additional curl by the side of @ in the Cave cha- to that at the foot in Kashm. and Tirhut. The 1 from according to the analogy of @ from a, from Kashm. onwards. The figure for ri is merely an enlargement of its form when attached to another letter. In looking over the compound character sight by the varicty of means which are often employed for the same purpose on the one hand, while on the other hand the same i ce for two or three different lett But in comparing these methods with those followed in other alphabets, we can generally di gularities, as we shall t sspondin form of & is deri 3, we are struck at first n sometimes does servi historical reason for the apparent irre- to show in the following short sketch. Of the three devices for marking @, nos. 1 and 2 will be found Cave, Gupta, and Tirhut.; 5 and 6 in the same; 3 and 4 from Kutila onwards, Tho figures for i and i, 7-9, are drawn down to the lino in this way for the first timo in Kashm. and Tirhnt., and continue so in all the later alphabets. Tho marking of u in 10-15 as that in 2 ‘il. and Beng. ¥ acter similar to that in 28 occurs in Nepal. Tho sign for @ in 30-35 is the samo as that for u in Tirhut.; while in 86-39 Kashm. and Tirhut. agree, and a similar contrivanco to that employed in 40 and 41 is ant in hut. and Beng. The form of ri in has its counterpart in Nepil.; in 45-52 it exhibits the and Beng, as well as the Nepil., practice. differently treated in the older alphabets and in Tirhu tho latter the practice varies between the old and the new method, 0, 58, betrays its descent from the older Gupta form, derived from the Agoka, while the similarity to the modern Panjabi is complete in this respect. In all the older alphabets it bears traces of its origin from a combination of the two elements for e and @ In Kashm, alone these traces have vanished, and the 59-61, by the fresh addition of the sign for a. K in 62-68, 70, 71, and 73, with its wavi of the later Devanagari form. That the same to represent the attached form of th in 117-119 is without a parallel in the other alphabets. The form of # in 82 and 83 is still distinctly traceable in Beng. Th in 88, 89, and 203, is in no way distinguish- able from dh in 22, 120, and 124, Tho lower end of this ligatur in wiso more modern; that in 16-23, 25, and 26, as well wr ru nd 29, are both found in Nep a and ai, are , though in ore it can form its au, ail, is the precursor ign can be employed y finds its parallel only in the Cave writing, in which, however, it titutos part of the simple character for the lingual n 92-94, and lin 100, seem to differ only accidentally from one D 6, 97, and 113-115, may be compared with Ben in similar combinations; but in the Kashm. and Nepal. alphabets it also for attached u, so that ku and are absolutely identical. WN , 106, 113, and 127-130, is Verygiiie ; 167, etc, In 24 and 152 it does not materially 5 alone it is true to its origin, Ph in con 80, nin anoth n 62,6 closely resembles one of the the form of r in 16 differ from r in 174-188. Iné 1 6 comes near to the Nepal. form in the same conn xion. Y in 137-1 nd 156, finds parallel treatment in Cave and Gupta, as also in Tirhut. and N R in 59 and 161-173 has its prototype in the small horizontal line which crowns such combina only here it is put tions in the Cave, Gupta and Tirhut. character under the horizontal top-line instead of over it, as it is 8 alphabets. In 174-188 md in a combination of consonants, it is liko the u of Bengali MSS. In 41 it is shaped as in Beng. in all n in Tirhut. sometimes represents 7, some- in those such cases. ‘The same s slanation is perhaps supplied by the character, times u. ‘The ¢: in which a full curve under the line takes the pk slight curling of the downward stroke in the same place supplies the 0, and the straight prolongation 54, 7 of 7, while a for u (compare our w in 19 and of the downward stroke in ‘the Agoka alphabet). In 92 and completely coalesces with the following » and y into an indissoluble unity. Vand D are hardly distinguishable, and in that respect mble Nepal. and Beng. Ss and hm, 211 and 212, find their sp cond character on the downward stroke of the fir in a similar form in the inscriptions of Jhalrapat quary, vol. y., p.181), and in Veigi inscriptions (c Indian Palacography, and Ind, Antiq., vol. v., p. 6 223 and 224 is unique, unless we may compare it with the Bengali i ot of continuing the s The jikvamiiliya in 214-217 occurs an (Indian Anti- Burnell’s South- ). The viraima in match in Tirhut., in 1 sign for f unaccompanied by a vowel. In conclusion, a few words on tho origin and name of the which there has always been much ari alphabet, concern doubt (cf. Colebrooke’s M iss 23 South-Indian Palaeography, 2nd ed., p. y one who will take the trouble to follow the development of tho Sanskrit alphabet in cannot ell, Essays, vol. , and Burnell’s the order proposed above, must admit that the Devani but stand last in th fore it came itself into existence. That this took place r than the xth cent. there is hardly suffi show from inscriptions with a reliable date. ‘wo of the earliest of these are dated A.D, 1008 and 1083 (cf. Bombay Journal, vol. i., p- 216; Indian Antiq,, vol. i, p. 80); while the inscription in the Bombay , p. 871, dated A.D. 753, may, if correctly traced, be taken as a specimen of tho transition from the older character to the Dev this latest alphabet are the fixed uniformity of the means employ series, because it presupposes all the other change! much earl ient evidence to Journal, vol. ii, pt. satures of a for the same purpose, and the studied regularity and symmetry xi. The most str displayed in its forms, It is not too much to say that, in both respects, it stands perfectly alone among all the varieties that havo n developed from the one common source. There are, no doubt, different modifications of the character, but no one writer would probably indulge in a mixture of these in the same pages; and as to the second point, viz. its general appearance as a mero form of writi nise in it a decided effort of that professional penmanship which is so highly valued in the East. Looking at it in this light, it can scarcely be thought too bold to propose a new explanation of the name of Nagart from the Marathi word nafigara or niagara, originally meaning “a plough” (San it namgalam, Hem. i. 256 coarse, broad nib.” The term Devandga: the extant literature, seems to be me the Hindust. desi, e the ornamental cha everybody must rec laigala, Pra and then “a pen with a which is nowhere found in y a colloquial adaptation of , “the business of courts,” to ter employed in official documents es to the ruling power. Nandindgari would, in that be nothing but a nickname for the writing of dunces and illite Marathi word dawan-gi and addres ase, ate people, nandi and its compounds meaning “a blockhead or illiterate lout.” ‘The fact that Al-Biriini seems to sp: of Nagart alphah« would not militate an etymology from the popular lang since according to Reinaud, Mémoire sur I’Inde, p. 306, he alsc us the bhdshé expression for “ hook,” viz. pothi, Prakrit potthao (Hem. i116). The Sanskrit word nagara has had the misfortune to be saddled, in the course of time, with a host of meanings that apparently have nothing to do with Sanskrit ference to Roth and Bohtlin ry will show; so that, after all, we need hardly hesitate to find in the name of this alphabet another instance of mongrel dialect. a ’s Diction XLV. fi Y hi = ae sin » Bs Pe Ps ee al re eee anes 3 open aT Sear eeu me See SEERRT TIBETAN.— (Date UNCERTAIN) CAMBRIDGE. UNIV.LIB., ADD.MS.1295. Prats XLV.—Tipetan. AY : Campripge. Universiry Lisrary. Apprrronat MS. 1295.—[ DATE UNCERTAIN, | A WORK entitled ‘phags pa bkra shis brtsegs pai mdo (pronounced Phag pa ta shi tseg pai do), zi which is a translation into Tibetan of the Sanskrit Arya-mangalakita-siitra, or “the Sitra of the peak (summit or pile) of blessings.” According to the legend, Buddha was in an apartment of the Mangalakiita palace, surrounded by 1008 Bodhisattvas, besides gods, demons of all sorts, and men, when Maijugri arose from his seat and begged him to recite a siitra which should be capable of producing all good and of warding off all ill. Buddha complied with this request, and recited the Mangalakita-siitra (Ta shi tseg pai do), which is to be used at the building of temples, monas- teries, chaityas, fortresses and houses, the writing of books, marriages, the birth of children, funerals and funeral-feasts, etc., etc. The text of the present MS. differs in various particulars from that of two editions, printed at Peking, which are in the library of the Asiatic Museum at St. Petersburg (nos. 339, 340, of Schmidt and Béhtlingk’s catalogue). On thick, coarse paper, of native manufac- ture; about 8} in. by 23; ff 3-20, 22, and 22* (nye gnyis gong), are all that remain of the book; 4 lines in a page. On the age of Tibetan MSS. we have, in the present state of our knowledge, 1 printers at the present day, and it does not appear to be the custom in Tibet to date books. We no data for forming an opinion, as the written character closely resembles that used by the native can only say that this MS. was received from Nepal in 1875, and that it does not look as if newly written. Ruling. The text is bounded by double side-lines, is used to mark the end of a verse, and the double stroke and lines are ruled for the writing, all in red. for the end of a division of the work. The figures at the Writing. The Uchhen or ordinary character (see beginning of the first line of f. 17a, as far as the second Asiatic Researches, vol. xvi. p. 418), which is de- perpendicular stroke, merely indicate the commencement rived from an ancient form of the Devanagari, and, of a leaf, The leaves are numbered on the recto, to the like it, written and read from left to right. The letters left; for example, in the plate, f. 17a, ka behu bdun, i.e., depend from the ruled lines. The words are separated by (part, or book, or volume) one, (leaf) seventeen,” small dots on the line; the single perpendicular stroke Fol. 166. (1) legs shog | rmongs pa med pa shes rab pha rol phyin | shes rab chhen poi (2) bkra shis gang lags pa | dkra shis dam pa des kyang ding “dir bde legs (3) shog | gang yang ma *gags thabs gyi (read kyi) pha rol phyin | thabs mchhog chhen poi (4) Bkra shis gang lags pa | bkra shis dam pa des kyang ding ‘dir bde legs shog Fol. 17a. (1) [initial sign] ma chhags thogs pa med pa stobs gyi (read kyi) pha rol phyin | stobs chhen shugs (2) kyi bkva shis gang lags pa | dkra shis dam pa des kyang ding “dir bde legs (3) shog | re dogs med pa smon Jam pha rol phyin smon lam chhen poi bkra shis (4) gang lags pa | bkra shis dam pa des kyang ding ‘dir dde legs shog [The Committee have to thank Dr. Schiefner, of St. Petersburg, for his valuable assistance in the description of this and the following Plate.] fp sires & 4 Pac eet Uswels. | aj ay | | a i ies | | Gebiall | | |e | ® aa eee (ae, Epes 2. df Lsebrals | BRY oe | Ta | al —t sf uta) 4 a | | Py fll Jatadalds) + | obinf, 32.89 ie do) HH aa! | 1) Gatraclerd a a (Hlea\ nbra f os | fb 208 tuhya | ‘cwhnyn A¥ane He: 5 é sie See face ui cae dela iz ‘8 ina So 4a: a cat A TIBETAN.— (Date UNCERTAIN) CAMBRIDGE. UNIV.LIB., ADD.MS.1675. Brartaget & Prate XLVI.—Tineran. Camprmper. Universrry Lisrary. Apprtionan MS. 1675.—[ DATE UNCERTAIN. ] Ss ae from the collection of tracts and fragments numbered MS. Add. 1675, viz, f. 31. On 2 the recto is written, bston phud bla mai 'rgyud pa dang rigs ‘dzin ‘rgyud pai mehhod sprin bzhug [read bzhugs] s‘ho, that is, “The cloud of offering of the Ton phud lama (?) tantra and the Vidyadhara tantra,” which appears to be the title of the tract. On thin but coarse paper, of native manufacture; about 93 in. by 2}; 6 lines in a page. This MS. was received from Nepal shortly after the one described in Plate XLV.; and, as in that case, we have at present no means of determining its age. Ruling. The text is bounded by double side-lines, but there are no ruled lines for the writing, which is consequently irregular. | used as a mark of interpunction. The figure at the | beginning of 1. 1 merely marks the commencement of | the page. The words oyerlined in the transcription Writing. The Uchhen or ordinary character, less | are Sanskrit, though in some cases incorrectly written. neatly written than the previous specimen. The words | This leaf is marked on the recto, where the number (or, in the case of Sanskrit words, the syllables) are usually stands, e ha. separated by dots, and the perpendicular stroke is (1) [initial sign] om a him | namo éde gshegs snying bo ’gro kun yongs Ja khyabs | sems ni rgya chhen mcehhog tu rab skyes te | (2) ‘gro ba “di dag ma lus sangs rgyas rgyu | ’di la gnod min sems chan gang yang med | zheng (read bzhengs) chig dzhengs chig thugs rjes dbang gi lha | (3) sems chan don la dgong (read dgongs) pai dkon mchhog gsum | dngos tshams yid kyi sprul pai gnas *di ru | spyan “dren ’khor dchas ma lus (4) gshegsu gsol | ma khang ru kha dza him Z bam ho | om badzra a mri ta kun da li hana ha na hom phat | om sva bha sogs bya’o | stong pai ngang o> he | 5 pans (5) las bhrum las rdzas las ’grub pai dston rin po chhe la grub pai snod y: phud rgya chhen po ig shing rgya chhe bai nang tu (read du) | rang *byung lha (6) “di nyid | nam mkha las spang (read dpangs) mtho ba | sa zhi (read gzhi) las rgya chhe ba | [rgya m]thso las ting zab pa | nyi ala las ‘od gsal ba | rtsi shing las ba ee a tec ee 249 iy Igy Ay ae = ee a iB a ee OES pasar hips > ORE ta aNATGAIN © Apisioisryg fs Shou shits Ei foulls Sighs “ore OBE: gia? Ee Aan ” # eullgs yg Sevier: | eae) a, da +h Js is a B fui 7 14 Tea? } a it BI DIWAN OF AL-MUTANABBI—ap. 1008 BRIT. MUS., ADD.19,357 Prate XLVII.—Arastic. British Museum, Apprtronat 19,357.—A.D. 1008. HE Diwdn, or Collected Poems, of the celebrated poet Abu ‘t-Taiyib ‘Ahmad ‘ibn ‘al-Husain ‘al-Mutanabbi’ (murdered A.H. 354= A.D. 965), with the notes of ‘Ali ‘ibn Hamzah ’al-Basri. On paper, about 7 in. by 53; 222 leaves, some of which, however, are later supplements of different dates. Written by a pupil of ‘Ali ‘ibn Hamzah ’al-Basri, and dated in the month of the 1st Gumada, A.H. 398=Jan. Feb. 1008. The colophon runs as follows. 550) Wary hell ly EY, Byde Repeto (sic) coll bey 245 Gye Rell ae Ces oo bel all eels ey BUA, Cees Gl EL ce orl gore da, Gell paces G58, See Catal. Codd. MSS. Orientt. qui in Museo Britannico asservantur: pars 2da, codd. Arabicos am- plectens, p. 486, no. MLXIXx. This is one of the oldest copies in existence of the Diwan of ’al-Mutanabbi’, and well deserving of collation by any future editor. The plate represents f. 1234. See Dieterici’s edition, p. era, Il. 16, 19, 23, and p. #4’, Il. 16, 17. The marginal notes to the right and left are identical, [s + Wy Eystel,. They seem to refer to the two collations made, according to the muti- a, in the year 422 = A.D. 1081. JMl, oe! lated note on f. Gatherings. Apparently of ten leaves, but not signed. | J are always carefully distinguished in all positions. — Punctuation. © and p at the end of verses and Dammah with tenwin is written ? (1. 8)—Gezmah is sentences. a whe tory Brana Writing. A fine, flowing Nashi. The diacritical both open = (I. 1) and closed *_; observe its use in Soa) points are rarely omitted. | (I. 1) and ,,é!) (1. 3), as also over the long vowels EO EDs EE op EEO: a ey, Meme ORI 2 we, RAM te ate all s : ; f + b, by way of contrast tos 5 4 45 4; also x form de (f. 1220, 1.1); but meddah is ~ (1. 8), and is (il. 1, 4) gainst x; final « has the points above, gg | often omitted (I. 9). (IL. 1, 3), though they are sometimes omitted (I. 4); & and i a er [eal oy b 538 Sthadststamnat i ne ee one ee ARTE 9 oledela ans hy pill pd ebb A Ne mes, | elG Ml ee tS byleste betdsal ere | i] E5998 58 ie petaene: seat. | pees SL een e | iss Se nD) age Baht tara arse Se ent boa (et bu: alec eal pate & Sess VAscaps teat eee | q Palle wosall Wat mara LeShasaael 2 shales : "he ‘pet canal nA etoal istilann2: ares ged nad Ses \kesstak Ls 2 4 by pee pasteles ; ier. sticalelgen este, “ivan ee 4 Hi Pe Asa cUbig dl cell aailas Muller tee 5 | Sola Maule eval elas perked | i] Es Wealek rrraslyyull av FS L lll eh ' Hil lars # Lolfp_ Sata, eer oy ep yorneniee—"" Irate age : Bec hse by bp! ie (aoe ae ~ Liekeai oF re Z cle talikeys Wis\o,> aoe sled ahi? = | ehnaieis epg Dita gge oer peu eae © MH ‘AL-WAKIDI, KITABU L-MAGAZI—a.0. 1169. BRIT. MUS., OR. 1617. Pirate XLVIIL—Arasic. Brivish Museum, Ortenran 1617.—A.D. 1169. fa ey -Magazi, or History of the Campaigns of the Prophet Muhammad, by ’Abu ‘Abdi i tee Muhammad ‘ibn ‘Omar ‘ibn Wakid ’al-Wakidi (+ A.H. 207= A.D. 822). On paper, eee an in. by 68s 20 leaves. Written at ’al-Gazirah (Gazirat ‘Ibn ‘Omar) in Mesopotamia, by Abu ‘l-Barakat ‘ibn ‘Isa ‘ibn “Abi Yila, and finished on Saturday, the 11th of Sha‘ban, A.H. 564= A.D. 1169. The colophon is as follows. Bey ay V vatleni ct \ : 4 . . - - Gaz He eS. ee wo (sie) Ny a letel, cet ell ose Gow Ge Syley dy dll ody ill Ges 5 aye Ejeet) yon Bleeds extey By) Le glen te sla Comm pgp ave Shall Gatley AM amy cde cal ce come ce GMail pl alec alll Ray Ql) pil oll aa Je alll wre AN ayy Spills Geabell ged, GU oe Gall cnblal go, a) osetly aralull gun cle, al de nag aa 15 The notes relate to collations of the manuscript executed by ‘Abdu ‘L-Wahid ‘ibn ‘Abdi ‘r-Rahman ‘ibn Muhammad ‘al-’Arihawi (of Jericho), in the years 924 = A.D. 1518, 926 = A.D. 1520, 929 = A.D. 1523, and 930 = A.D. 1524. They are as follows. fe “a | See : Ay Beas . ; ype Ay istsil (S (Spte Crile we etsy 4 ” . . oP lee Ep OS oY Gayl ae wy oly Ge hed, eyes (sie) 5 ww cx tsls eee) rol al) lyal a\c\ sak! asl One Adll oy re ley 2) asl, BS 6) aes oo fe WY ost! clave (sie) I) ALY guy, SNS La! ah, - | ha 8 P gia ier) mead Seas Sie OAs ike ee WS oss! Song WW Gye os Gi Cue > al all (sic) alls) Qype osseh cat (sie) Gl) a Ues3 certs we (Soe He or ol Uke one) ox Yalu dug ley Sl aL) lyal Soden Cpls 3 he AY opts epcld (sie) JS EE 4x o\c) yall asl, we aly ablic wy Ones! AL les} Slee ies cha « ee Soles Zi 2 ,<2\y alll sal Spo Sblbe eh 3 als lad, Qld ho 4 dsl, 2 us (a) ss, } SS ey This is, so far as we are aware, the only complete copy in existence of this important historical work. It belonged to Mr. T. Aleppo in 1847, and it passed into the British Museum in 1878. of the xiith cent., contains the first half, viz., as far as Orient. 1617, f. 127a (see Catal. Orientt. qui in Museo Britannico asservantur: pars 2da, codd. Arabicos amplectens, p. 1 F vk DCCCCXVI. ). the whole, viz., as far as Orient. 1617, f. Gatherings. Of ten leaves, not signed. Catchwords have been added on the last page of each kurrasah by a later hand. Ruling. On one side, with a dry point. ©, or some similar figure, at the end ‘The headings of Punctuation. of a sentence or paragre A chapters are in a larger character, either wholly or in part. Writing. A somewhat cramped and rather inelegant Preston, Fellow of Trinity Col Von Kremer’s edition (pp. 1-860), published at Caleutta, comprises about lege, Cambridge, who purchased it at The Additional MS. 20,737, also Codd. MSS. 419, no. one-third of Nashi. scribe, partly by a later reader. Forms of Letters, ete. The The vowel-points were added partly by the muhmilah is rarely marked, chiefly with ~ and «. ‘The letter sm fre- quently appears to have only two strokes, as in Jyw, (1. 1), mye (1. 8).—Dammah with tenwin is ~ (1. 7).— Gezmah is often written with the long vowels z and a, The form of | and with ’alif maksiirah, as in 3), | silah is somewhat peculiar in the word al}, 1. 7. XLIX. a ae oA | Cty as RY | se OF ee ue wi refbunwit, er ew the POEMS oF NIZAMI,ETC—ALD. 1410-11. BRIT.MUS., ADD.27,261. Pirate XLIX.—Perrstan. British Museum, Apprrionat MS. 27,261.—A.D. 1410-11. Yel . ; 4 Aeros : me LARGE collection of poetical works and scientific treatises, comprising, for example, the poems of Nizami, ff. 20-2930; select ghazals by twenty-four Persian poets, ff. 3130-338a; a short treatise pn Astronomy, ls jie > _yossty, f 3380; a manual of Astrology, wessth) L4,,, f 3760; the ab cl of Faridu ’d-din ‘Attar, f 28, margin; part of the | Gabe. of the same poet, f. 1110, margin; an anthology of Persian poets, f. 1408, margin ; the p> pl of ‘Auhad-i “Isfahani, f. 4246, margin; etc., etc, etc. Paper; about 74 in. by 5; 547 leaves, with an average of 25 lines in each page and 60 short lines obliquely in the margins. Written by two scribes, Muhammad ‘al-Halwa’i, a sitet \ crete, f. 1106, and Nasir, poll, ff 376a to the end; A-H. 813-814 = A.D. 1410-11; for the Mughal prince Sultan Galalu ‘d-dunya wa'd-din ‘Iskandar, the second son of Umar Shaikh and grandson of Timir. He was born A.H. 786; succeeded his elder brother Pir Muhammad as ruler of Fars, A.H. 812; revolted against his uncle Shahrukh, A.H. 816; was besieged by the latter in Ispahin, A.H. 817, taken prisoner and delivered to his brother Mirza Rustam, by whom he was put to death. His names and titles are set forth in the following inscription, written in white on two richly illuminated pages at the beginning of the volume: ond a al Se ell, Gell oeblls Gibbs .5 Jaci led lac Ltt a> ost pall 6 iSbe Wl ole ou Gall, Lisl! We SW eslhl At the top and bottom are traced in Kific characters the words: AM lets ley scil, Jb AUN Goh) he cul, ale agldy aelhel gi jl calyd ploy pILM jel ral The plate exhibits the commencement of the astronomical treatise ols je 3 pees, f. 3385, composed by Gamshid ‘ibn Mas‘id ‘ibn Mahmid, surnamed Giyathu 'd-din ‘al-Kashi, one of the astronomers who were employed upon Ulug Beg’s Tables, and the author of bled eh Aad ls, and other works. He died A.H. 819= A.D. 1416. Gatherings. These vary from 2 to 18 leaves, though Writi A very minute character, but perfectly 8, 10, and 12 predominate. They have no signatures. legible, partly Nashi, partly Nasta‘lik. The single leaves are numbered continuously throughout Ornamentation. There are 21 full-page miniatures, the yolume, and each has its catchword. some smaller drawings, and a profusion of illuminated headings and borders of exquisite taste and finish. {I describing this and the following Plate the Committee have to acknowledge the valuable help of Dr. C. Rieu, the Keeper of the Oriental MSS. in the British Museum. ] ! & ereou 4 ahd ahd | ae mee : aa oI aD ° oe be Coe ee ee gre / BE Cif Com a2 oe ke THE BOSTAN OF SA Di—a.p. 1629. BRIT. MUS., ADD. 27,262. Pirate L.—PersiAn, Brrrist Musrum, Apprrionan MS. 27,262—A.D. 1629. if | \HE Bostin of Muslihu 'd-din Sa‘di, written at Agra (Agrah), and finished on the 26th of the month of the first Rabi, A-H. 1039 = A.D. 1629, by the well known cal ‘d-din Mas‘, commonly called Hakim Rukna. On rich cream-coloured paper; about 15 in. by 10}; apher Ruknu 175 leaves. The colophon, f. 175a, is as follows. On the first page we read in the handwriting of the late Sir John Malcolm: “This book was purchased at Kermanshah in 1810 by Sir John Malcolm from a Prince of the Zund family, whose eyes had been put out and who wandered as a mendicant over the country his ancestors and relations had so long governed.” For the contents of the plate, f. 168), see Graf’s edition of the Bostan, pp. er1 and ery, lines 277-284. in gold, on various coloured grounds. The covers are also painted on both sides, the designs on the inside being of the same ¢ as the MS., those on the outside Q d, as in the last line in sy and >4+:. a an is added, as E = ime sat: F more modern. There are also a “Unwan and ten minia- Ornamentation. Each page is richly gilt between the Writing. A large, elegant Nasta‘ik. The diacritical points are frequently omitted. Vowels are occasionally y aa ie ae evn, tho broad | {26% Painted in the most highly finished Indian style dines eas enclosed ins one Cees sot aaae bases al Ree plate represents Zulaikha kissing the hands and feet ly curtailed in the plate) being outer margins (neces: Z : of Joseph. as of beasts, birds, insects, and flowe I covered with de TPO AOA ANAM LONE EE he gh hehOLAN dh Che? Coke si PLP AMA 4 th ta: NOR PO) pip Hy F908: A 4k Vo RE PUNT Da. he: No:2 ACh phn: MOVED SOY SoM #e FRR OWLAN dy C09 NO ES Fy 9 Bad O« “hy “fs de PT BRhNk ph Pen Nls Sit NVAN AI EACI Rv hoe: nye tN ih NG UE AO G2 O poem LWP 1) he Bd: hina yh cha: FIN ae PON A 2 Wm :O h C OM go+:: § i, Gt Ue S1O:E Nha OP enhy: Ott sd, b Bh Youn PUG EO Kee BAR Ne hoe WReGAN: ONAL CD19 9 FE PT Ee Ash Fin h eR EEN) Nova BP Rd egg: APH DOE OO DA N FER % Oe C1O:B Rh AIBN noe: MOHMNAN:AR TCH: BVO) OD er the de dare: NAD -ANKC AR HOF DU Robo Rh pom egy. OF0N hoo: g Kap -hP D2 Pd Bash h ph ay VO FP NYAYNIE DeD EM Fy % 49: D PS TAD Ndede PARADISE OF THE MONKS—a.p. 1586. BRIT. MUS., OR.763. Prate LI.—Airaroric. 29 2 British Museum, Orrenran 763.—A.D. 1586. ae E work entitled Gadla ’Abau Kédisan, “ Lives of the holy Fathers,” or Nagara “Abau, “ Dis- courses of the Fathers,” or Gannata Manakésat, “the Garden (or Paradise) of the Monks,” translated from the Greek. On vellum; large quarto, about 14 in. by 11%; 164 leaves, the last of which is blank; 3 columns. Written, according to the colophon, for one Matthew (dbi-na Méatewis) in the 25th year of the reign of Sarza-Déngél, and finished on the 25th of Tékémt, A.M. 7079= 87, according to our reckoning. This, how- A.D. 1579, according to the Abyssinian, or A.D. 158( g ever, was the 23rd year of Sarza-Déngél’s reign, which began in the spring of 1563. See Wright's Catalogue of the Ethiopic MSS. sents the upper half of f. 456, containing the anecdotes numbered 107, 108, 110, 111, 112, and 114. in the British Museum, no. cclxiy., with pl. iv. The plate repre- Gatherings. Mostly. of 10 leaves, signed with /Sthi- are written col. 1, lines 5, 6, 14; col. 2, lines 2, 3, 10, 11, opie numerals (i.e., Greek letters) in the upper left-hand and the last half of 14; col. 3, lines 5, 6. corner of the first leaf. The signatures run from 1 to 13, Writing. The general character is far more slender and then from 1 to 4. and elegant than in the previous century. The angular Ruling.. On one side only, with a dry point, guided form of some letters, e.g. 0, has almost disappeared ; by marginal prickings. The columns are bounded by compare, for instance, col. 1, 1. 1, with Plate X., col. 1, single vertical lines. 1.14. The syllable / is always written with a comect- Punctuation. As in Plates X. and XXIV. In red ing line, ( (col. 2, 1. 3). tA LIVES oF SAINTS, ETC—A.D.850. PALIMPSEST. (VITHCENT) BRIT.MUS., ADD.14,651. Pirate LII—Syrtac. Bririst Museum. Apprrronat 14,651.—A.D, 850. ils VOLUME containing Lives of Saints and Martyrs and select writings of several Fathers, namely, Athanasius, Ephraim Syrus, Isaac of Antioch, and Jacob of Batnain or Sérig. On vellum; octavo, about 8} in. by 54; 217 leaves, one leaf having been lost. Written by the priest Job and another scribe unnamed, A. Gr. 1161=A.D. 850. It was conveyed to the convent of St. Mary Deipara, in the Nitrian desert, by the abbat Moses of Nisibis, A. Gr. 1243 = A.D. 932. The plate, f. 94a, exhibits the conclusion of the “Letter of Athanasius, archbishop of Alexandria, to the Virgins who had gone and prayed at Jerusalem and returned,” 1, 17, ba.+s? Ne » uiao sSaiofs SFO GOST USI} JASGAS Lady JAsi (sic) beiptonad; Joadaua) (sic) wa.i ecpancosl) Gatherings. Mostly of ten leaves, letters at the foot of the las twelve leaves, and the ned with Syriac points being used, e. | page. Two or three have | points are abundant, » oT Awaaly, 18. Diacritical eS seas Forms of Letters, m retains its ancient shape (.*), 3 osy ais, 1. 10. fourteen. Ruling. The text is bounded by faint: side-lines, Writing. A good, regular cui and «© is still angular (o). J has usually a slight turn ive, such as was in use from the viiith to the xth or xith cent. 'The titles and explicits are rubricated (Il. 17-20). backwards at its lower extremity, when not joined to a preceding letter, Observe the connexion of o and 2 in the word JLoAay at the end of 1. 10. Punctuation. Tolerably full, double as well as single ane gone) po I. This manuscript is an example of an early palimpsest, and as such requires a second description. In its original state it consisted of at least 109 leaves in large quarto, about 10} in. by 81, with double columns, of the vith cent. These formed a large portion of a manuscript of the four Gospels, furnished with the capitula and the Eusebian canons on the margins, a harmony at the foot of each page, and rubrics of lessons. See Wri it's Catalogue of the Syriac MSS. in the British Museum, no. DCCCCXLVUL, p. 1103. The plate represents an upper half-page, of which we give the transcription, containing §. Luke, ch. xxiv. 18-21. Gatherings, These were signed with Syriac letters, Ornamentation. F, 112 6 exhibits a cross within an ee., 2, f.18la; AX, f la. ably once painted of a Writing. Ancient Hstrangéla of the finest type. various colours. There similar cross, but of Punctuation. A. single point. The diacritical point is also used, as in the word pstsae in the last line of the first column. oval nimbus, which w: smaller size, on f. 216 a. smazlera wiasls aaa (1) rads asi = resins (2) isa exzda ls leita (3) ssmaaoia hams jar bur sa (4) ise Et is cas rams (5) Q.ams pac masa: ~ aims (6) rac mds wom iar (7) sso TAIT piso ris (8) Aiwiarel (9) Cece OKKE Sud eacrranicl yous hapgs al ° og cla oetecs ys WSoaAgd Hs ale ads<( Yop ey sate eyaleang acy oq alxsyatus; ay dlacde yen, 43 Sasener CUA sella o< oceans der rape) pal. dole state yarcasel prrcetradtd pal 0 gataler afer yecttiere ales oy ke ue cenal ANS Koy ana aniigg Onkroe Mave Lys ave —Lss prado yar anagats egyen ocgidtls, cecum asveal, weet yo) ays Yrrbicn prassds yea) yor ytlareru < Pa eae \eesric y WWEROAA LG ae A ha SE he 4057 ogo bh veo] rr we] yercasales octnenal SPabes I athoesas oot Doses ala alg) avaidads aaycus glad 1 yslauw ancadwa — Oe SIDRA RABBA=A_D. 1735-6. BRIT.MUS., ADD.23,600. Prare LIL—Manparrie, British Museum. Apprrroxat 23,600.—A.D. 1735-6. fies Sidra Rabba (“ Great Book”) or Ginza (“Treasury”), the principal religious work of the Mandaites. On thin European paper, about 12} in. by 84; 315 leaves, namely, the first or right-hand half (yammina), ff. 1-2 234, and the second or left-hand half (sémala), which is written, as usual, inversely, ff. 235-315 (or, with ‘separate pagination, ff. 1-81). Written by Yahya Bihram bar “Adam bar Yal hya “Adam for Hadath bar Kasim bar Hadath, A.H. 1148=A.D. 1735-6. The plate, of which we give a transcription in Hebrew letters, depicts the upper half of f. 1034. See Wright's Catalogue of Syriac MSS. in the British Museum, p. 1210; Norberg’s Codex Nasaraeus, Liber Adami appellatus, tom. i, p. 828, | 3—tom. ii, p. 2, 1. 1; Petermann’s Thesaurus sive Liber Magnus etc. tom. i, pars 1, p- 179, 1. 14—p. 180, 1 3. The translation which accompanies it, by Professor Noeldeke of Strassburg, is purposely written in such barbarous Latin as best represents the style of the original. The text has some errors, the most important of which have been corrected, in the transcription, from Petermann’s edition. To make the sense clearer, it may be remarked that the speaker is the Manda di-Haiyé (Mens Vitae, vods {wf s); those who are addressed, are the Mandwans; those against whom they are warned, the Muhammadans, the possessors of worldly power. “Alahatha, sms, 1. 14, is a collective term, meaning all the evil deities, and Baitd, mx, 1. 15, is the whole fabric of the created world. Gatherings. Usually of ten leaves, but not num- | a8 ee for, “who, which”; and xp (ll. 13, 15) for bered. Hach leaf has a catchword. xoxp, “end.” In the first line of a page the stroke of Writing. The peculiar Mandaitic character, a de- the letters t and 5 is usually prolonged to the edge of scendant of the ancient Aramaic, with an alphabet of 22 letters, written from right to left. The words are the upper margin, The present specimen is not a fine one, the characters being rather thin and unshapely. carefully divided by spaces. Contractions are rare, such Sswonnyt NUNDINP rcbwo mon powromnnd Nv [nl ( NTT2 29 ap cog po pros Soe (2) SDONT NDT JD PD NWDN] PIN) INVA NPT ( [read PONINT PIN aN suNdwona soxdaoxsm NoNNTN yo) [read NDMD] ADD) Sass repwa mdinn ay Swann pos (5) yO INTN pNaw psa fread PPNMINP] PONNTP NIN (6) neonds xo pm Noy saa parnnd (7) NTDOT NONNDINDD aN NOY [ie] yy OY bd) 6s) PTPNDIN [1 NONWY NIN NDINTD Nv Now (0) [read JUNDI PNNII NT TD foie) pAOTIM pNaaND md 12 [read promwnm pwn) (10) [sic] (NINO PTI [corrected into JT] YD NWDNIT [sie] NTN (11) NIN NSN pase gem prosody symnd why 72 RY D AMS TND NTT (13) nomads mab SNONPINP) NITD) NINT OT NNT (14) XN D NIDND (15) (1) [meve a] Vita delabamini ita ut priores delapsi, qui delapsi sunt (2) neque extensae erant manus eorum versus me. Surgite magni probatae (3) justitiae, amovite et liberate vos ipsos a lupis rapacibus (4) et a leonibus perdentibus, delabi facientibus, qui nonnullos (5) vestrum delabi faciunt. ©, qui ambulant in plateis Terrae, et est incurvata (6) et inclinata statura eorum, et corda sua deseruerunt, separaverunt, rapuerunt, (7) ne misceamini cum filiis iniquitatis, quorum manus sanguine inquinatae, sunt, (8) et qui quotidie omni die sedent super thronis rebellionis (9) et nomen Vitae persequuntur; spirat ignis e facie eorum (10) et habitat eis inter humeros eorum et facit eis secundum superbiam ecorum, ) (11) ut percussione ipsorum percutiantur et pere' (12) mea non sit super eis. Et Vita vincit et vincit Mens (18) Vitae et socius ejus. Finis. (14) Hoe est mysterium et liber et deletio omni Divinitati (15) Domus. Finis. [In describing this Plate the Committee have to acknowledge the valuable assistance of Professor Dr. Noeldeke of Strassburg. | pee i a oe a egipey Sted - aT ae Kooy Fz Aggorrayst wStiR ras » eee SP ay sgoeartatieag “Oo Selyprbsonrrney F opabay + eB ea foensgnbret rate erg e Vin GRR IO ST YOR By +S ybes ivho oq are Te D. a Ale -iatit ie 3 ea) Sarina iene pres ort i we SARITA RON TOS on we - Eb wats Vaya ST nt vs: che ee STAT wn ain eaciell Ses anre AWGaan 2? nga erent ON IED. : Rave borers yay Ie Vi aS eh Oral Saison Pant mata be Scare OI o> NI apbRy oS ETO h sar70 si hey ? ciohintenecrey HOTS AORN ? t REN Eietep Sa Soya y ais sie b! oe SomanmT en IONE. WIG Sr PS MND aie on \3 Nas Bs) eyr VAY yn) * oi yw ap waniyos ee a SOosne peas err ems oe TANS Hid sree ne cf i x i 6 , i) EN, PENTATEUCH=— (xii?! Cent) BRIT. MUS., OR. 1467. Prats LIV.—Hesrew. Britisa Museum, Orrenrar 1467.—[XUvn cent. ] > Pp - See en - HE Pentateuch, imperfect, commencing in its present state on f. 12a with the last words of Leviticus, ch. xii. 8, m7) Won mby 55. (Chaldee) Targiim or translation ( about 143 in. by 113; The Hebrew text is accompanied by the Aramaic the so-called ‘Onkélés), in alternate verses. Vellum; large quarto, 121 leaves (of which the first eleven are paper, and are described below); 2 columns, 27 lines. Written in Babylonia or Persia, about the xiith century. This manuscript exhibits a superlinear system of vowel-points, both in the text and the Targim. They were added by the hand of the scribe, and differ in some respects from those of the St. Peters- burg codex of A.D. 916 (see Harkavy and Strack’s Catal ogue, No. B 3, pp. 223 seqq.), as the following table shows, in which for convenience sake the mark rdpheh is included. | opps ye on | pw yop | ommp|oy | pyn Name. | nna spn } mrp Se | mon pop | Sup | | Sup pun | pop jpn Ordinary form. = See || a ab a) J233) a) m3 avel | YS! | Sates) |} ce) Gi Form in the MS. | 5) | I | fal Sl Ga) 3) bal | a) | al fal | tal I | | The accentuation of the text, however, by the same hand, is according to the usual system. At a much later time (in the xviith or xviiith cent.), the ordinary vowel-points were frequently added to the text (but not to the Targiim). Even these, however, differ from the Mass6reth; e¢.g., in Numbers, ch. xvi. 21, the Babylonian form 72m) is otherwise vowelled man) (Mass. 722%). At the end of each of the pericopes or hebdomadal Parshiyéth, the word pen» is written in large characters; the number of verses in the pericope is added in letters (the word ype being either written in full or shortened into ws, as in the plate); and a mnemonic sign or word, usually a proper name, is added (in the plate, bay). These last frequently vary from the printed Masséreth. The open and closed sections are not marked by the letters » and p. The open sections always commence at the beginning of a line. If the text fills up the previous line entirely, one line is left blank; but not otherwise. The closed sections, on the contrary, either run on in the same line, after a blank space; or, in case of that line being wholly or nearly filled up, commence in the middle of the line immediately following. The text is accompanied by the Massora Magna and Parva, the former on the upper and lower margins, the latter on the side margins and between the columns. They exhibit the critical apparatus in its earliest form, before the passages of Scripture were written out in full, and before the headings of the rubrics, and the numbers contained in them, were fixed. The plate represents f. 74a, containing Numbers, ch. x ii. 41 (Targim)—ch. xxx iii. 15 (the first word of the text, wor). There are, as it accidentally happens, no differences from the Massoretic text in this page; but the Targim varies in many points from the Rabbinic Bible of 1524. E.g,, ch. xxxii. 42, pom for pom; ch. xxxiii. 1, pen for ipa), and so always 7 for 9; y. 2, pryppn for VTP; v. 3, nuvana, NDB, *No8D, for Nwona, MDB, OND; Vv. 8, OP w for ow Wp; v. 14, mm for yn. At s who not only mended many of the torn leaves with paper, but added at the beginning eleven paper me time during the xviiith cent., this manuscript was repaired by a native of South Arabia, leayes, containing Leviticus, ch. i. 1—ch. xii. 8, in two columns, text and Targiim written alternately. Here the Hebrew text has the ordinary punctuation and accentuation (save that Pathach is mostly ég0l), while the Targiim exhibits the superlinear or Babylonian punctuation. At the end of oreth. That used for the pericopes there are mnemonic words, not however proper names. There is no Mas this owner was an Arabic-speaking Jew appears from the fact that on f. 1, col. 1, after giving the Targim of ‘Onkélés on Levit. i. 14, he thoughtlessly adds the Arabic translation of the verse as follows: DNOMPN JNID YIN PINDWox yo (sic) MIIPOND 99 TTyS NOON JD MRITP Ww. The same is the case in ch. i. 17 and elsewhere, only the Arabic is not given in full. Gatherings. The manuscript originally consisted of the upper right-hand corner of the first page and the 23 quires, of which 21 had five sheets or ten leaves, lower left-hand corner of the last, and catchwords were while the 22nd had four sheets or eight leaves added ; as may yet be made ont, though with difficulty, (one of which was cancelled), and the 23d only three from the remaining traces. sheets or six leaves; making 223 leaves in all. Con- fuling. On one side only, with a dry point, guided sequently 11 quires are wanting at the beginning, by marginal prickings. Vertical lines bound the text together with the first three leaves of the 12th quire, of each column. or 113 leaves in all. They were signed with letters at Writing. The writing, which depends from the ruled lines, is of the Babylonian or Persian type; whereas the St. Petersburg codex of A.D. 916, though probably ame region, is in a pure Séphardi cha- written in the racter and inclines more to the Palestinian hand.—The The letter 5 30 a, somewhat ented by w, and w by &. letter w is rey has sometimes an involved form, 5? 5, f. sionally like a small » within a larger one; and we oc find a peculiarly shaped, straddling n, and a retro-curved 5, which are called on the margin Dyn, f 93.4, and oypy 5, £1060. Daghesh forte and lene are marked in the usual way, but not regularly. For na Nw there is no sign, and even y2 NW is not indicated in such cases as jpwa, col. 1, 1. 3, ‘yor, 1. 6, and spor, 1. 13, doubtless because it was no longer heard. Methegh appears to be unmarked.—To fill up the vacant space at the end of a line, the scribe uses half of a w (the initial letter of his name), with part of the word that begins the next line ; e.g Col 1, Il. 2, 9, 155 col. 2, Il, 18, 20, 21; more rarely the half w alone, col. 2,1. 19, or part of the next word 1 alone, col. 2,1, 26. ‘The writer of the first eleven pages We believe that the date assigned to this manuscript cannot be far wrong. the Targiim on the sacerdotal benediction (Num. vi. 24-26), brought down into the xivth cent., because ys a rabbinic w for the same purpose.—In the Targim, ys at the end of a line has sometimes the cursive form, col. 1, ll. 3,12; col. 2, 1. 9. The contraction of the letters bx occurs in col. 1, 1. 19, with somewhat of the Sephardi character. The Sacred Name is expressed by , L 18), the numerical value of which, 26, also emplo, sy (e.g., col. 1 is equal to that of the letters of M7. At the end of each pericope there , red, green, and yellow, one The words mwn5 etc., The orna- Ornamentation. are ornaments coloured witl Shown in the plate. 5, are also variously coloured. ons on ff. 33a, 43, 78a, 117 and 118, are than elsewhere—The inverted nns in of which i col. 1, Il. / mental des more elaborate Numbers, ch. x. 35, 36, are coloured, f. 47a; and so are the words for the mnemonic {3% 73, which respectively stand at the beginning of a column, viz., Ww (Deut. xii, 28), f. 95a; Nsw (2b. xiii. 24), f. 106a; and Ty) (ib. xxxi. 28), f. 17a, In each of these case: Wa i jlluminated on the margin; and in the last instance pn is added, i.e, BMD NPN, “ ordained by the Scribes.” At any rate it cannot be which was introduced in the latter part of that century, is wanting here. [In describing this Plate the Committee desire to acknowledge the assistance of the Rey. Dr. C. D. Ginsburg and the Rev. Dr. Schiller-Szinessy. | | | py) anbiyeon 2b) ype 0a) Ans ale) oman i, age To rep vak : babii 9 PS by MPI VBP) Ops if AOS) y2 one ON DAVIE) pp “spy sieabdon vara yard ayy 309) 209 yu) a - ope) ioevogy op “Ly is om AMUN YP NIK ‘OS ua 229)% O)) mob Rakes ye ppt men) pyyrne Paden disp) BA rypve nay Sn ‘quont IA>)P sae DIP! mypra) Wa) “Qyp omppyy Vr’) i 7 penne 5, “oxy BEI IRYE) puree . OAng PN VIP? (a On eke a Soxpn wy Sapa’ Fy ony, DP AAD saat ) RVD PPI EAS) ipbap cathe prosile 2 (Bon fseMnm — envedp) ont Ae rINIPP ope Noh) yer ' 4 oy Se rahen ps2 nf _yreBp ‘01292)2_ IWIN BD —— Rrdan your nbzsy wey? vw phrapr won) dys) Wy ice hi RY) arp ne baal SA PRL aah) pie eo) : woh noes | . on a rrenrells eps pyiy 1p Of a dd | © Roz yy» op 9 32V Ap. Ay cabay 20, le” saad I) 3 (Brie. pa we SEPHER TACHKEMONI.—A.D. 1282. BRIT.MUS., ADD. 27,113. Prare LY.—Heprrew. 3ritish Museum, Apprrrox AL 27,113.—A.D. 1282 6 igs Tachkémoni, or Makimat, of Ychiidah ben Sh&lomoh ‘al-Charizi (snbx, “the versifier”), composed in imitation of the Makamat of ‘al-Hariri; followed by the Makdmatu ’2-Ziwag hath Yehidah Soné han-Nashim) of Yéhidah ben Yischak ‘ibn v1; the rules of Shéchitah (the killing of animals for food) in Arabic verse by ’Abraham bar Yischak bar Méborakh bar Yatkob; and the Chronicle of Moses, Dibéré hai-Yamim shel-Mosheh rabbéni. On coarse paper, probably of Spanish manufacture; about 83 in. by 6; originally 180 leaves, but the first three have bee (better known by the name of Mine Shabbéthai hal-I n lost, and two have been subsequently added at the beginning, making at present 179. A.M. 5042 = A.D. Written by an Arabic-speaking Jew, named Sadyah bar ‘Abraham, 2, according to the subscription in mixed Arabie and Hebrew, f. 168a, ‘POS 22 OTAN V2 AID and 48) »NXdox 7 mo on wind AS °D adox Jona ndpo As the Tachkéméni was composed about A.D. 1218-20, the present is no doubt one of the oldest manuscripts of it in existence. It contains matter not to be found in the early printed editions of Constantinople and Amsterdam, nor eyen in that by Stern (Vienna, 1854). Kaempf’s imperfect text (Die ersten Makamen etc., Berlin, 1845) is derived from a copy of this very manuscript. The plate represents f. 52a, comprising the end of the thirteenth Makamah and the beginning of the fourteenth, and corresponds with leaf 736, ll. 13-36, of Stern's edition. Gatherings. Of six sheets or twelve leaves. There is only one catchword in the MS., viz. at the foot of f, 830 (originally f. 846). The lea bered with Hebrew letters by a later hand. Writing. speaking Jews, uses indifferently + or y (see the last line) instead of the proper initial of his name, p. Contractions at the end of a line are indicated, as usual, by a small stroke, as 197 (1. 18) for ms>on. Corrections. Letters to be deleted are marked with a dot above and below, as in Il. 7 and 8. s have been num- African Séphardi in rabbinic characters, rather hurriedly written. To fill up the blank space at the end of a line, the scribe, after the manner of Arabic- Any canydn yon ae pM anpin Pp AID anaM2 DG) Abana osm mab sawed Syn rma mpn > wo nyt @ Sproat tax mbob may sa ombs Sy muab wo am ¢) (sie) soma aba snaps pos snymnnwn orpm tan 27 wows) 4) aye. 79w bon wpb yosb asa swear yowe nye 6) yan ax ax bw Nw OND (6) ‘ounyis poyanby ona) nT IN aN UN (7) Town “yw onMN Tn) @) DIAN TWaw 7) prs ob mT mawat Douay ‘DIWY DDN WI IN Wp Wd Dw owe nya yy Dw) OW) i yo “D2 OVD SY WS SI we py mam pony pa? MSNA) WM (10) NS PST PD WIN TW nid (11) psy Nor 1295 apy 2 72) YT ND DN IND C3 Lelio (ody si )) Rola (14) orisholl (15) Ty) Twp AP NN My pS? a Nay TINT yO BNI (16) (sie) NDT Op wMN TINA snabonm MMs) “nN IwND 7) Ender wpa yp penn tpnar yaa mands prom sbi pons (1s) omabn yyy p> sD POND MIANT MWD POR jpn ( JN DT INN YOwN ‘omind nya ww. ( US aban 233) ndyq) hpia) hE Ie) wb ae inn) PES wee (2b) ( ( ( ap on spb yUM myo Aw ypani 7s) moms oi WW mann Ws qnbxw yow) TIS oT % TAN) TY Ws °DD YIN ON 1D AWA wh NWpla Ws qnban) nox TDIWiT y pn ‘yoy j3) yw yop bs Daa) Hot Pe yi (25) [In describing this Plate the Committee have to acknowledge the assistance of the Rey. Dr. Schiller-Szinessy.] t LVI. aye pissy > A525 / ”; Nee TH afi Si aoe ‘Saran wy We ae y ti eles) Pe ge vas soonbohy op OD) \7 IVI DOS: yw y yo DDS ys DDD DWM IVY _ IV yo 3 “ pysyndy aysnb bio> perme? DD” BWV HY THY’ S 2x “DNN) Soon pry ID oS ye DIY “VHD po) Yow WIPD P. Pp? VAIS SIN jrow poy Wanye 5 -nony.nnn do by sen Pb why sb by gh nb sa25 3b pre awss~ one W Happy ao ba) ayyoy Type ay jy JPY 9 AIT WY Torry ay 12.5 yre DHISW VHD) YY WIN) heyy VW DMOVODY WIP ? py I pow \s by SYN DIP Seay PDDYWD) py ah) yr PV “Ow nb ap pw yre WISY 9” wow ¥70)2) DMVPW) DrvN 15 % “DIN PIUPV) DON AY Sow Sv on 5 'DOR) DAK YW? S977) PHOID) POIYW) yor 3995 a ADI DN WMD) RHOW % pon) app b> by sen n0)9) Dwr pony Wp yu SY S“N oH SeNy DH ISU" MIMID ID) NOT vb 5° 099 “yyy 29 by PAD) NYID aw» OID DO by oop shy PRY DOIs , WIT TY ww DY OP aa yr IMI) wys prow PY 7) IF PID) IY _DI 393, 5 n 1 WUD YON TON) DIT JwDwy sI9» 5) now eb Sow wa WDD! DING YON SON) DH JyrDw% MID nb I RID) IY DW J>IY 0n "PS ID WIN JIN Nas “TWD oH IH) DH XSW DED Ie Sy NID) 71 oT dt yay bax "Sn Yor oH) > ray nrwyy yby anon eb Fy ppp) DISA DY De aan ec ae AY anbpen Heb Jo HIN) 2D OWT AMID) DIY IW sup yxy why hoy pnw) 5p yoo w Sy shown b Son nr . HPD po e ¥ TALMUD YERUSHALMI—A~.p. 1289. LEIDEN, UNIV. LIB., COD. HEB.SCALIG.3. Pirate LVI.—Heprew, Lerpen. University Liprary. Cop. MS. Hepr. Scauianr. 3—A.D. 1289. fle Talmid Yérishalmi, or Palestinian Talmiid, imperfect. On vellum; bound in two volumes quarto, the one about 15 in. by 123, the other about 15% in. by 121; 674 leaves (vol. I., ff. vol. IL., ff. 871-674). Written by the well known ethical writer Rabbi Yé&chi’@l ben Yékith7el ben Binyamin ha-Rophé (the physician), of the family of the ‘Anavim, ovr (de’ Mansi or de’ Piatelli), at Rome, for Rabbi Ménachém ben Binyamin, A.M. 5049=A.D. 1288-89. For a minutely detailed description see Dr. Schiller-Szinessy’s Occasional Notices of Hebrew Manuscripts, No. I. (Cam- bridge, 1878). This manuscri Bombergs at Veni belonged to Ya'ak ot is remarkable as being one of the four copies used in the printing-oftice of the ce in printing the editio princeps of the Talmid Yérishalmi, A.D. 1523-24. It 6b ben Chaiyim "Ibn "Adoniyahi, the most learned Massorete of his time, who sold it to Daniel Bomber “Everything,” says Dr. Schiller-Szinessy (op. cit., p. 14), “shews that the MS. was actually used in the printing-office. There are numberless smudges of printers’ ink throughout the book, and the pages and columns of the printed book are laid out in the MS. partly in the handwriting of the preceding owner (Ya'akob ibn Adoniyyahu) and partly in an Ashkenazie mixed (German and Italian) hand, which, if not that of Yisrael (Cornelio) Adelkind, is in all pro- bability that of R. David ywpx2, both of whom we know to have been employed by Bombergi as two of the correctors for, and of, his press.” Subsequently the MS. passed into the hands of Jean Hurault de Boistaillé, a member of the Boistaillé branch of the house of Hurault, Counts of Chiverny, who was French ambassador at Venice in 1561-63. His entry of ownership, on the last page of the first volume, runs: “Ex Bibliotheca Jo. Huralti Boistallerii. Emi a bombergo Coronatis xij.” The next owner was the famous linguist Joseph Justus Scaliger, honorary Professor at the University of Leiden, who at his death in 1609 bequeathed this and other valuable MSS. to that institution. The plate represents the upper half of f. 628a, in the second volume, being part of the Séder Yeshivoth, tract Shebhi‘oth, section 5, corresponding to vol. IV., f. 36a, col. 1, Il. 8-81, of the editio princeps. On the upper margin, so close to the edge as to have narrowly escaped mutilation by the binder, is the signature of Ya‘ikob ‘Ibn ’Adoniyaha, “in Sephardic mixed (Rabbinic and current) character,” W278 7 APY. Gatherings. Of five sheets or ten leaves, except the line, is in the rabbinic character, in a fine, regular, last, which has six sheets. They are numbered with Italian Ashkénazi hand. The scribe generally fills up a Hebrew letters on the first and last leaves, and catch- line with a dilated letter (1. 1, 74), or with part of the words are also given | first word of the next line (1. ’y of sn32), but occa- are also given. | Ruling. On one side, with a dry point, guided by sionally with the letters 98, being prick on the m ; | ONwm. Writing. The writing, which depends from the ruled | part of his own name, Rene asa ETT ae PALAOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY. COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT. E, A. BOND, Esq, LL.D., F.S.A., PRINCIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH MusEUM, President. W. DE G. BIRCH, Esq., BRITISH MusEUM. J. W. BONE, Esq., B.A, F.S.A. Rev. H. O. COXE, M.A., BopLEy’s LipraRIAN, OXFORD. Mons. L. DELISLE, Director OF THE NATIONAL LIBRARY, PARIS, MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTE. THE RIGHT REVEREND THE BISHOP or DURHAM, D.D, J. WINTER JONES, Esq, F.S.A., LATE PRINCIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH MUSEUM. WILLIAM MASKELL, Esq, M.A., F.S.A. PROFESSOR J. RUSKIN, D.C.L., Oxrorp. E. M. THOMPSON, Esgq., F.S.A., KEEPER OF THE MSS., BRITISH Museum, Hon. Sec. G. F. WARNER, Esq., M.A., BRITISH MusEuM, Hon. Treas. PROFESSOR Dr. W. WATTENBACH, BERLIN. ProFEssoR J. O. WESTWOOD, Oxrorp. W. ALDIS WRIGHT, Esq., LL.D., TRIN. COLL., CAMBRIDGE. PROFESSOR W. WRIGHT, LL.D., QuEENS’ CoLL., CAMBRIDGE. FACSIMILES OF ANCIENT MANUSCRIPTS. ORIENTAL SERIES. PAR cove EDITED BY WILLIAM WRIGHT, LL.D., PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE. CONTENTS. 57. Ashtasahasrika-prajmaparamita. Sanskrit. [XIIIth Cent.] 58. Acharanga. Sanskrit. A.D. 1291. 59. The Kor’an. Arabic. [VIIIth Cent.] 60. Diwanu ‘l-’Adab. Arabic. A.D. 974? 6l. The Koran. Arabic. A.D. 1254. 62. The Epistles of S. Paul. Ethiopic. A.D. 1378. 63. Stele of Sakkara. Egyptian Aramaic. B.C. 482. 64. Stele of Carpentras. Egyptian Aramaic. [IVth or IlIrd Cent. B.C.) 65. Inscription from Siah. Aramaic of the Hauran. [Late Ist Cent. B.C.] 66. The New Testament. Syriac. A.D. 768. 67. Prayers, etc. Mandaitic. A.D. 1529-30. 68. Sémak. Hebrew. A.D. 1401. PHOTOGRAPHED AND PRINTED IN FACSIMILE BY THE AUTOTYPE COMPANY. Lonvon: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, Limitep, STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS. 1880. [AW Rights reserved. | estore ata LVI. ASH TASAHASRIKA—PRAJNAPARAMITA— (xiliT Cent) CAMBRIDGE, UNIV. LIB., ADD. MS.1544. Prare LVIL—Sanskrit Campripvcr. Universiry Liprary. Sl dated; but according to notes, in a different character and handwriting, on f. 1a and f. 171 (172)0, it was recited on Wednesde in the year 492=A.D. 1372, by certain persons therein mentioned. in arithmetical figures; on f. 1716 by numerical words also, ; ashidhamdsidike pakshe diptavidhau kare budhadine ‘shtamydm variyoyuta | tejasriparivarttita bhagavati mata hi tathagata prajidpdramita samastagadita srivalavagisvaraih || ete. later additions, we shall probably not be far wrong in placing the book itself about a century earlier, in the latter half of the xiiith cent. at Kathmindi. The plate represents f. 330. Writing. Of the same type as Plates XXXII. and XLUL, but with a remarkable slant to the right, which seems however to be the peculiarity of an in- Four square spots are left blank in each leaf, in the centre of two of which The leaves are numbered on the verso, with letter-numerals dividual, and not of a period or of a district. are holes for pegs or strings. to the left, and arithmetical figures to the right. Forms of Letters, ete. Long a is generally by a complete stroke, but sometimes by an incomplete pressed one; the first compound word of 1. 1, ndndvriksha, At the end of a line, or furnishes examples of both. section of a line, it may be represented by a curl over the consonant, as in paramitd, 1. 3, at the end of the AppitionaL MS. 1544.—[XTIIrn cenr. | Ashtasahasrikd-prajndparamita (see Plate XVI). leaves (f. 87 being repeated by error), with seven lines in a page. y, the eighth day of the first or bright fortnight of the month of Ashidha, This is one of the manuscripts purchased by Dr. D. Wright On palm-leaf, about 205 in. by 2%; This manuscript is un- On f. 1a the samvat is expressed srinepalasaméa-dvi-nanda-jaladhiv (i.e., 492) As these notes are obviously to the left of the consonant, either complete or incom- plete, s in ramitdparindmitanam, at the beginning of 1. 2.—Final m before a labial is cither retained, as in shannaim p., towards the end of 1.1; or changed into at the beginning of 1. 6, anusyara, as in kdvateyam p. It is also retained before initial v, as in nandkaranam f vd, about the middle of 1. 1—The elision of an initial short a, and usually too its absorption by a preceding long @, are indicated by a curved line, resembling the so y > g later Devanagari 7, as in prajfaya "tra, at the beginning gari 2, > Ss Ey of 1. 5. Ornamentation. The lacquered painted on the inside with figures of deities, now un- boards are and fortunately much injured. second section—Short 7 is indicated by a curved stroke 1@ nanavalla nanasamsthana nanapattra nanapushpa nanapala nanaarohaparinahasampanna na cha @) nanavriks tesham vrikshanai chha ssho va nanakaranam va prajiiayate api tu chchhi chchhayety evam samkhyan gachchhati | evam eva kausika asam shannam paramitanam upayakausalyaparigrihitanam prajnapa- ramitaparinamitanam jiiataparinamitanan na visesho na cha nanakaranam upalabhyate | evam ukte sakro devanim indro bhagavantam etad avochat | mahagunasamanvagateyam bhagavaty adbhutaprajfaparamita | aprameyagunasamanvagateyam bhagavaty adbhutaprajiaparamita | aparyantagunasamanvagateya- (3) m bhagavaty adbhutaprajiiaparamiteti || 9 || || || aryashtasahasrikayam prajiaparamita yan [on the upper margin is inserted varan unaparikirttanaparivartto nama chaturthah || 339 |j || atha khalu sakro devanam indro bha- gavantam etad avochat | yo bhagavan kulaputro va kuladuhita a imam prajiaparamitam abhi s is added yajn na vimuchya prasannachitto bo || || dhaya rihniyad varayed vachayet paryavapnuyat prava || (4) ddadhad avakalpafon the upper margin ayatah sri fe) nuyad ud chittam utpadyadhya || rttayed desayet upadis va. vivrinuyan manasanvaveksheta yathadhika- od uddiset svadhya fe) yet parebhyas cha vistarena samprakasayed artham asya v1 yetantasah pustakagam api kritva dharayet sthapaye- t saddharmantarddhanam bodhisattvanam imimansam apad. ma buddhanetrisamuchchhedo bhin nugrahopasamharah krito bhavishyati | nityavaikalyeneti | evam iman nirdesam (5) ya cha prajiiaya ‘tra pa saddharmachirasthitihetor ma mahasattvanam cha srutva evam mahaddhi- ka vateyam prajfiaparamita evam mahanusamsa evam mahapala evam mahavipaka vateyam prajfiaparamita | (8) evam bahumahagunasamanyagata vateyam prajiiiparamita | aparityajaniya maya peanaperas | takshitavya mama prajfiaparamita | gopayitavya mama prajiaparamita | paramadurlabha hiyam prajilaparamitety adhimu- (7) fichet | svayam eva chainam prajfiaparamitam sankuryad gurukuryan manayet pujayed archayed apachayeta pushpair dhipair gandhair malyair vilepanais chirnnair vastrais chhattrair dhvajair ghantabhih patakabhih samantach cha dipamalabhir bahuvidhabhis cha pujabhih | yo va ‘nyah sampijya parasmai chabdikaya chchbandikaya kulaputraya va kuladuhitre va yachamana- Eggeling and Cowell. | [For the description of this plate the Committee are indebted to Professors LVI. ‘aa aaa ee ee MAAN aemate G20G: . neem MLS ha sian ee | Lake Pa nie alt j a5 Ranke Scena jeaitgavern sili ae WA ay Se Eee reece BS aa iaainfacteetatan SILANKA, ACHARANGASUTRAVRITTINIRYUKTI.—A.D. 1291. INDIA OFFICE LIBRARY. Prate LVIIL—Sansxrir. Ixpia Orrice Liprary. Derosirep By THE Bombay GoverNment.—A.D. 1291, ee Achiriinga or Achiarasittra, the first of the sacred Angas of the Jainas, in Prakrit, followed by a Sanskrit commentary, entitled Achérihgasiitravrittiniryukti, by Acharya Silaika. On palm- leaf; 33 inches in length: 411 leaves, with from two to six lines in a page, according to the natural breadth of each leaf. Written by order of Ratnapila, the son of Virapala, in memory of his mother, and finished on Monday, the tenth day of the second or dark half of Vai 1348—= A.D. 1291. The plate represents the last page of the kha, samvat 2 Sanskrit commentary, f. 4115. The concluding passage of the Prakrit text, referred to early in the Plate, occurs on f. 65d as follows: sa hu muni antakade ti vuchchai. imammi loe parato ya dosu vi na vifjai bandhanam jassa kimechi vi se hu niralambane appatitthite kalamkalibhdvae ha vimuchchai tti | vami | vimutt2 samatta | dcharasiitram samdptam. In the transcription Prakvit quotations are marked by italics. This manuscript is one of those sent to England from Bombay by Dr. Buehler. Ruling. the columns are bounded by side-lines. principle with that found in the Buddhistie manuscripts The holes for pegs or strings are in the centres of the of Nepal (see the Indian Antiquary for 1877, pp. 42-48). spaces between the lines. The numbers 621 and 622 in 1. 5 are doubtful, no such Writing. The character is that commonly used in numeration being previously used to mark paragraphs Jaina manuscripts, but, owing to the large size of the in the text, Of those at the end of 1. 6, the last two letters, they are less liable than usual to be mistaken (72) are of constant occurrence in the manuscript, in for one another. Each page is divided into three combination with the 7 at the beginning, to mark the columns. To the right of the page is the number of commencement and end of the last line of a page, | Wiest? : the leaf in the ordinary arithmetical figures; to the | which, owing to the shape of the leaf, is generally left, in a peculiar system of numeration, identical in | shorter than the others. (1) bandhamokshayor yyah samyag vetté sa muni{h] karmmano ’ntakrid uchyata iti || kim cha || mamma vrittam | asmin loke (col. 2) paratra cha dvayor api lokayor na yasya bandhanam kimchana niralambana aihikamushmikasamsara[raJhito ‘pratishthi- (col. 3) to na kvachit pratibaddho ’¢ sa evambhitah kalamkalibhavat samsaragarbhadiparyatanad vimuchyate | bravimiti pa- (2) rvavat | ukto [Jnugamah | sampratam nayas te cha jiianakriyanayayor avataranti | tatra jilamanayah praha | yatha jflanam evai- (col. 2) hikamushmikarthavaptaye || tad uktam | ndyammi ginhiyavve aginhiyavvammi veva [cheva?] atthammi | jaiyavvam eva ti jo (col. 3) wvaeso so nao nama || yatitavyam iti jfilane yatno vidheyah | iti ya upadegah sa nayo namety arthah | kriyana- (3) yas tv idam aha || kriyaiva phalada pumsam na jilanam phaladam matam | yatah stribhak ya hyabhogajfio na jiianat sukham asnute | tatha (col. 2) sastrany adhityapi bhavanti markha yas tu kriyavan purushah sa vidvan | samchintya ta-[read na-Jmaturam aushadham hi | kim jitanamatre- (col. 3) na karoty arogam || (see Bohilingk, Spriiche, 6449) tatha ndyammityadi || jatayor api grahyagrahyayor arthayos tathapi yatitavyam eveti | kriyaiva- sa kriyanayo nameti | evam pratyekam abhidhaya paramartho [’]yam niripyate | (4) bhyasaniyeti iti yo nayah jiiana- (col. 2) kriyabhyam moksha iti tatha chagamah || sav tam savvanayavisu- (col. 3) ddham jam charanagunatthio sahi|| (i.e, in Sanskrit, sarvesham api nayanam j : isuddham yachcharanagunasthitah sadhuh) charanam im pi nayinam bahuvihavatiavvayani sametta | bahuvidhavartitavyajiani samyagvetta | tat sarvanay: sidhanayalam iti tatparyarthah || acha- kriya guno janam tadvan sadhur moks' (5) ryasilahkavirachit varatikayam dvitiyah sruta[h] skandhah || || _ || 621 || samaptam chacharangam iti | (col. 2) acharatikakarane yad aptam punyam maya moksha-[read ksha-]gamaikahetuh | tenapaniya- subharasim uchchair acharamargapra- (col. 3) vano ["]stu lokah || || || 622 || || granthagram sahasra- dvadaga ankato [’Jpi || || 12000 || || mangalam mahasri || he vaisakhava- (col. 2) di 10 some saigha° Virapalasuta sangha? Ratnapalena svamatuh (6) 7 samvat 1348 var: acharangasitravrittiniryuktipu- (col. 3) stakam lekhitam | mangalam mahasrih || __ || | 72 Sreyortham sri [For the description of this plate the Committee are indebted to Dr. Haas. ] Prats LIX.—Arantc. Brivish Museum. Ormyrat 2165.—[VIlIvn cenv.] i | \HE Koran. On yellum, about 12% in. by 8§; 121 leaves. Imperfect at the beginning and end, extending from stir. vii. 40 to sir the writing (so different from the stiff, artif points, and the total absence of vowels, all warrant us in ascribing this manuscript to the viiith cent. icial Kafi of a later date), the paucity of diacritical The siiras have no titles, but these have been generally supplied in red or, less frequently, black ink by a hand of the ixth cent.; eg., in the plate, 1. 17, (sie) ots E2,! ost ee) ee 5 yyw dauld Sasi hd &\. The plate represents f£ 77a, and contains sir. xxvi. 210—sir. ory J. ii, 4, post Gatherings. Apparently of eight and ten leaves, but without signatures. ftuling. On one side, with a dry point. There are faint side-lines. or in the centre. The letter 8, when initial or medial, has one stroke above; G in the same positions seems (perhaps accidentally) to be unpointed. Final Cs is un- Vriting. A fine, flowing Kufi, evidently written pointed, but readily distinguished from Gi by its form; currente calamo. The diacritical points are in the form for —s does not go below the line, whereas G has a of small slanting lines, as in Plate XIX. isms, omsiell Hal, Re Final J Taslapretezemall curve below the line; e.g., 1. 6, as gos Jp almost oval, the projection to the left being very slight. Punctuation. Small black strokes, usually six in a . Final _p is number, arranged in two rows, at the end of each vers The addition of a red circle and red dots, as in lines 1 and 9, marks larger divisions, for which pur- | Final § seems to be always unpointed. Final (¢ is pose a figure like — is also employed. The retroverted, and often drawn out to a great length.— seventh parts of the Koran have been noted by a later There are no traces of vowel-points, nor of tasdid, gazm, hand in green, ff. 6, 31a, 64a, ete. ete.—Long @ is regularly omitted; eg., alee for eeblutsl, Lb 1s CaS gyi) Cyl, for Forms of Letters, etc. In 5 $ and y the strokes are placed over or under one another; eg., 1. 3, oss 1.10, pil 1 14, eistloll, for coledlo!. The triangular arrangement of § also occurs, e.g., on f. 198. In ks wl yal wb 1,19. A waw is left out in eyslsl, for cog lell 1. 12.—Words are freely divided at the end of a line; og. of deal 1.2; s)\p, 1. 7; they are placed side by side, one oyer each apex \ Vy wh, (see Plate XIX.). Initial ¢ has the stroke either above 2 |\; liii. 71, with a few lacunae. The easy, flowing style of LX. Bein) eden SIE Ou cals llerolel_ GLE, ts eae eu Hohe] pba “8 lindo. ly | Hehe ciga ats ie t a 2: oe — t | llores s)l¢ ap. lls 5dcH, fans A. ERG ac lyn ay ME oF 4, a Gls sso AlNeSi, rcs PSN a BS el E 353) Al Dhseholy ih Nima & ook ARN e 8535, ai 28 QISy Oe ear ac <3 "38 AL-FARABI, DIWANU ‘L-ADAB—A.p, 974? BODL.LIB., HUNT. 228. Prare LX.—AraBn Bopieran Liprary. Hunt. 228.—A.D. 974? VYNAE Diwanu 1 Adab Si Bayani Lugati ‘Arab, a lexicographical and grammatical work by ‘Abi | Ibrahim “Ishak ‘ibn ‘Ibrahim ‘ibn ‘Abi Huraira ‘al-Farabi, the maternal uncle of ’al-Gauhani, who died circa A.H. 350=A.D. 961 (see Hajji Khalifa, ed. Fluegel, t. iii., p. 260, no. 5278). On thin, dark coloured paper; about 8 in. by 53; 289 leaves (one of which, after f. 143, has been accidentally passed over in numbering them), According to the colophon, f. 288 (289)d, the manu- script was finished at Samarkand, in the month of the second Gumada, A.H. 373=A.D. 983, when ‘Aba Salih Mansiir ‘ibn Nah was ruler of Khorasan, and "Abi Yahya ‘Ash‘ath ‘ibn Muhammad his 39 (ste, but retouched) ¢, iy (sic) Cx) (ste) ee 9) Ed anole, Ctrod extmosh| eal ae Xeste «+ We must remark, however, first, that the word wrt» has been altered by the same hand that inserted od ,ou; and, secondly, that Mansiir ‘ibn Nih the Siminide died, according to ‘Ibnu ‘-’Athir, in A.H. 366=A.D. 976-7; whence it appears that the original reading probably was (,~~s, ie., A-H. 363=A.D. 974. The plate represents f. 176 (177) 0. Gatherings. Of 16, 18, and 20 leaves. A later | the ‘alif projects very markedly to the right, ll. 3, 8— hand has numbered the leaves consecutively. The vowel fatha is written between final y and its Writing. An old Nas resembling in some re- | 5 Aa SG : S | tical points in de, 1.12. The tanwin of damma spects the Magribi hand (compare Plate VI.). The diacritical points are occasionally wanting. Punctuation. © at the end of each sentence is ~. For peculiar forms of tasdid see the last three lines (compare Plate VII.); = often stands for <, as in Il. 2, 7,9; in the last line the scribe has placed a or article. Sana: \ second tasdid under the letter to which it belongs, Forms of Letters, ete. > 3 2.0 b = by way of distinction from & 3 4 £. Observe da ay9> the upper one not being sufficiently clear. the shape of » + & in IL 8, 10, 135 of ecm 3, | Gazma is either closed or open, as in the first two 4, 10; of 4s in Il. 2, 4; and the disproportionate size | words of 1, 4; it is placed over the long vowel-letters , 10; of +s 2, 4; 0 . ‘ z of s gin Il. 1-5, 8. For 4 we have xj in 1.12. Final in 1 4, \gsuglld; 1.5, abe il, a 83 ‘he pane. cS and () are clearly distinguished in 1. 4, S248 4 F no: es = , a tuation eo in ]. 4 indicates the pronunciation huble and , ee. Final \ projects occasionally below the tty line; an wh, IL ie S\ eles, 1.12. In lam-alif | instead of hubla. THE KOR'AN.—A~.D. 1254. BRIT. MUS., ORIENT. 1270. Pratt LXI.—Araptc Britisa Museum. Ortenran 1270.—A.D. 1254. a hes Kor'in. On yellum; about 74 in. by 63 ft; 134 leaves. On f. 134a is the following note in gilt Kiifi characters, obviously contemporary with the rest of the manuscript, or very nearly so. X4=le (o) —— (er) \ ‘ i : eh. Mle) cat Woy Creede cmd! ple Sh wo) as se ye) “The fortunate, blessed and auspicious son Muhammad ‘ibn Yahya ‘ibn Tahir ‘ibn Hidr ‘ibn Muham- mad ’al-H, agi (may God prosper and fayour him) was born in the night before Saturday the fifth of Sha‘bin, in the year 652” (A.D. 1254). The plate represents f. 97, containing siir. xxxvi. 66, pees) (de 1 b)—siir. xxxvii. 20. Gatherings. Without sis atures of any kind. fuling. On one side, with a dry point. There are side-lin Writing. Magribt or Western Nashi, fully pointed. Compare Plate XXXVII. Punctuation. 5 and © alternately, at the end of every fifth and tenth ve 38. se. Forms of Letters, ete. Final \ projects below the line; when separate, \ is often slightly curved back- g wards at the lower extremity, as in Nees 1. 18; Dre, kal.sV\, 1 22. Sim is eithe Gi, en ery oie course, one point below, and (4 one point above. Final (S, when pointed, takes the points within the bend, as i 1. 10; but if retroverted, they are below, n 5 wd : . sept . . as in 2, 1.3, In lam-alif the ‘alif is to the right, as in \\, 1. 22.—The vowels, which are red, are sometimes placed between the letters and their diacritical points. Tanwin of damma is ..—Gazma and tasdid are blue, and have their usual shapes, 0 and -. With fatha we find both « and «.—Madda is red. It is often written over final long vowels, when the next word begins with 6 1 5 alif hamzatum, as in Y\ Tos 5 the beginning of a word instead of [ we find \s, the hamza being expressed by a yellow dot, with or without fatha, as in dy)\, 1.7 sila is marked by a green dot and a red stroke, the latter varying in position according to the preceding vowel; if fatha pre- cedes, it is written at the top of the letter ’alif, and is sometimes omitted; if kasra precedes, at the foot; if damma precedes, halfway up the letter. The green dot indicates the elided hamza. In other cases hamza is expressed by a yellow dot, varying in position according to the accompanying vowel.— Alif maksira is denoted by an “alif in red over the final (¢,as in \3 in the case of the next word beginning with ‘alif, by ih ile ore, madda, as in ppc) ee L yg in the wasl this ‘alif is not expressed, as in \\\ dl, 1, 21.—The long vowel \ is very frequently omitted, and supplied in red above the line. Ornamentation. The titles of the siiras are written in Kufi and gilt. That of sutra xxxvii. is merely ik oplds ws), Yale Cie)\. They are marked by marginal ornaments in gold and colours, as are also ‘af @ and their subdivisions. the dgz A Cell ¥ia gt AA. Hida: Fi wis ATCI UY, (VENA: ee eh. in 4: he fet ee ‘ ie a) WAYhs fenyn carn. *, OQY, bf Ad sh ee MAW het Mie ty i 1@o aw Bu; RSRI AN: Pradsianed: mn CHa A ks a Keane: OA TONNE aaye: DNV ¥ fui: nchth: f SAA hna0-¥ P afhchr Le OFF! Ages: ABATAL? HOS: * weeam gh ONC ANIA: 4-8 LF HAN de Cohikas Kor EA Nat ‘A LAS AALS ‘Ycha aL inaese | ON: Ged , Haro par: JUcANChT hag hb va :F CE OAAR NO} “WHAM: ed, Puen: ae hese PisieE Ss Oh Ss PAUL —-Aspalsize: PARIS, BIBL. NAT., FONDS ETHIOP. 45. Pratre LXI.—Erurorre. Paris. BrstiorakquE NATIONALE. Fonps Erurorren 45.—A.D. 1378. ee Epistles of §. Paul. Vellum; quarto, about 9 in. by 63; 162 leaves; two columns. Written, according to a note on f. 162a, at Jerusalem, by the order of Gabra-Kréstis. abbat of the Abyssinian convent in that city, in the year of merey 38 = A.D. 1378. See Zotenberg’s Catalogue des Manuscrits Ethiopiens (Gheez et Amharique) de la Bibliotheque Nationale, p. 42, no. 45. The plate represents f. 74a. Gatherings. Of eight leaves, but unnumbered. Ruling. On one side, with a dry point. Each column has side-lines, reaching from the top to the bottom of the page. Writing. Very similar to that of Pl. X. Red ink js used to mark the numbers of the pericopes, on the margin; the titles of the lessons, generally on the upper margin, but occasionally, as in the plate, on the lower one; the first, third, and fifth lines of each epistle; the figures at the end of each epistle, which indicate the number of versicles; and the names of the persons to whom they were addressed. Punctuation. Two dots after each word; four dots, intersected by a cross formed of five red dots, at the end of a sentence. This sign is usually accompanied on the margin by a slanting arrangement of points meee in black and red, thus: 0*°° The lessons are ordinarily marked on the margins by various signs in red, in many of which the crux ansata forms a part; e.g. Z is =) ete. Forms of Letters, ete. In fl, f, and similarly shaped letters, made up of two or three vertical strokes, the right limb is often slightly longer than the left. The curve mentioned in Pl. X. is especially apparent in He The letters ® 0 P £8 G # Tf 1 and G have markedly triangular forms. © is almost rectangular (compare Pl. X., col. 1,1. 3). Pé is R; lo has no connecting line (col. 1, Il. 2, 4); wd has the vowel-stroke to the left of the central line (as in Pl. X., col. 1, Il. 8, 14). Ornamentation. Ornaments similar to that in the plate oceur also on ff. 180 and 830; those on ff. la, 53a, and 117a, are of larger size, covering the whole breadth of the page, with two or three vertical bands reaching to the middle. They are coloured red, green, yellow, black and white. [In describing this plate the Committee have to acknowledge the valuable assistance of Dr. H. Zotenberg, of the Bibliothéque Nationale. } STELE OF SAKKARA.—482 B.c. BERLIN, KONIGL. MUS., AGYPT. ABTH. N° 7707. Prare LXIUL—Eeyrrian Aramato, Bertin, I Nici. Musrum, Aneyrriscur AsrHeitune, Stern No. 7707.—482 B.C. \ MONUMENT carved in limestone, discovered in 1877 i in a grave in the necropolis at Sakkara, W. of Memphis in Lower Egypt. , and now deposited in the Royal Museum at Berlin. Its height is exactly an ancient Egyptian cubit or 20-6 inches, its breadth 13} inches. It is bilingual, Egyptian and Aramaic; the characters used are consequently twofold, hieroglyphic and Semitic. See Lepsius, Eine Aegyptisch-Aramiische Stele, in the Zeitschrift fiir Aegyptische Sprache und Alterthums- kunde, Bd xv, pp. 127-132; and Lauth, Aegyptisch-aramaische Inschriften, in the Sitzungsberichte d. k. bayerischen Akademie d. Wissenschaften, 1878, 1 Philos.-philol.-hist. Cl, Bd Il, i. pp. 97-115 and 148. The plate is a reduced copy, taken from a photograph sent to Professor Wright by Professor Dr. Lepsius, the Director of the Royal Library at Berlin. The execution of this glyphie inscriptions are ve ele is rude, and the hiero- The second compartment shows the bodies of the y incorrectly engraved. It deceased lying on their r has four compartments, the first of which, overshadowed man to the right, the woman to the left. The single by the winged disk of the sun, represents Osiris, the vase under each bier is peculiar, The figure of the ruler of the lower world, seated in the centre. Behind jackal-headed Antbis, the burier of the dead, stands him stand Isis and Nephthys; before him a man and beside each, The man between the two biers is probably woman, with hands uplifted in prayer. The way in meant for a priest, though he wears his hair in the which the hair is worn shows that these figures are intended for Asiatics and not Egyptians. The principal ‘pective lion-shaped biers, the Asiatic fashion instead of the Egyptian. On each side are mourners, before one of whom, on the right, we inscription, in front of Osiris, reads, according to Pro- discern the Semitic letters xin. fessor Lepsius: ‘ Royal offering (?) to Osiris in the The third compartment represents the family of lower world, to the great god, the lord of Abydos, who mourners. In front of the figure on the extreme right grants a good burial.” The name of the man is written is the Semitic letter ». behind him, and continued in the line before the figure The fourth compartment contains the Aramaic in- of Isis: “a foreigner (?), whose surname is Her-tep (or scription, the oldest of its class as yet discovered, dated Her-ka), devoted to the great god.” His Semitic name in the fourth year of the reign of Xerxes, in the month is not given. The name of the woman is placed on which corresponds, according to Professor the extreme left, before the figure of Nephthys: “the spsius’s calculation, to May-June of the Julian year mistress of the house, Achetbu.” 482 B.C. It runs:— mAns9p manon all bs my 093 2anns) WT I TAN PC) yAOnN THN TaN 72 copay xmbs “px ow @) teada a] sob wasswn a am JW) Hawa TWN j2 @) i joan m2 (4) (1) Blessed be ‘Aba, the son of Hor (or Har), and ’Ahathabi, the daughter of ‘Ariya (or Adiya). A vessel of 200 hstmh (?), I have offered it (?) (2) before ’Osixi the god, (I) ‘Abséli, the son of ’Aba, whose mother was ‘Ahathaba. (3) So spake he, in the year 4, in the month Méhir, of Héiarg, the king [of kings, ] (4) on the day (?) of . . . . 3(?) The name of the deceased father is ‘Aba or ‘Abba, doubt (compare the figures in the Phoenician inscription whose Egyptian surname was Her-tep (or Her-ka); that of Umm ’el-‘A-wamid, I, 1. 5). The word monon, 1. 1, of the deceased mother, ‘Ahathdbu, written in hiero- of which the 2nd and 5th letters are uncertain, is pro- glyphs Achetbu. This name, as Professor Noeldeke bably Egyptian, and designates a measure of some kind, remarks, is contracted from MaN noN. Similar Se though it appears to be as yet unknown to Egyptologists names are the Hebrew INnx, and the Aramaic \27n8 (compare in the Sardinian trilinguis, Spw nwna nar (Baba Bathra, 9), aD, ae Acta Mart., t. i, p. 224), for px 2709, “an altar of brass weighing a hundred 96105)3 lle ots)3 crass) or ordain, Achudemes ; and mane, for max MX, on an ancient gem (De Vogiié, 5 9 rs vor e bible lear, Mélanges d’Archéol, Orient., pl. v, no. 9, and p. 112)— letters of the word mnaqp (end of 1. 1) are not clear, but we can scarcely hesitate as to the correctness of the reading.—The most important part of the inscription is 1. 3, where we have a distinct date in the reign of pounds,” where DM? = libra = Sy). The last two The name of the paternal grandfather is probably the biblical 71; that of the maternal grandfather may be read jeltber Pua sy Da Ae SE eae Xerxes, whose name is written wonwn, Khshiarsh or cena te Sa ae a oe ie ee Khshiyarsh, corresponding exactly with the old Persian RnR olf Ua clseetitl yeexoae 1 ea Us % Te form Khshyarsha. The Hebrew wowne is much less ee i like the o Masoretic punctuation winx, Alashvérdsh (Ahasuerus). —7mn, 1. 3, is the name of one of the Egyptian months, in Coptic 2xepcip—tThe reading and meaning of |. 4 are alike uncertain—With regard to the shape of the letters, we may remark that X * and J in particular name the pronunciation is also doubtful. sisters, probably the eldest, was called N22n (in the second compartment), apparently the Aramaic form of the Egyptian name Hekna or Heken-t. The name of another member of the family seems to have commenced with the letter 1M, which stands beside the right-hand figure ad the Hi A comprar Shoe bon 2 ose retain very ancient forms, whereas in 1 7 and 4 the (72, 1. 1, for %29, or perhaps= “uo, Hea) pobtascoreain upper part is already open; indeed 5 and 5 can no longer capacity. Of the correctness of the reading 200, ex- be distinguished from each other. pressed in arithmetical figures, there can be little or no nal, and is completely disguised by the [For this description the Committee are chiefly indebted to Dr. Euting, of Strassburg, the first decipherer of the inscription. ] EGYPTIAN-ARAMAIC STELE.—1l??Cenr. B.C. CARPENTRAS, BIBL. ET MUS. D’ INGUIMBERT. Pirate LXIY. TGYPTIAN ARAMAIC, ARP a 8 et II rae 2 , CARPE 8, Brstiornique er Musée v'INcuimpert.—IVrn or IInp cenr. 3.0. \ MONUMENT carved in limestone, the early history of which is unknown. At the beginning of last century it was in the possession of M. Rigord, “commissaire de la marine” at Marseilles, who left it by will to M. de Mazauc 5) es, “président au parlement d’Aix,” from whose heirs it was purchased by M. dInguimbert, bishop of Carpentras (dép. Vaucluse) in France; and it is now deposited in the Bibliothéque et Musée are about 19} inches in height, by 13} in breadth This stele, the upper part of which is unfortunately broken away, has three compartments, surrounded ihe a narrow border. The uppermost, about 104 in, in height, represents the deceased as a young woman, standing with uplifted hands before Osiris, behind whom is the figure of Isis. In front of the god is a table or altar with various offerings. ‘The second compartment, about 34in. in height, shows the embalmed body of the deceased on the lion-shaped bier, attended by the jackal-headed Anubis at the feet and by the hawk- headed Horus at the head, with the four customary funereal vases (the Horus-children) beneath, here erro- neously represented as all having -hawks’ heads for cover . As mourners we should expect to find Neph- thys kneeling at the head of the bier and Isis at the foot. Here however the order appears to be reversed ; at least the figure at the foot has on its head the symbol of Nephthys. The four frames, one on each side of the kneeling figures,—better seen in Gesenius’ plate (Serip- turae Linguaeque Phoeniciae Monumenta, tab. 29) than in the photograph,—were probably meant to receive hieroglyphic inscriptions, which however remained un- d "Inguimbert in that town. Its actual dimensions engraved. The lowest compartment, likewise about 34 in. in height, contains an Aramaic inscription in four lines, the last of which is mutilated by a fracture of the stone. The first three lines are about 94 in. long, the fourth about 7 in. The height of the letters is $ of an inch or a little more. The principal treatises on this inscription are: Lanci, Osservazioni sul bassorilievo fenico-egizio che si conserva in Carpentrasso, Rome, 1825; Beer, Inscriptiones et Papyri veteres Semitici quotquot in Egypto reperti sunt, partic. prima, Leipzig, 1833; Gesenius, Seripturae Linguaeque Phoeniciae Monumenta quotquot supersunt, p. 226; Deren- bourg in the Journal Asiatique, 6° série, t. xi (1868), p. 277; Schlottmann in the Zeitschrift d. D. M. G., Bd xxxii, p. 188, Bd xxxiii, p. 252; P. de Lagarde in the Nachrichten von d. K. Gesellschaft d. Wissenschaften zu Gottingen, 1878 (19 Juni, No. 10), p. 357; and Ch. Clermont-Ganneau, Origine Perse des Monuments Ara- méens @ Egypte, in the Rewwe Archéologique, 1878-79, t. xxxvi, p. 93 sqq., t. xxxvii, p. 21 sqq., especially p. 31. An article by Lund in the Nordisk Tidskrift for Filologi, 1880, vol. iv, p. 213, we have not been able to see. The plate is reproduced from two photographs, taken from different points of view, which were sent by Dr. Euting of Strassburg to Professor Wright. The inscription runs as follows :— smbx Ny NTN mon mops Nd wis ost5) ‘mp y72 “IDN DIP yD mon pa) That the style of the inscription is solemn and un- usual strikes the reader at once. Derenbourg was the first to perceive that it consists of four verses falling naturally into two hemistichs; but it is by no means certain that he and Schlottmann are right in assuming the existence of a distinct metre. Probably the writer thought it sufficient to have four or five words in each clause, yielding, if not exactly, at any rate nearly, the same number of syllables; which is just what we see in many of the poetical pieces of the Old Testament. Of this, however, we cannot be sure, because we do not know the exact pronunciation of the vowels in this dialect, particularly of the short vowels in open syllables. If we assume that the pronunciation much resembled that of the Aramaic passages of the Old Testament, in Ezra and Daniel, and that the method of counting the syllables and the poetic licences were nearly the same as in Syriac, we can readily obtain in the first three lines first halves of seven syllables and second halves of eight :— (1) Brrikha Taba Vrath T’hapi, ?monha zi’ Osire “elaha. (2) Minda‘am Wish la “ebhdath, w'kharsé *ish la *emrath tamma. (3) K’dham ’ Osire Vrikha Wii, min Kdham ’Osirt main kahi— Benedicta Taba filia Tahapi, cultrix Os sean na Nan m2 (4) maay xo wsa ot (2) 0 32 MDS DIP @) snyoa mba 7 (4) dei. ) Quidquam mali non fecit, et calumnias hominis non locuta est illic (?). 3) Coram Osiri benedicta esto; ab Osiri aquam accipe. 4) Esto ministra, dilecta mea, et inter pios. . - . . - but of the fourth line we cannot even thus make any- thing, the first half being barely intelligible, and the second half mutilated. Of rime, which has been found here by both Derenbourg and Schlottmann, we cannot discover a trace. Line 1. Tu-ba is an Egyptian name, which occurs, for example, on a stele and a sarcophagus at Florence. It seems to mean “She of the Spirit.” See Lenormant in the Journ. Asiat., 6° série, t. x, 1877, p. 513.—Ta-hapi, “She of Apis,” is also a common name of women in an- cient Egypt. See Lenormant, loc. cit. That the mother’s name should be mentioned instead of the father’s is not unusual on Egyptian monuments.—Monh is an Egyptian word, meaning “ perfect, pious”; the prefix ¢a (’) is the feminine article; on another stele (Lenormant, loc. cit., p. 512) a man is called NTN “DW YAN. It has of course nothing to do either with the Semitic radical nm, or the Greek word povayds.— On % compare IDE MO:QVly le Ie Line 2. wytm (first explained by Noeldeke, Ueber d. Mundart d. Mandiier, 1862, p. 22, note 2) is the oldest extant form of this word, which appears in Mandaitic as ONIND, in the Targims as DOyy, in Syriac as $0;%, in the Babylonian Talmud as "9 (72.—wNa is the older form of the Syriac 9. .—That the correct reading is sgn) admits of no doubt, but the word is difficult to explain. Its identity with ‘s9p seems certain, for the @ Mandaitic form of the radical y>p is y72, and besides, Syr. Was=Heb. nwp, Mand. xowa=Syr. head = Heb. ow, ete. In jac a2 Ye) 3] sig but “he ate pieces of the flesh of N.,” ie., “he slan- dered him” (Barhebraeus on Matth. iv. 1; compare the Kor’an, sir. xlix. 12), If 1gs© by itself meant “ slan- ifies nothing der for “to eat” or “swallow something painful” is alw: in relation to the sufferer. used in the Semitic languag On the other hand, if Vero nified only “pieces (of flesh),” such a phrase as ‘372 7X would be impossible. But as the root Coy$ means “ to nip” or “pinch,” ‘ “i pinch off,” and also “to revile” (whence eon 5 natured, biting remarks”), we may very well derive from it a word 1:2 in the sense of “a piece, a morsel,” and another N34 (8x72) with the meaning of ‘‘a slander, a calumny,” whence wx ‘879 7x, “to slander Sor “calumniate any one.’—ion cannot mean “ pia,” be- cause adjectives of this form are very rarely derived from verba med. gemin. (the Aramaic form is Saad), and because, as the subject of Nx, we should expect the emphatic nnon. If man=Syr. tol = Heb, DY, as in Ezra, v. 17, vi. 1, 6, 12, it must mean “ there, yonder,” the speaker being conceived as in the world beyond the tring to this earthly life as grave, and therefore “yonder.” This seems, however, rather forced, and it e! is perhaps better to adopt De Lagarde’s suggestion that Tman=Syr. sodAto (rad. sakoZ), “ ever.” Line 3. The reading of the last two letters of ‘mp (from np) is perhaps not quite certain, but nothing better has been suggested. The phrase np yy) has been sufficiently illustrated by Beer from Greek inscriptions, in which occurs the prayer that Osiris would give the deceased cold water; and the representation of the be- stowal of the water of life upon the dead is common on Egyptian monuments. Line 4 is barely intelligible. The difficulty lies mainly in the word ‘nyn3, for there is no radical y3 in Hebrew or Aramaic, and the Arabic 4243, “point, sum- mit,” leads to nothing. Hence it has been supposed r of the engr an er that *nyna stands for—or i aver for—‘nny3, of which two explanations are possible. 1) ‘Moy may be identical with i435, VAsesi, NNW, “song, melody”; in which case mn) would be used as in Td we, “to trade,” i wXa, pots,” and the phrase would mean “do thou be singing ‘to make my songs” regularly and habitually. This assumes of course that a divinity is the speaker. 2) Or snay2 may be taken from DY, i425, “beauty, delight”; in which case again a double translation is possible, viz., a) “be thou doing my delight,” ie., works that are pleasing to me; or 8) “be thou serving (me), my delight (or darling, deliciae meae).” Xo, “ the servant,” is in Syriac “the soldier” in particular (Sa, \G, agricola, Another possibility is is wholly out of place here). ine. fem. Perf., ‘thou art that it may be the 2nd pers. ng” (cf. 2 Sam, i. 26; Song of Songs, well ple vii, 7). Adopting verse might be read h’wat pal’ha ni “im’'thi, or tmathi, though we have then only five or six syllables instead the supposition under 2b, the half- of the seven required by the metrical hypothesis. 707 is the emphatic plural of [ican, which has of course nought to do with the Greek dovos.—At the end of this line nothing can be made out in the photographs. Lanci thought that he could descry on the stone traces of the letters obw nb, which Gesenius emended into pbw “nn. Derenbourg would read mow 1m, Schlott- mann mw on, either of which would give a good sense, “sis (eris) beata.” The language of the inscription appears then to be the same as that of the other Aramaic remains dis- covered in Egypt (see, for example, Pl. XXV. and XXVL), closely akin to the biblical Aramaic and to the language of the Aramaic monuments written to The mixture of Hebrew or Phoenician words shows f in wx (see Pl. XXY., 1 2) and np. The use of final 7 for 8 is not a Hebraism; 8 is used only in the Egyptian words xan and NmyDn, in NTN (to prevent the conjunction of two 7), and in xd (where there is probably an etymological the west of the Euphrat reason). The character of the writing is, in Dr. Euting’s opinion, decidedly later than that of Pl. LXII. Compare in particular the forms of 8’ and J. Between 7 and 9 there is no difference whatever, though each appears in more than one shape. The words are divided by small spaces. ened to the Ptole- maic period, and such is the opinion of Professor Dr. The stele has generally been a Lepsius, who, in a letter to Professor Wright, speaks of the figure of the deceased as being clad “in einem shen Zeit vorkom- men diirfte.’ On the other hand, M. Clermont-Ganneau has made it extremely probable that many, at least, Gewande, das nicht vor der ptolemi of these Egyptian-Aramaic remains belong to the Per- sian periods, that is to say, from B.O. 527 to 405, and ain from B.C. 340 to 332. On either supposition it remains a riddle, why the Aramaic langua re should have been used on a purely Egyptian monument, in an inscription containing religious ideas peculiarly Egyp- tian, and set up to commemorate an Egyptian woman, whose mother was likewise an Egyptian. If we agree with M. Clermont-Ganneau, we may conjecture that Ta-ba was the daughter of a Persi: an official, an Ara- maean by birth, who had married an Egyptian lady. This might explain, on the one hand, wl the father is not named, and on the other, why Aramaic is employed, as being the language most used in the family of the deceased. It may indeed have been legally incumbent on the father to employ it in this way, for we know now that Aramaic was the of ; al language even in Egypt during the Persian domination. [For this description the Committee are mainly indebted to Professor Noeldeke of Strassburg. They have also to acknowledge the assistance of Professor Lepsius of Berlin and of M. Barr Director of the Library and Museum at Carpentras.] the INSCRIPTION FROM THE HAURAN.— Late IST CENT. B.C. COLLECTION OF G.E.TOMBE, ESQ. Pirate LXV.—Aramaic or tHe Hauran. Cottxcrion or G. E. Tompr, Esa—Brtween 20 B.C. anv THE CunrstiAN Era. | ene on on the pedestal of a statue, erected in honour of Malikhath, the son of Mo‘aiyiri, petty king or chief of the Auranitis or Haurin, shortly before the commencement of the ou F P : 5 Christian era. The stone is basalt. Its dimensions are as follows. Height, 10% inches; length of flat top, 1 foot 63 in.; length of upper part, measured between the first two lines of writing, 1 ft. 10} in.; breadth of the two lines, 5 in.; length of the lower part, 2 ft. 1 in.; breadth of the two lines, 33 in. The letters are from 1 to 1 inches in height, and are all very regular and clear. The words are separated by small spaces. cation of the Palmyrene. The character is that ordinarily used in the Hauran, which is a modif See De Vogiié, Mélanges d'Archéologie Orientale, p. 149, with the table at p. 145; De Vogiié, Syrie Centrale, Inscriptions Sémitiques, pp. 89 seqq-, especially pp. 92-96; Lenormant, Essai sur la Propagation de V Alphabet Phénicien, t. ii., livr. 1, pp. 98 seqq., and pl. xiv. The plate is a reduced copy from a photograph sent to Professor Wright by the present owner, Gordon E. Tombe, Esq., of Bromley, Greystones, Co. Wicklow, Ireland, who has since had the kindness to place the slab itself in Professor Wright's hands. “At Siah, about half an hour from Kanawat,” says Professor Socin in Baedeker’s Palestine and Syria (Eng- lish edit., p. 418), “stands one of the most interesting temples in the Haurdn, resembling in style the Herodian Temple at Jerusalem, and indeed recording in its inscrip- tions the names of Herod and Herod Agrippa. The gazelles, lion’s head, saddled horse, and other architec- tural enrichments, and the rather stiff capitals, are well worthy of inspection. The altar at the foot of the temple stair is still in its original position. The temple was dedicated to Baal Samin (god of heaven),” In the map, at p. 400, the plate is called Sihat. De Vosiié, op. cit., p. 92, also writes Siah; so that the name, ac- cording to these travellers, is , Stak. But Wad- dington, Inscriptions Grecques et Latines, p. 540, spells it Ee Sta. Greek inscriptions, no. 2367, is Seemvav 73 Kowdy, which might represent either .. or toma S The Auranitis was sold, as Josephus informs us (Antig. Jud., xv. 10, 2), by the tetrarch Zenodorus to The native orthography, in Waddington’s nunay dx px the Arabs for the sum of fifty talents. This must have taken place before the year 23 B.C., for in that year Augustus deposed Zenodorus and gave all his pos- sessions to Herod the Great. See De Vogiié, op. cit., p. 95. One of the purchasers of the Auranitis was doubtless the Malikhath bar ’Ausi bar Mo‘ai: built the temple at Siah (De Vogiié, p. 93). Somewhat later, during his reign or that of his immediate successor, one ‘Obaisath bar Sa'di set up, at his own expense, a statue in honour of Herod the Great, with the inscrip- | tion (De Vogiié, p. 95): [Ba]lowhet “HpdSer ’OBaicaros ZadSov Inka Tov dydpidvra rats euais Samdvais|. This must have been between the years 23 B.C. and 4 B.C., last Herod died; probably about 20 B.C. A second Malikhath, apparently the grandson of the former, added to the elevation of the temple, and in honour of him a statue was erected by the clan of ‘Obaisath, on the pedestal of which our inscription was engraved, with a Greek pendant (Waddington, no. 2366), which appears to be still in situ. a transcription into Hebrew letters. in which We give sy sobs mt nabs 33 yn 2 navbad (2) xmby xn man 1 bapb ©) nbw sox nuvay 72 4D (1) (2) (3) (4) Kaddii, the son of ‘Obaisath, (was) the artist. This is the statue which the clan of ‘Obaisath set up to Malikhath, the son of Mo'aiyiri, the son of Malikhath, because that he built the upper (story of the) temple. Peace! ‘O Shyos 6 Trav OBaonvar érelynoer (sic) Maretyadov Mouepov smeporxoSoproavre (sic) rd tepbv dperfs te kat evoeBelas xdpw. The words of the inscription, with the exception of the proper names, are perfectly familiar to every one who can read Syriac. We need therefore only indicate the punctuation of Nmy and Nyax, and add that the word 5x, in 1. 1, is the Arabic Wy ad, “ family, kinsfolk, tribe.’"—The pronunciation of nw»ay as ‘Obaisath, Kae, is rendered certain by the Greek equivalents OBaicaros and rév ’OBaonvdv, and by the Arabic names (© and its diminutive (; .—The name of the petty king n3 is given us in the Greek as Mahetyallos, ie., Malikhath, iy, for « in these Hauranitic inscriptions is always z, never ei (e.g, éreunoer)—The father of this Mali- khath II. was called yp, in Greek Moatepos, which one would naturally transcribe in Arabic The vowel- n- termination « is very ancient in this region; in Nehe- miah, ch. vi. 6, we have 2W2, who is called in y. 1 of the same chapter ‘297 or “the Arabian.’—The name which we have transcribed Kaddi, following De Vogiié, | is quite uncertain; it may as well be read Karra, 179. The Arabic 3, Khair or Kher, it can hardly be, as that would probably have been spelled >. This Kadda appears to have been the son of the ‘Oba the Great ath who erected the statue to Herod some years previously. [For assistance in the description of this Plate the Committee are indebted to Professor Noeldeke. ] & i ede’ hare she Nasi VES ISN eaten RAN acs ela. ni wsahhisa- 283 03 as eX asina sass ta WEN: he Nang wate pe ret a co SAeiye- qa la sersias Sie. send SuSaBe ee ‘oak Ca kisre eda BI a aes ala ot HPA COSA, CORALS «GaN ‘ane asa ne ni Lod cine Sy. eel FSUSY cAAS eae Ste Sasnad Adee hig aad lacie canes <1 “esauee SA ws euichs 8 ELIS 5 LOkaw Ady Shichi aa: seat AN an Maree’ vadewain | wt tie ca mad ~ Ann Rey ed wiliva Sue Suenss tag, Ricds gash wean ydanw © - ayes eye qe Sgyon oertadsa Mary A gettaAcps atten “ye-Soee a ee ye (oS ore 6 lame anni AAs dass agoh au PRAYERS, ETC.—A.D. 1529-30. BODL.LIB., MARSH. 691. 3 jf Be egret Pirate LXVI.—Manparric. Bopreran Liprary. Marsu. 691.—A.D. 1529-30. A VOLUME containing various prayers (xy2nNw7 NoNNI), the order of marriage, and the order of setting up the priestly cross (xwayqt) on the bank of the Jordan (ic, of the river in which believers are baptised), according to the ritual of the Mandaites (see Plate LIIL.). On paper, about 4§ in. by 3§; 115 leaves. Written at Howaiza, xm, Vogel) or Syed! (in Khiizistan, to the left of the Tigris, northwards from ’al-Basra), AH. 936=A.D. 1529-30 (see f, 114a). This is the oldest dated Mandaitic manuscript in Europe, up to the present time. The plate represents ff 590 and 60a, according to the present numeration (for the manuscript is sadly misbound). Paper. Of European, perhaps German, manufac- scribed in Plate LIII., but more boldly and elegantly ture; the watermark is an imperial crown. written. Writing. The peculiar Mandaitic character, as de- Mii mys ern gy yn “5 i] Pisbiee ahh Syst wp Yn jorgn Wh doors. mov sh 7 Mah (rAd Soyoh fw stor tot n>4y yor pry yh ss Depo ion ct Ro Mi ual ih ‘e HI Syne toen pw aimee (a yooh «Bi Sap9 299 Hl mara e boshovimerwrorpovayny loys yy i] ‘ Mi “Teale Pose en beers son pbs yon ye | ishpoo yen ony rn O14 Hi a i yw i minature yhy Wl EA ek asin il ale itch rd yw ; | WEY) 229372 ‘enn eer ; 1 bee hon adiawann ene Fane coy en Saye hyo HH aKY pean wy es YD! } 9 jon v; Le Hil pain vyiosp % bel H! 199 My Hvboreaor paobotel yho Cie bane rhsp saprayee indy wi ted phy Peston minci me 2 pow poo vpn bye yo yee | pots yon owe Sarat) a | < papRea) ya /2¥9 99 YO a aby ys | I) 2 Hem en pe wl | Svea 1 apevipchortemioes He ill SoS x Fey 2 oops mb he | ii Be a) my ned is) pacer: wy Wait VE DAANAAAYDY / PNP YS, Pr Sra poy soy RB yoyo he ZURICH SEMAK.— A.D. 1401, CAMBRIDGE, UNIV. LIB., ADD. MS. 560. Prare LXVIII.—Hesrew. CampBriper. University Linrary. ApprrionAL MS. 560.—A.D. 1401. 4| YHE Sémak, p0,—i.c., Stpher ham-Misvith hak-Katon or hak-Kasér, “the Little” or “Short Book of the Precepts,” otherwise called “Ammidé Gélah, “the Pillars of the Exile,’"—composed by R. Isaac ben Joseph, of Corbeil in France, in the xilith cent. It was rearranged and enlarged, in the xivth cent., by R. Moses of Ziirich and Str whence this edition of it is called “the Ziirich Sémak,” burg, sn phon. Vellum, about 103 in. by 83; 25 54 leaves, many of which are’ much mutilated. Written, probably in Italy, by a French scribe, Eliab ben R. Joseph, and dated 10th of Elal, AM. 5161= 19th of August, A.D. 1401. The plate represents f 248), containing part of the negative precepts and part of the colophon. The Ziirich Stmak is a comparatively rare work, only eight copies of it, we believe, being as yet known in Europe. The British Museum possesses a fine one (Add. 18,684), dated A.D. 1392, which has been described by Zunz in his Ritus des synagogalen Gottesdienstes ge- schichtlich entwickelt, pp. 211-221, and in Steinschneider’s Hebraeische Bibliographie, vol. i., pp. 83-86, 102-104. Gatherings. Mostly of four sheets or eight leaves. Ruling. On one side, with a dry point. The text is bounded by side-lines Writing. The writing is French Ashkénazi, in rab- binie characters, except the first words of the Simanim or paragraphs, which are in square characters. To fill up the vacant space at the end of a line the scribe uses part of an x, being one of the letters of his name. Ornamentation. The initial words of the Stmanim or paragraphs are usually ornamented with painted designs, representing animals, trees, flowers, etc. We append a transcript of the entire colophon, of which the plate exhibits only the first four lines, with a few remarks. pr oxd ababn pinnn pin @) (cancelled) Y by> wh) ym Nd (2) jor obs mis mw ay (3) pp 3 abs somos imp SDM mony) cnans Ww ( [onsb] 4b xpp naw dbwa mowya wm 1 tabby ya abd jp ( ys a maddy yoy yn 12 (sie) prod 29 sym) DAD (9) psa yo mm obyn b> pp (19) bp yON YON (11) The phrase in Il. 1-3 is well known since the latter part of the xiiith cent, (Zunz, Gesch. u. Lit., p. 207). The word -yan (ass) is, however, in this instance, trans- posed, m9, 1. 3. The origin of the phrase is, no doubt, to be found in Sapher ha-Chasidim, § 191.—The scribe Eliab ben R. Joseph, , though French by descent and training, probably lived in Italy, where the traces of three French congregations exist even at the pre- pin (12) | sent day, namely, in Asti, Fossano, and Moncalvo. | Hence he writes > in 1. 5, according to the Italian spelling of his time—The abbreviation »w, 1.5, is new to us. It is taken from Isaiah, ch. xxxv. 10, being the initial letters of the words %¥ nz w) Tey. As it stands after the father’s name, R. Joseph must have | been still alive in A.D. 1401. [For the description of this plate the Committee are indebted to Dr. Schiller-Szinessy.] \| I! \} AEE: PALMOGRAPHICAL SOCTETY. COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT. E. A. BOND, Esq, LL.D, F.S.A., PRINCIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH Museum, President. W. DE G. BIRCH, Esq, BritIsH Museum. J. W. BONE, Esq, B.A., F.S.A. Rev. H. O. COXE, M.A,, BopLEy’s LIBRARIAN, OXFORD. Mons. L. DELISLE, Director oF THE NATIONAL Liprary, PARIS, MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTE. THE RIGHT REVEREND THE BISHOP oF DURHAM, D.D. J. WINTER JONES, Esq, F.S.A., LATE PRINCIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH MusEuM, WILLIAM MASKELL, Esq, M.A. F.S.A, PROFESSOR J, RUSKIN, D.C.L., Oxrorp, E. M. THOMPSON, Esq., F.S.A, KEEPER OF THE MSS., BRITISH Museum, Hon. Sec: G. F. WARNER, Esq, M.A., BRITISH Museum, Hon. Treas. ProFEessoR Dr. W. WATTENBACH, BERLIN. PROFESSOR J, O. WESTWOOD, Oxrorp. W. ALDIS WRIGHT, Esq, LL.D, TRIN. Co, CAMBRIDGE. PROFESSOR W. WRIGHT, LL.D., QuEENs’ CoLL., CAMBRIDGE. FACSIMILES OF ANCIENT MANUSCRIPTS. ORIENTAL SERIES. JE Near Alle EDITED BY WILLIAM WRIGHT, LL.D, PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE. CONTENTS. 69. Buddhivilasini. Sanskrit. A.D. 1658. 70. Rigveda. Sanskrit. [XVIth Cent. ?] 71. Gami'u ‘t-Tawarih. Arabic. A.D. 1314-15. 72. ’Al-Mukaffa. Arabic. A.D. 1420-41. 73. The Koran. Arabic and Persian. [XIIth Cent.] 74. Phoenician Inscription. B.C. 254. 75. Inscription, Greek and Palmyrene Aramaic. A.D. 134. 76. Annals of Elias Bar-Sinaeus. Syriac and Arabic. A.D. 1019? 77. The Former and Latter Prophets. Hebrew. A.D. 1105-6. 78. Sélich6th. Hebrew. A.D. 1179. 79. Cabbalistic Works. Hebrew. A.D. 1515. 80. The Gospel of S. Luke. Coptic. [Date uncertain.] PHOTOGRAPHED AND PRINTED IN FACSIMILE BY THE AUTOTYPE COMPANY. London: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, Limiren, STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS, 1881. [AW Rights reserved. | 4 ea a Be andid mast pemtrmode eA IIET aat 8 crete és emer sgomitaat ns BRMAAIMALH ER +i Ajgy yore Santana a 50 cies FONE. 2 i 2 AeaBGrad: PATA NaH ANTIBES AE BS Bina RTA eaBaAAe = A Parga Fans navar ss ISAT 2AM Ne MOOLAN? Al REMIT Vi A SAPATS | dogs RRBCAT 1 Ag MAAT 2! PABVAN 2 Haw eMAALAHIT eg Sune anreae fe LAAMAVAABS a, ABT TS SB YE PRIMES HE TATA ATS 5 3 . ai Seromne aes ee 1d AINEATING TANS LOAM HZ SABA ke eae: dutch cae egcle as RRA FET ABE Sw ee ae ip Saat n : : : ae ly: 3 oe? EEE ooh ge BAA ata GANESA DAIVAJNA, BUDDHIVILASINI—a_.1658. INDIA OFFICE LIB., SANSKRIT 1Ol2. Prare LXIX.—£ Iypia Orrice Liprary. Sanskrir 1012.—A.D, 1658. COMMENTARY on Bhaskara’s Lilavati, entitled Buddhivilasini, composed by Ganesa Daivajfia Saka 1467=A.D. 1545. Written by Gangirama Sarman in Saka 1580=A.D. 1658, i. e., 113 years after the date of composi- tion (though the scribe seems, by some not very intelligible mode of calculation, to make the differ- in On paper; about 11} in. by 43; usually ten lines on a page. ence amount to 117 years). It has been selected as the oldest among nearly two hundred Bengali MSS. of the Colebrooke collection which have been examined, the next three in point of age being dated respectively A.D. 1675, A.D. 1720, and A.D. 1730. Colebrooke relied on this more than on any other commentary in his Algebra of the Hindus (1817). The plate represents f. 1040. Paper. The paper on which this MS. is written is as dg, ng, and ji, resemble each other very much, but made of some different material from the modern Indian may be distinguished by a close comparison. The letters straw paper; neither it impregnated with yellow rand v are, as a rule, not differentiated, as in later Ben- arsenic and other chemicals to protect it from insects. gali (on the margin, for instance, in the lower right-hand Writing. The character of the writing generally much | corner) by a little line being drawn through the r, This resembles that of a MS. of the Manavadharma tra, dated distinction, however, does sometimes occur in the text; Saka 1453= A.D, 1531, of which a specimen is given by | for example, in the words saranam and varah in 1.6, The Rajendra Lala Mitra in his Notices of Sanskrit MSS., top bow of 7, when connected with a consonant, some- vol. iii., p. 117. It does not present the long flourishes times runs so completely into the top line of the conso- which are so characteristic of modern Bengali MSS., and | nant, that nothing is left but the vertical down stroke keeps the different letters and ligatures more distinct before the consonant. The shape of j is somewhat from each other. Even the distinction between n and J peculiar, and so is that of &, of which two forms, the is kept up, which is unknown to the modern MSS, The older and the more recent, continually occur on the same difference between the dental and lingual n is not so page. We may add that the circle attached to the word marked as in later times, but may be noticed in the anka, 1. 8, is not anusvara, but belongs to the guttural 7, presence or absence of the top line. Such combinations which it is intended to express. (1) -khilam pasyanti santah samam | srimat sajjanadhamavrindaruchire ksharambudheh praktate nandigrama savo[’] sya- ihavasana[ read -sad |dvijavarah s (2) tmajah | tata-[read tata-|padabjayugaptasastravibhavah srimad-ganesah kritavan llavativyakritim || iti nanayuktimatim imam tri [dele] ihanasake[’] drirasendratulye 1467 | visvavasau saradi masi madhau sitaje [read sitapakshe ?] lilavati- sri-samana-[read -nta-]gamacharyyavary ya-sri-kesava-daivajiasuta- (5) tika buddhivilasim samapta || * || om namah paradeva[add tayai || sr-ganesaya namah sri-sarasvatyai namah || sri-bhavanyai namah ramaya namah | rishnaya namah sri-ramah garanam || varah sakrayutas tithis sri-vishnave namah || triguni-[read -ni-]ta vedoddhata (7) vatsaro masa[s ta- from the lower margin] sya dalaficha tadyutidalam khashtahatam shashtiyuka [read yutam ?] | ah syan nagabhisata-[ie. 117 ?]prapatito nakshatrayogahatih (8) syad dvyinangakrita bhayogajamitir navangasaptendavah || 1769 || sake khanageshumahimite [i.e. 1580] © ikalilavati-buddhivilasint- ‘mana likhitam [read °khi’] narasihina saurasuchavalikhe [sic] | sri-ramachandra- avarttinah [read -rttinah] svakiyapustakam idam granthasamkhya . .. . || (9) yam | chak KT The partially obliterated writing in the upper left-hand corner is meant for an abbreviation of a{nka]h{lavati}ti[ka] bud- dhi{vilasint] [patra] 104. In the lower right-hand corner we read in three lines: dattaruha i 2 gangaramachakravatti lekham e [For the description of this and the following plate, the Committee are indebted to Professor Dr, Haas, of the British Museum.] ‘ySaN ‘1109 BIZNAMOWW “AIT 391440 VIGNI (4N39 4iIAX)—WOSADIY ect aoe Sts, 6) ECL sae CALE oe WSU CEe bles te sew eal a0 XX Pirate LXX.—Sansrnir. Iypra Orrice Lisrary. Macxenzrp Cotxection, No. 84.—[XVItw cent.?] | PART of the third Ashtaka of the Rigveda. On palmleaf, about 14 in. by 13; 51 leaves; 6 lines. In the absence of a date, our only guide to the approximate age of this MS. is the strong resemblance which it bears to a MS. of the § hadharma, an appendage to the Harivamsa, which .). We may therefore venture to ascribe it to the latter part of the xvith century. The plate represents ff. 108, Dr. Burnell assigns to cirea A.D. 0 (see his South-Indian Palaeography, 2nd edit., pl. xxxi 11a, and contains the Vedic text from [mata risvinam, Mand. iii. 26, 2, to vidathani pralchodayan), 27, 7. Writing. The letters are traced, or rather scratched, udatta, a figure is inserted (either 1 or 2, according upon the leaves with a dry point. There are two blank as the preceding syllable is short or long), but this figure is not made the bearer of svarita above and alled Nandindgar?, a local modification of the anudatta below, as in the more carefully written Deva- spaces with holes for strings or pegs, The character is the s 1 in the South of India, like the Kaithi and nagari MSS.; it is simply preceded by anudatta under in the North. An older form of it, given in | the syllable which is sounded with svarita, and succeeded Dr. Burnell’s Plate xxx., leads us up to its immediate by dependent svarita in the second syllable fol lowing. source, and shows us that this alphabet is only a branch Thus the MS. reads in ILI. 8, 4, sw Thyo 2 manasa; and of the fully developed Deva in TIL 12, 7, pathya 2 ant (omitting anudatta under the n in this MS. only syllable pa). In the unaccented portion of the plate we on the first ten leaves and on ff. 416, 42a, the rest being | find the figures 1 and 2 in apupold |dhya 1 rkam, f. 11a, Accentuation, The accents are give unaccented. On the plate they cease at f. 100, line 5. 1. 1, and in adhvare 2 gnih, 1. 5, to indicate the place of The principle of accentuation is the same as that of all | svarita. A modification of this system of accentuation the northern of the Rigveda, Udatta has no is found in the MS. 281 of the Mackenzie Collection, in special mark of its own; svarita following it is marked | which anudatta is marked by a turned down hook (1) by by a vertical down stroke by the side of the syllable the side of a letter (making va look like ka); whereas carrying it; and anudatta takes the shape of a semi- svarita is denoted by a turned up hook (.) in place of circle under the syllable instead of a horizontal stroke. | the vertical down stroke; and every other syllable, Natural svarita only occurs once in the plate, in wkthydm, whether unaccented or with udatta, has a horizontal 1.1; where, however, the writing is such that it might stroke at its side like a hyphen. also be read wkdthyam. When svarita is followed by Instead of giving a full transcription, it will suffice to point out the mistakes in these two pages. Omis bhrarddhaso, 1. 5; apupold|dhya and adild \dydvaprithivi, f. 11a, 1.1; devali | jigati, 1. 3; ghritanifrnije ions of letters or syllables occur in the following places: var[sha]nirnijah, f. 106, 1. 4; afna]va- svd@, 1. 5, where the virima is omitted under h, as likewise in uhkthyam, f. 106, 11. A superfluous yisarga appears in sochishkesahstam, f. 11a, 1.5. Short wu instead of @ occurs in utaye, f. 11a, 1.6. In the accentuation a mistake is made by omitting anudatta under the last syllable of parvatai, f. 100, 1. 3. Two errors have been corrected by the scribe himself by erasure in the words a[thi]tithim, f. 108, 1. 1, and palya|ryapasyat, f. 11a, 1.2. All nasals in conjunction with consonants are represented by anu- svara only. th ry | BP cgi teh 79 ' NREL EEO TLVO d‘SV¥V ‘ALFZIDOS OILVISY TVAOU 'SI-vl€l OV—HYIY WMV LAL, N,INVS NIG-d, NGIHSVH ITER Se RR ee eae eal a S$ 1eRe PA IEPA IGE SNES | ROTAER s = cs —t Puate LXXT.—Arapic. toyaL Asratic Socrery, Anas, P. Car. 1.—A.D. 1314-15. ‘Pea of the work entitled Gami‘u ‘t-Tawirth, or Universal History, composed in Persian by Rashidu ‘d-din Fadhlu ‘Wah ‘ibn ‘Imadu ‘d-daula, commonly called Rashid Tabib, and transla Historical MSS. about 19 in. by 113; 63 leaves. ed into Arabic under the author’s inspection. A.D. 1300-01, and finished it in A-H. 710=A.D. 1310-11. work in A.H. 700= See Morley, A Descriptive Catalogue of the He commenced the in the Arabic and Persian Languages, preserved in the Library of the Royal Asiatic Society, pp: 1-11, and Rieu, Catalogue of the Persian MSS. in the British Museum, vol. i., pp. 74-78. On paper, According to a note at the end of the history of India, f. 405, this copy was transcribed in A.H. 714=A.D. 1314-15, four years before the death of the author, which took place by the hand of the public executioner in A.H. 71 8 A.D. 1318-19. Other and larger portions of the same MS. were discoyered by the late Dr. D. Forbes in the library of Colonel Baillie (see Morley, loc. cit, p. 5), whose collection has since been transferred to the University Library of Edinburgh. Ruling. On one side with a dry point. There are double side-lines, Writing. and other orthographic signs. are often omitted. A good, clear Nashi, with many vowels The diacritical points Ornamentation. This MS. is illustrated with one hundred paintings, which, according to Morley (loc. cit., p. 10), are “executed in a much higher style of art than is usually to be found in Oriental MSS.,” at least of such early date. Of the picture which we have selected for reproduction, f. 2a, he says: “In the frag- ments relating to the history of Muhammad, there is a curious painting of the siege of the fortress of the Beni Nuzair” (read ’an-Nadhir), “in which there is a portrait of the Prophet. He is represented on horseback, and an angel” (Gabriel) “is hovering over him, holding in one hand a flask and in the other a cup. In general, as is well known, Eastern artists refrain from depicting the sacred features of Muhammad, substituting, in place of the head, a flame or glory. Mr. Bland indeed possesses, in his inestimable collection, a MS. in which there is a portrait of the Prophet; but, with that exception, this is the only instance I know of in which his features are pourtrayed.” (Mr. Bland’s MS. is probably now in the collection of the Earl of Crawford and Balearres.) Above the picture, at the top of the page, is written in and, alc alll ee Z Persian, in a modern Copal ‘n-Nadhir, and the unbelievers of the place throwing arrows and stones from the top of the castle.” The scene depicted is evidently, however, the surrender of the Jewish stronghold. See Weil, Mohammed der Pro- phet, pp. 1384-6; Sprenger, Das Leben und die Lehre des Mohammad, 3ter Bd, pp. 161-2; Muir, The Life of Mahomet, vol. iii., pp. 208-214, Gly pal gil! Lesa alo yalfiL, yl oct Lb iene ke dae paca yl AES | i nde AT tieleig Sers gs 3 a AOS by 4 fai 2 #b9 belos ad rhe OO enue an es See APL tag Sebi pa) } 9 I hie, Shel 26 1/3; . > . ws al ere Id ~ bh NI Mey, ey eame. ~ eee Os sot tually Be) x Tae RR Sls Lallislias 21) TAP Met hees estate ds linite Gar aa H AL-MAKRIZI, AL-MUKAFFA.— AD. 1420-41. COD. 1366. LEIDEN, UNIV. LIB., “ap Soeur tame nero ie : : Ci oes Cb hy rvye mt Prare LXXIT.—Aranre, Lerpen. Untversrry Lrrary. Cop. 1366—A.D. 1420-41. p= of the Mukafia, a huge biographical dictionary of native Egyptians, as well as foreign residents in and visitors to Egypt, compiled by the able and voluminous Eg gyptian writer ‘akiyu ’d-din *Ahmad ‘ibn ‘Ali ’al- Makrizi (so called from Mal kriz, a quarter of the city of Ba‘labekk or Baalbec, whence his family originally came), born probably A.H. 766=A.D. 1364-65, died A.H. 845=A.D. 1441-492. Had it ever been finished, this gigantic work would have filled at least eighty volumes (see De Sacy’s Ohrestomathie Arabe, t. i, pp. 117, 120). Not more however than sixteen of these were completed even in the rough draft (see Quatremére, Histoire des Sultans Mamlouks, t. i., p- X.), of which, it is believed, but four are to be found in Europe, all in the handwriting of the author; namely three in the University Library of Leiden, which formerly belonged to the eminent Orientalist Everard Scheid (see Dozy, Notices sur quelques manuscrits arabes, pp. 8-16, Catal. codd. orientt. Bibl. Acad. Lugd. Bat., vol. i, p. xvii, and vol. ii, p. 200, no. pcccxx.), and one in the Bibliotheque Nationale at Paris (see Quatremére, loc. cit., p. xi.) The Leiden MS. consists of three volumes, the first and third of about 500 pages, the second of about 150; obviously portions of the sawad or rough draft of the work. On coarse though not thick paper, of a brownish yellow colour; about 9} in. by 6}. The plate represents f. 55a of the first volume. Te Gatherings. The kurrdsas ave not marked in any Ae % way, nor are the leaves numbered. (a). The same letters over the words «le Bs Writing. A small, neat Nashi, such as we might on the outer margin mean that they are a correction expect from a practised penman like the author, evidently written with great rapidity. The diacritical points are | often omitted.—The arithmetical figure © (5) in red ink, From 4) see, at the end of 1. 21, to Rb, at on the outer margin, seems to mark the occurrence of the beginning of |. 24, has been written over an erasure the name yew> jive times in Il. 18 and 19, like f (3) (with the exception of the words Diletds in 1, 22); (eed) of the words Ub, in the text, 1. 12. over Qt» in 1, 19, or r (apparently 4) over the last this accounts for the prolongation of the last letter in os in ]. 18. The letters (ona in the text, ll. 18-20, Ns, 1, 23,—The name d¢sste at the commencement imply that the words over which they stand are correct of each article is in red ink, Il. 3, 13, 18. ised : : 5 as yy © ots Be Ke Soedll > Ee cg tall, PL 3 os hs cpl SG, @) toh bed, @ SB Nyill eeel all ph oll col oe ple ted or sal ep oer © : Va Gost jody Bltby eat Ger Lee sole SKY wl © He Gt i, Held, orm goal ee go be oe Hey) ite Co Ho ©) Les Abpere om as Sl Leahy clynl, pore plisly jleidly Liel Ge © Sal al oe Ett ol olpeill he User Ble) BIB VAS tel we cop aly Led co ell, Goel! sl oe Ly el, Re, © Waa 48 IS Lt sl [rend Vel] pel Gre toe IG Wty God eet oF tet ory O lirae Jy Cured! ate (sic) Lase gests Gleel ye sal EMle Cwal (0) lak, aCe lad, Kyi al oleh, wall ote le. @) ee — [corrected on the margin into isle ws] ES]BCAL writs Qe eas 3 lay sss eds perry dlcy (12) ce yl op odo oy AM eo il ce Ot! OP of wee oP dae) oy deste (13) ‘S : ce Che) Well pp oly Set) JE et rene alll one yl Gale gy) 08 5 BS RAS a\§ wei) ke a 15 bere, OC OF? OF Jytaly el! 8 bey Bs Ody ates) oer) et! (15) aE 1 il Be ape ay OF cred op oat op Cob!) Jel Col oe ee ey ee Sypte Ceek (16) Sty Shed! 2 cory plell Gubdl col 0 peak ar 2 eo tes \ is 8) } ee (8D SS) (Sa (8) Co I (8) Cd (8 So (8) CP Xoste ae ir Oee on ley? oy! ps) oe & lye GP e=to Gd pee oy ee Gy (19) . fat oo Hs ee ot SS ep Ee SD ws Cal ON ORI en A) salyo (uch) qual) GLO! pies gl oe Genel! gl DLE seo ob dy Leth Bleeds exer)! Le SSI ay He (res Kal cow Eety COD pt Sal, Cal col oe Hell aly heel all oe el ow Eble dsluo ob ped, a3 dia) a Clb fe) lB) ane ged Ody Ladd, B kaye Lio ly lly KEG Acliey dyyill [abe] et) we we) ee) co UP One a) onc fe) (oo least ks Dory [In describing this plate the Committee have to acknowledge the kind assistance of Professor Dr. De Goeje of Leiden. ] peel ee 2h sil le pawn Dajan tes Ses : gece Jr pea EIR. Aah, tae ers ee lala Ds ls Bila att sas, Be eda aas, edie ; epatals : bie Ble | i ose Sip olbels ntiche. ae Sip dausemoslay aed Hers til dante Boles ly Sighs Jas LS By Aaai els Henle a Beno aa js Nb ye ee SESS ee BAY iGlladioels - © Spee ee 7 arp Dara pa Aes leah a : 3 +, a Set coe aie eizblen i incites ahaa lal asl bly an site ob ake > ei hl Sy Lg Sa sarap, THE KORAN—(xiit# Cent) GOTHA, MS. ARAB. 914. Prare LXXII—Arasic ann Persran, Gorna. Ducat Liprary. HE Kor'dn, a © oral a fs . . with a Persian interlinear translation and a commentary in the same language. MS. Aras. 914.—[XI Iva cent. ] On darkish yellow cotton paper, about 12 in. by 8; 183 leaves, with 25 lines in a full page. Imperfect at the beginning and end, extending from sir. xix. 20 to sir. xxxix. 28, with a few lacunae. The name of the author of the translation and commentary is unknown. See W. Pertsch, Die Arabischen Handschriften der herzoglichen Bibliothek zu Gotha, \ter Bd, p. 417, no. 535. Dr. Pertsch remarks that this is the oldest Persian MS. that he has ever scen (loc. cit., p. 419). If we compare the handwriting with that of Plates VIII. and IX., we may ascribe it to the earlier part of the xiith cent. The plate represents f. 144, and contains the end of the commentary on siir. xxxiv. and the begin- ning of that on stir. xxxy., Gatherings. The kurrasas _consist of five sheets or ten leaves, but have neither Ruling. natures nor catchwords. There are single side-lines, but a space of rather more than a quarter of an inch is always left vacant between the outer side-line and the writing. Writing. An ancient Nashi. Arabic text of y. 1 are written in elegant Thultht. The diacritical points are sometimes wanting. The vowels and other orthographic signs are but spar- added. Punetuation. The basmala and the sur, XXx ingly Occasionally ® or ®, as in Il. 2, 3 or some similar figure. Forms of Letters, ete. Bf, eT S (sometimes ~),> 24 (rarely 5 4 > 3 .—The Persian letters or ra eS or es, and op by way of distinction from 3 ¢ janet also § , are-in no way distinguished from the Arabie a ef 9p as Gps, Ik ie eye eel 1, 2055 jg be 1, 22; Se, 11; caf, 1. 2.—Initial 5 and 5 are sometimes a little prolonged, and the point of the 5 is then placed to the right of the upward stroke, as in C2) \seU > eels on» 1, 22.—The mark which distinguishes final cS from a) has the forms the first verse of whic h is quoted and translated. 2 2, asin GS, 1. 20; in connexion with the same letter even when not final, asin Co 1.1 BS 1 85 CaS 1.85 aS, ll. 8, 18; , ll. 8, 11.—In the Thulthi text we find both pp ee ye With regard to the orthographic signs there is little to but it seems to be also used + yp Oo, 14; osu! os and ¢s elsewhere (¢ or (¢.— note. Fatha is sometimes slightly hooked, as in duc, Gazma has the shape of heer present their usual forms, e.g., 1. 15, LS pees i al, x s asmall 5,as alc, ls Madda and tasdid 1, 4, After long @ the ‘izafat appears as (si es 1B 1G Kis os Faparantiy by a esa as in Sy eee (l. 21), with lags 3, Lys but after y_~ it is Re which compare os) salu, pl. viii, 1 10.—Rapidity of writing has already produced an exaggerated form of valif and a general tendency to unusual ligatures; as in od) and Ole, 1.25 Gyslet, 135 atl, 145 Jes, 1. aaa and S\zas, 1.7; os ibsls Aaa 1.14; , 1. 20; and the like. sos eee es Ny pos ei SES ay ot) OS (om) \yo53 s\ sy os she 5) 3S) ail pel Age icy ol) asf Cee ‘Ny (2) egrlal jail, Cul Aber sles Lesley Merly a as, aN (e3) aM cys WB) rails den os! es ols re Use 5 cslody ve Bre) Ca) 9S douse yo) aS ede) ally wb, ole ee) IE lee ex) eos 6) City dees dow Grey ES 208 El eu ee Cte Sal ho Cayo exh © comp sid he Ctbyes Cau) Cabdy Sade [originally X28d) oucrod OSUIS he! doe ell) Cans) Kuoy Se yp Ss orig eS) & a) ade all (bo poley 4) oS ely, Ce ep cele © ASN 3 gee » 3) asl 3 aS xe we SNS Cod os) Sake Si) Cow) Cures colds S 9 Css (9) cays aS 9 amy! cre! als! me (10) «SMM cle Ly ra} peers) 555 a ost) ap eee 3) 5s 0S well orrys (gil as! 3 o3) Vyeslod ye Cslwe (12) OR ely eb, ea iste! cos) Ly, ols) soll sha shes 2 dey 5? 99 Wy claylos Bey 23 gh JS de al G) ly bo Gell @ OD) “ Cc ah : F ‘ E ; ae ‘ 6 ule, db, S cpa 5d » leds hes sy os! cs bls é) Gea jal (6) cu} 1b S20) ctteh AS Salysy ome g) lal abe pralyy [originally poi] oS wbeil, arly 0) ols Osx ys 5S pele dd ol oS Gls CaF MN ate Cyne hel Gye ow _» 8) (aN US cet ol del ype uly Sal Glas Cty sll abe ype atl ES by oe OD) tle oD) ead ES od Vepe dal Gt IG dey Gad 3) oo Vey eye tly CHU Cad GU 00 lee GE outa oth spe Satloy 6 al) Gleots CES yp Sy 2 yw Hew GD Geel 55 ipy 4 gees all BBY ek oes Ga ee CD Bee Ls In describing this plate the Committee have to acknowledge the kind assistance of Dr. W. Pertsch, s Ig s' Ducal Librarian at Gotha.] G3iLNAS3uYd SI 3ivid SIH1) “SBILINOILNY IVLN3IHO 40 1dad “SOW ‘LING ‘8 bSZ—SNUdAD WOHS NOIIdIHOSNI NVWIOINSOHd P Prare LX XIV.—Puoentcran. British Museum, Department or Orie rAL ANTIQUI parent on a block of white marble, which served as a pedestal for three small statues, the hollows for the feet of which are to be geen on the upper surface. The dimensions of the stone, a piece of which has been broken away on the left, are as follows. Height, 7} in.; breadth, 1 ft. 9$in.; length of the inscription, 1 ft. 21in.; its breadth, 24in. The letters are all quite clear, with the exception of a few words at the beginning of the first line, which have been rather too deeply incised. The character is Phoenician, differing in the somewhat compressed form of the letters from the specific Cyprian type, which at an earlier period prefers slender shafts to the letters. Here too the heads of certain letters (2°77) begin to open, as in the Aramaic character (see, for example, Pl. LXIV.). According to Dr. P. Schroeder, who gave the first Sechs Phinikische Insehriften aus Idalion, Strassburg, 1875, notice on the subject in the Monatsherichte der k. Aka- especially pp. 10-15 ; critiques by the Cte M. de Vogiié demie d. Wissenschaften zw Berlin, 1872 (6 Mai), p. 335, and J. Derenbourg in the Journal Asiatique, 1875, pp this stone was discovered by Mr. Hamilton Lang, in 3 , and by Ph. Berger in the Revue Critique, 1876, 1869, at Dali (18adcov, in Phoenician 5»), about_a mile 26 ., no. 9, p. 137 ff. ; article by C. Clermont-Ganneau, south of the village, at the foot of the heights of Am- Tere autonome de Citium et le dernier roi phénicien de cette belliri (Revue Archéol., 1874, t. xxvii., p. 90), along with ville Poumayyaton (Pygmalion), in L’ Instruction Publique, a number of other antiquities. Literature: J. Euting, 1880, 6 mars, no. 10, p. 150 ff. ttt mp ers (pbne ya pyabmp oat psd ide nwa wah vw oma (0) -. 2 2 pNmes Abtdp pyawww DIB ND WN THN Tw ONT WN (2) Qolsaaws yam na mbwna sa ws ben oben nyt j2 Dppqay ja (3) vena J INIIWN yao 2 Aww Awoqayy odw prsyows by ova ya by | 2293) Sa qwab mash wna cm eax 772 79 wR TIT aba yD 6) (1) On the 7th day of the month of ——, in the year 31 of the lord of kings, Ptolemy, the son of Ptolemy ...... ; (2) which is the year 57 of the people of Citium, the canéphorus of Arsinoé Philadelpht: being *Amath-Osir, the daughter of M...., (3) the son of ‘Ebed-siisim, the son of Gad-‘ath. These statues, which Bath-shalém, the daughter of Mari-hai, the son of “Eshmin-‘adon, hath set up (4) on behalf of the sons of her son, on behalf of ’Eshmin-‘addn and Shalliim and “Ebed- Réshiiph, the three sons of Mari-hai, the son of ‘Eshmiin-adon, the son of Nahami, (5) the son of Gallab,—the vow which their father Mari-hai had vowed during his life— (are dedicated) to their lord Réshitiph Mékhil (?). May he bless them. The most important point in this inscription is the | Xandikos of the Citian year 47,”=B.C. 264. According precise date: in the year 31 of the reign of Ptolemy, | to Colonna Ceccaldi in the Revue Archéol., 1874, t. xxix., the son of Ptolemy, corresponding to the year 57 of the | p.89 ff. (compare J. H. Mordtmann in the 4. d. D. M. G., Citian era, when a lady named ’Amath-’Osir held the 1878, Bd xxxii., p. 556), the Greek text is as follows :— office of canéphorus of Arsinoé Philadelphi, who was Mvacéas “Awntos Meretpas irep | evidently worshipped as a goddess. Of the Ptolemies aitod Kal Tod viod Typtopovos | *ATdddov ’Apuedraig edyiy | €rous as only three reigned 31 years or more, viz. Ptolemy II. Philadelphus, B.C. 285-247 ; Kurtis dyovow pl Bavdicod € Ptolemy VI. Philométor, B.C. 181-146 ; | By way of further commentary the following remarks Ptolemy VIII. Sotér II., B.C. 117-81. a must suffice. Hence the inscription might possibly belong either to Line 1. tp? is not a plural form, but a singular, B.C. 254, or 150, or 86; but M. Clermont-Ganneau has corresponding to the Syriac Js%,}.—The numerical settled the point definitely in favour of the first of these figures here and in 1. 2 are explained and illustrated by ; GE eiclose B.C. = 5 ; 3 dates. As he has shown (loc, cit.), at the close of B.C. comparison with those of the Heyptians, Palmyrenes 312, Ptolemy I. Soter dethroned and put to death the last | and Syrians, in the Table appended to this Plate——The name of the month cannot, unfortunately, be deciphered with certainty, through the fault of the stone-cutter. Phoenician king of Citium, Pygmalion (or Pumai thon), on account of his conspiring with the Seleucides ; and from that time (B.C. 311) commenced a period of | Schroder read qn, Hr (2); Euting, in 1875, 1, Zéyaw prosperity for the city under Egyptian rule. Conse- =Heb. 1; De Vogiié, P= Aram. 8, 2]; Clermont- quently the people of Citium would readily select this | year for the commencement of a new era. M. Clermont- Ganneau has also set aside the objection raised to the which is, worship of Arsinoé as a goddess during her lifetime. the name The era of Citium (which very nearly coincides with the The name of 7M (perhaps Hzydr) seems really to occur Other names of Phoenician months, Ganneau, 11M =Syr. aps, which he identifies with ezHP, according to the Hémerologium of Florence, of a month with the people of Heliopolis. Seleucian era, commencing with October, 312 B.C.) is in Abyd. 8 d. also mentioned in a Greek inscription, found at the same which have been read with certainty, are: 72=Heb. time and place with this Phoenician, and dated “ 7th bya, Sidon. 1, 1. 1; Cit. 38, 1. 1; Idal. 2, 1. 1; Idal. 4, 1.2; xq oe ), Cit. 1, 1. 1, or CNe ID (Aar- peim?), Melit. 2, 1.3; Carth. 11, 1.5; and 495, Tdal. 4 : 1, 2.—The title B35p yx, “the lord of kings, taken by the sovran in contrast to his suzerains. It is used, for example, of the Persian monarch, in Sidon, 1, 1, 18; of the Seleucides, in "Umm ’al-Awamid 1, 1. 5; and of a Ptolemy (probably Ptol. I. Soter) in Larnax Lapitha, 1. 8, in the form pap 4N (either by the accidental omission of the }. or by its assimilation in pronunciation to the following 19). Line 2. ww) is scriptio defectiva for ix; see Carth. 195, 1.1, Cowtpon by ws cowNn nowy, “the decemviri who have charge of the holy places,” and compare Ps, exli. 4, Prov. viii, 4, Isaiah liii. 3—+np, pronounced »5, is the native name of Kérwoy.—p 5)D has been taken by Stade (Jenaer Literaturzeitung, 187° no. 21, p. 37% for a barbarous genitive xarndopas or karnpdpys, instead of karyddpov, but we may perh regard it simply as the nominative kxardpos. As to the expression, compare the Greek text of the Rosetta Stone, 1. DNIDIN is of course the Greek “Apowdns.—With the name IDNNDN, “the handmaid of Osiris,” compare MInwYNDY, renitive Me Os rt,” Carth, 1 ” Melit. 1, IL 4, and DN72y, “the servant of Cit. 2,1. 1. Line 3. anaes “the servant of the steeds (of the Sun),” yng, vise xiii, 10. The latter part of the name (pro- 1.—ny73, a name analogous to nunciation uncertain) is probably identical with that of the Palmyrene Any or Sny in yany, Anytar, Anyany, and Any a (see Euting, Sechs Phoen. Inschriften aus Idalion, p. 14; Wright, Trans. of the Soc. of Bibl. Archaeology, vol. vi., p. 436 ff.).—N10, a Hiph'l, like wip) in Larnax Lapithi, 1. 4, and m= mam in Athen. 7, 1. 1; here perhaps fem., by contraction for nwi.— cobwna as a proper name is analogous to Divas or Dibvay.— probably means “my lord liveth.”—The pronunciation of cob, also found in Athen. 5, is uncertain; My but cobyy occurs. Line 4, 2 is scriptio defectiva for \3, as in is common in the Bible, “the handmaid of “Ashtoreth,” Cit. 2, 1. 3. » mopoonor, “the handmaid of Melit. 1, 1. 3, 7OwTDN ja jw, “the two sons of ‘Osir- shamar.” And so again in this line after nw>w.—The suffix pronoun in %33 can hardly be that of the 1st pers. sing.; more probably that of the 3d pers. sing. (see Schrider, Die Phoenizische Sprache, p. 149), and here jem.—In the name }w Tay we find the appellative of a deity, which occurs again in 1. Line 5: 472 13 WE, “ which hed yowed,” similar 6 Nin {2, imperf. }>), is the ordinary Phoenician word for “to be,” to the Arabic construction ge o In ro038 and cotNd we have a remarkable form of the suffix of the 3d pers. plur, ma It oceurs again in mm, “and their helpers,” Idal. 3, 1 2, and in ponwax> “to their father,” in the Punic inscription of Hanshir Brigitta; as well as in Sidon. 1, Il. 9, 10, 19, 20, 21, both with nouns and verbs.—"n2 is plural, with the suffix of the 3d pers. sing. mase., probably pro- nounced ‘m3, as in »}259 for smi390, aqiaaXts. Fw ion of the deity whom the bop is the native appell Greeks identified with their * pronunciation of both parts of the name is uncertain, but especially of the second. uw is no doubt to be connected with the Hebrew word my/, and may be Amdddwv ’Apvedatos. The pronounced HY (Exdepyos, éxnfddos, éxatnBodos), or more likely for the town in Palestine which the Greeks named *Azod\ovia is still called by the Arabs a oie, with an apparently prosthetic ‘alif. The too had their Resl ipii (see De Vogiié, Mélanges, >. 78 ff). The following genealogy may help to make the inscription clearer, Gallab ’Eshmiin-‘adon N le Ma hai “Wsiumiiietsstem married Ebyhalstom ae Mari- Marichai tan is i *Bshinuneadon Shallam “‘Ebed-Réshiph. [For the description of this plate, and the table which accompanies it, the Committee are indebted to Professor Dr. Euting of Strassburg. | TABLE OF ANCIEN T ARITHMETICAL FIGURES. A,SYRIAC. 3,PALMY RENE] 2,PH ENICIAN 1, EGYPTIAN. 5, Hierdtic. | aHieraglyphic- i lermaee, / Ufziaas 220 Somibebet tie” i 2, [Oa fe y fi ED CA cee ally 3 ¥] m iN 14 | Zain acrresmr yl h vIn G my aq often oe Ul) 5 se WAN aa | 6 = wan Be ih. mint] 6 7 — W aT 2 Yy-w Mm. nnn 7 8 — WS ff suit B32], iit ast 8 9 ppt INS tH OU Qa fie. wm} 10 Wa ira Nias ae RM) avo niio tt ? lina (2 in rN ion In|z7 12 a I? i> | 4 a fh . wnliz 13 ay MW {= ON m. wales it iy. WI? \NI aE in Win |Z 15 57) y> Wi Ay i . Wns i6 ry ieee WN CaN Lt . WIN ai ry DE Saeed MIU I A pone wi ti 127 18 ee NI HO 23> | 2 nim HMA [ig ig ee, m3 | wim | GH tm annin fig 20 ° A 3 lomgyz es ae nn|zo 21 IIe JA IB low 14 I= ml» inna 25 = « Fd WiWs~ Hy satin muinnles 29 ieee JM3DS |= MM 2a). MPa 29 30 oe 73 |PH « noe TH Kee NNN |30 Ao so} As BS l= 3R~ HY eo De ANAN|40 50 ae 722 |r * WHY Wal van 50 60 oo $33 |===" G47 14°34! anna ANnAnn|6o0 70 piece 7333 we LL dl 2 Ann annn| 70 80 ocee BOSD | 3333-AAHY sa” ye AnnNnANNN| 80 90 gone 3339 THY 23,844 nonnnnann 90 99 pp azecee | 3-PHB3B | i RY RSS liummannanannan! gg 100 @ a) Pl lel N ear, 91400 200 (P=°*2%) | (ey ie Do 99\200 300 rd >I 193 ???|300 400 il 5 , Se) a5 99 99 \400 5 S 2D 94 "99.99 GREEK AND PALMYRENE INSCRIPTION—a~.D.134. BRIT. MUS., DEPT OF OR. ANTIQ. Pirate LXXV.—Greex ann Patmyrenr ArAmato. British Museum. Department or Orrmnran Antiquities—A.D. 134. A ee inscription, incised on a stone slab, measuring 13% inches square, in Greek and Palmyrene Aramaic, recording the dedication by one Agathangelus, of Abila in the Decapolis, of a canopy and couch to Zeus Keraunios, for the safety of the emperor Hadrian, in the year of the Seleucian era 445=A.D. 134. The slab was first seen, in 1616, by Pietro della Valle (Viaggi, ed. 1848, vol. i., p. 856), imbedded in the wall of the mosque at Teiba or Tiba (at-Taiyibah), a place about two days’ journey north-east of Tadmor or Palmyra; and it was found in the same position in 1691 by William Halifax, of Corpus Christi College, Oxford. The Greek inscription was published from Halifax’s information in “ Philosophical Transactions,” vol. x! <., 1695, p. 109; and again by Dr. Edward Bernard and Dr. Thomas Smith in “ Inscriptiones Graecae Palmyrenorum” (Traj. ad Rhenum, 1698), p. 2; and was reproduced by Boeckh in the “ Corpus Inscriptionum Graecarum,” 1844, no. 4501. The text is as follows: Ati peylorp kepav | vig imtp cwrnpi | as TpaLiavod] *ASpiav0d SeS[acrod] | 709 kupiov *Ayabdvye | hos *ABinrds ris Aca | tédeos Tiy kapdpav Sko | Sdpnoev Kad rhy Kdloyfv] | € ilov dveOnKer | erovs Euv pnvds Adov. The Syriac inscription was first edited by Reland, “ Palaestina ex monumentis veteribus illustrata” (Traj. Bat., 1714), p. 526, from Della Valle’s copy; and was discussed by the Rey. John Swinton in “Philosophical Transactions,” vol. xlviii., 1754, p. 745, and again, with better result, in the same work, vol. lvi., 1766, p. 4, after a personal inspection of the slab, which, in the meantime, had come into The latest revision of the text is to be found the possession of William, 2nd Earl of Bessborough. in a paper by Dr. M. A. Levy, “Zur semitischen Paliiographie,” in the ‘Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenliindischen Gesellschaft,” Bd xv., 1861, p. 615. See also a paper by W. Wright in the “Trans- actions of the Society of Biblical Archaeology,” vol. vii., part 1, 1880, p. 4. It runs as follows. aap snby sta paw dyad a DaMIN NWI) NMBD (2) (1) To Béél-Shémin (or the heavenly Baal), the Lord of the world, has offered (2) the canopy and couch Agathangelus. The slab was purchased for the British Museum at Lord Bessborough’s sale in 1858. The following remarks may suffice in the way of commentary on the Syriac text. The name you Opa, the Baal or Master of Heaven, also by assimilation yowya, is known to us in Syriac, eg. 2 Maccab. vi. 2, De Lagarde's Analecta Syriaca, p. 176, 1. 24, and in the proper name QSoas 59 (probably pro- nounced Bar £ hémin), “the son, i.e. the worshipper, (see Noeldeke in the 7. d. D. I. G., It is here the equivalent of Zeds xepav- of Beel-shémin Bd xxiv., p. 96). vos, which leaves sipby $8719 to represent peéywotos.— 9p is=Syr. 2:5, to offer—The word Sn>> is also identical with the Syr. 1429, which is used to translate xapdpa in Isaiah, ch. xli. 22, Vers. Hexaplar., and in Eusebius, Hist. Eccles., lib. iv., cap. 15, 37, 73 yap dp xapdpas eiSos mroufjoav, ]hao, (Lato, 2,8 }301 wy “o1.-—On the form xiyqy, with i instead of p, Syr. 1335, see Noel- deke in the Z d. D. M. G., Bd xxiv., p. 95.—pbanix, with one }, is the natural representative in Semitic writing of ’Ayabdyyehos. On the form of the final } in jw see Levy, loc. cit., p- 617. Remark also the diacritical point over the 4, of which this is as yet the earliest dated appearance in Aramaic writing, to distinguish it from 4, which was left unpointed, At a later period, however, the d received a point below, as we see in the Syriac 437, but s 2d. Fes oy Mi filue ge” ; or fy ne b tube 10: Claas P Sees Soo Be wares mabe Dulas Ds. Se oy © : F ord Lhusinlod. Ahan.» Wties Lesa tiale a 98 . is A 2 " bee deat dll oe Pee tl eee pera are 4 ES dos A pote Samesnaasi f pa ssasodb see ‘one a. XR sease Ais aan F pallaseld GIN nal t fal 93 yoredasdoall af sacred patsse-H nbd chasers eae ities Gin geesseoe ieee Etats ih’ wise remeap Athen cin on ange eves salle gil 9 Seno ated batnned ion date poax_- oy sade dScax A retin Sad dsodp Linisn -90r_. ar mi We alc, Hirataaysase $3\ 909 Lissa vr0n.c00 Leonie at Roca oa | ONE: heer gs piers xa See ¢ i . ip ye 91 Waites avy Eas i amr hal . id ae Soy4 asd Rar acgarre r nee om te CCE wea ; ie i gid Be wale fu SS io Ree entod s ae. RT Ele & gt ‘ss i Ee es , Araxs0 Faaes. lat fuss igen hues com pin SiwZbisos b ada] noon ues 9 sao re exes eins OS at ae MOSS amen ay ge ag : Sette Ramen os ia NN nar ia te fan ad F i oie loos Pears Dosiionse doses bree Es ar ke oe si seb lane 2 er snten Sine = be eotar. sail ni ~ilfsa y —ilg 3 Sof Aa reas A es aglla tla “Te ts 13 eae are aes . : Sawaya x » Dea. dine Fe. P<) s poate: ce y ELIYA BAR SHINAYA. ANNALS.—a~p. 1019? BRIT. MUS., ADD. 7197. Pirate LXXVI.—Syriac ann Arar. Brirish Museum, App. 7197.—A.D. 1019? if | VHE Annals of “Eliya Bar Shinaya, or Elias Bar-Sinaeus, bishop of Sauba or Nisibis (Nasibm), who was born A. Gr. 1286=A.D. 975, and died about the middle of the xith cent. On the author see Assemani, Bibl. Orient., t. iii., pars 1, p. 266. The work is described, according to this unique but defective manuscript, in Cutal. Codd. MSS. Orient. qu in Mus. Brit. asservantur, pars prima codd. Syriacos et Carshunicos amplectens, no. LVI. (compare Wright's Catalogue of the Syriac MSS. in the Brit. Mus., p. 1206). On vellum, about 143 in. by 11}; 106 leaves; 2 columns; a full page contains 49 or 50 lines in the Syriac text, somewhat fewer in the Arabic. The exact date of the composition of the work, and probably of the writing of this copy, is fixed by the statement of the author himself, who says on f. 154 that Yaihannan, bishop of Hirta (al-Hirah), was ordained Catholic Patriarch on Wednesday, the 19th of the latter Teshrin, A. Gr. 1324, (19th November, A.D. 1012,) and that he still ruled the Nestorian Church “down to this year in which this work was composed, namely A. Gr. 1330” (A.D. 1018-19). The plate Gatherings. Owing to the fragmentary state of the volume, the original arrangement of the quires is un- certain. Writing. The Syriac text was evidently written by a professed scribe, in a neat and regular Jacobite cursive. The Arabic translation appears to have been added in parallel columns by the bishop himself. From the begin- ning to f. 916 it is written in a very singular, archaic hand, obviously artificial, which one would almost have assigned at first sight to the ixth cent. (compare, for example, pl. XX.); but from that point the writing becomes an ordinary cursive, such as we would naturally represents f. 500. expect to see in the xith cent. (compare the facsimile in tosen and Forshall’s Catalogue). The same may be observed in several of the tables throughout the volume. Forms of Letters, ete. In the Syriac text eo x and & retain old forms; whereas 2 5 o1 o and {0 are decidedly cursive—In the Arabic the diacritical points and vowels are but sparsely added. We observe _} and g as con- trasted with « 2 and x. ‘Taédid is either = or -. Ornamentation. At the end of a chapter we find occasionally a small interlaced and coloured device; e.g. | on ff, 7, 110, 83a, Red) bl dy Renal) LY) Gla) dow on (sic) poe we 3) Us) UL Really Ryall Ryd @) Oo due Sg) Joy Renal ALY oo aw ol Gb eee ls ® Jw lal! 3) ESS) pe ea Uh og ayes. UE d,=559 9) Coll o)_peoey get dius col 8y i: Lnyy peed) JM Rad Gb Ge Gd GB) Ee GD Lord © ill el & eed One pod! (oA) J | 3 @ el esta ho ee Renal LM re i) Jaow 8) eed sac pis jul eS Kn) RN ope Keclh! §— @) S\ 3 ro) Ebu5)) (10) ress cee Hcl) WW) Gaol) bot) by pens iy Goyal che past) GS jel rattle a call GD Dix in) iS alan Vegetal prea ali sewmsliner ty) 6) {. Ribs BENE et) el es nce ey) ey ey) ores (18) a8 Ss ow 09 Spell Geye de skad, GOD Gay U2 (18) OD ye Lele Ib o,083 Lb dey MW en) G eo oll fo ee ads eas los! ola) Raw (18) NGA renee pel SS UL Ko, | ayes) ) Re RL 9) Made esi AF ed esill ll aly SBI Os) oe el OD BUN) es! oy Rw lee Gall fe dead) ye Cade CS 2) ye) @D CIM Leeey Na dow ed cre ee 22) oS) (GD) elle pee ets Hy eitilerg Makes Boag Heed Kar) SS Remoy (ytd (options co > coe By _pessy (ce dew les Nl, 0 LS Lele ody ye 2p pew Ly ell ee Yy edt Henley WS cay I) Joo endl LM cre awe ost Go gee tee CD ge ASU} U3), Lela! 5) Aba! dened DS) or pe oh ce hs ba eye) sad Ras al haba) RoW Ge hel ee Rus kd Gel fe) ieee) | poet! Vos fe cri, AED des oy lad yt re kal e (oi) os re) edly mang.) EOS ,\3} hes) sal oe dre Cyl wdsill sd, LXXVIL. ene Na a a a f ae ° ay \I—VN fern prUITSN ysis Ney es SE IE S—L— A TPN th ibd SSS fan PPni Pieces esecco cooce » sees © 2758 PAT RAED A bPDIDD DIDD epRien 99D? “}1atEN A RED MPH eMHOR) Map ° TI * PI + ovr 2 DIYB3 2 DIRS DAP Days o pe SS ADDI canes OBEN pair aan 77 by piney JPA RA yw Tran V3 yon b mbar (EVINIS BIDS FYI np hs-raby arab 5004 ROME wis Rb ann son oon ta prMseypy MN sarsainon bas MED “aE yore moyn te Pays) ane © sana Rabin fan ot Beene haart: ny MONINRSS fa ony Dn ODN Wav TnN RIN e Dinh Site2 RY Lanse rary Wit) RW HD “Ws eS atin Nwps “y Don ANDI 1519 pha mnay Sak hi na yiice sen odo HHS STP —19393 Ree aD y DED Aw 4 1g MAD DEON aaah 4 Rear Ac eee ane eva yish ie) LPI2D oom SPN, NTBISS anes) Wa °Rian ABR”, ay DVB OF WY: NpS4 b $3 sho TPN DVS DPW INDI DNS ANSVITNINNDY TT WOR NU SP MARBy’p WIE poe dex bas vap nae aya TEM ee may Nos SMD so ne Sebsty sons inn men NEI oer Dp Son Sy Sema mm sy pie 13) ray SSSp NN. YOPP 3 15.5% swan reach ho row WIR’ HH! Sar Pesan oy BY PD DIP NDI HI NT Reiiorp. ewe beck ie aris hy wan Sb Siem non fram Nise D ons Wy o3.551 =n VID Fe ND abn A leaf is wanting after f. 11, and six 90 are only half-leaves, and ff. 74-83 have been mutilated. Written, probably in Greece, by a professional scribe named Zerach bar Yéhiidah, for his own use, A.M. 4866, A. Destr. Templi Herod. 1038,= A.D. 1105-6. It was purchased at Rome, in 1498, by the famous Hebraist Johann Reuchlin (Capnio), for the sum of el and rebound by his orders. even ducats (see his autograph note on f. 3854), Tn this manuscript both the Text and the Targiim are furnished with vowel-points and identical accents. The Text has been collated by Bruns and Kennicott ; the Targiim edited (without the vowel- points) by De Lagarde. The Mas reth is very scanty, but accurate and to the point; see the note on OnAwvsi in the margin of col. 1 of the plate. The mark pphi, col. 2,1. 5, is well known; but the number of verses in the Twelve Minor Prophets is stated to be 1047 (col. 2, 1. 6) instead of 1050. The Piskoth, or Pésikin, too, are only eight (col. 2, ll. 7, 8) instead of ten, xu» (Haggai ii. 12) and wa (Zech. vi. 15) being omitted, and their notation is different from the common one (see Biblia Magna Rabb., Amst. 1724, Massora finalis, f. 536, col. 3). The middle verse of the Prophets is said to be Isaiah xvii. 3 (col. 2, 1. 9), which agrees with the usual statement, From the indentation at the head of col. 1, it would seem that at one time a Haphtarah must have commenced here, as does a chapter in the English Bible. The practice of dating from the destruction of the Herodian Temple was already known early in the 3d cent.; see Mékhilta, Massikhta wana. That this practice was followed in Europe in the xith and xiith centuries is clear from the remark of the Greek rabbi Tobiah bar Eliezer on Exod. xix. 1 (see Buber’s edit. of the Lekach Téb, Wilna, 1880, p. 126). The plate represents f. 3826. On f. 383a@ commence the nw, or poetical pieces which the reader recites before reading any lesson from the Prophets. These are five in number (see De Lagarde’s ed., pp. 490-3). The first is alphabetical, with the author's name, Joseph, appended. The second, which is acrostical, is by one Abraham Cohén, who has added to his name 1 and jx. The third, which is also acrostical (but in which every second line is to be passed over), is by one Méshullam (not Gérsh6m). The fourth, likewise acrostical, with the same arrangement, is by one Shéléméh, who has added to his name pin. The fifth is an alphabetical poem, with the author’s name, Shéléméh, appended. Then follow, on f. 3836, three pieces in prose (De Lagarde, p. 493), in the first of which the translator Jonathan bar ‘Uzziél is apostrophised. In the second God is blessed and praised for the election of the Prophets and the giving of the Law; and in the third for the election of Israel and the giving of the Law and the Prophets. These last two pieces may have been recited after the reading of a lesson. Ff. 384 and 385 contain Hebrew notes, partly written in red ink. For further details regarding this manuscript see Kennicott, Vetus Testamentum, Oxon. 1780, t. ii, Dissertatio Generalis, p. 21 (§ 50) and p. 84 (cod. 154); Bruns, Dissert. Gener., Brunovici 1783, p. 93 (§ 50) 54); De Lagarde, Prophetae Chaldaice, Lipsiae 1872. and pp. 400-1 (cod. Gatherings. The quires, 39 in number, consist of even at the beginning of a word. The letters rhayp five sheets or ten leaves (ff. 278 and 290 not being have usually either daghesh or rapheh (compare Bibl. included), They have catchwords, but no signatures. Magna Rabb., Mass. fin., f. 29 b, Il. 2, 3). Although the Ruling. On one side, with a dry point. be generally closes 7, : there an unmistakable Writing. The writing, which is between the ruled difference in form between it and) n. At the end of a lines, is in the square character, in a fine Greek Ash- word, if there be no pathac furtioum, n takes an in- kénazi hand (remark, in particular, the forms of $ and ternal shéva, n. The letters and y nse the diacri- 2), apparently influenced by French teaching (observe | tical point inside, wy, w. Pathach (-) and ségol (:) often stand for kdmes (=) and séré (~), and vice versd. Words merely reproduced (not translated) in the Targam are rapheh wader the usual circumstances, but silent § and 7 occasionally abbreviated, but only, it would seem, at or are sometimes similarly marked. When 8 is sounded, near tine oat of a line, where the seribe was pressed for it commonly has a point below (like the mappik in 7), | room. The dilated letters are $2.990D% and n. the form of ¥). Forms of Letters, etc. The letters n53'723 take [For the description of this plate the Committee are chiefly indebted to the Rev. Dr. Schiller-Szinessy. They have also to acknowledge the kind assistance of Dr. Brambach, the Librarian at Karlsruhe. ] LXxVill. SELICHOTH.— AD.1179. BRIT. MUS., ADD. 27, 205. Prare LXXVIII.—Hesrew. British Museum, App. 27,205.—A.D. 1179. (Nes containing the Sélichoth or propitiatory prayers, according to the Ashktnazi rite ; imperfect. Vellum, about 8% in. by 5§; 185 leaves; 19 lines. As the Table of Cycles, f.175a, commences with xD" (261), we may fairly suppose that the manuscript was written in the last or nineteenth year of the cycle 260. If so, 260 x 19=4940-1= A.M. 4939= A.D. 1179. The plate represents f. 180d. In the present state of the volume, ff. 1-12 and 109-118 are later insertions, of the xivth cent., intended to make it serviceable for a particular subdivision of the Ashkénazi rite. The scribe has also filled up f. 13a with a continuation of the Index begun on f. 12. The fly-leaf f. 185, written in two columns of 24 lines, is the last leaf of a quire of a Biblical manuscript, of the xiiith or xivth cent., containing Jeremiah, ch. 1. 37, 113)—ch. li. 24, Iw pny7 bo ne. The original manuscript breaks off, on what is now f. 184d, in the tenth Table of the Calendar of Sabbaths, Festivals, Fasts, etc., and their respective Lessons from the Pentateuch, to which is occasionally added a Lesson from the Prophets (see the plate, 1. 13, inner margin, 1 Kings, ch. iii. 15). Some of the Séichdth are not otherwise known to us, eg., R. “Aziél’s Pizmon beginning, f. 1363, mywr? yp Joy waK; and the text of the others offers many various readings. Two leaves in this volume are palimpsest, namely ff. 179 and 180. The underlying text is that of a Latin manuscript of the xth cent., apparently containing ecclesiastical canons. This is one of the very rare examples of a Jewish scribe having so employed an older piece of vellum. Gatherings. Of four sheets or eight pages, with | volume is in the square character, in a Greek Ashkénazi catchwords. hand, inclining to northern French. Ff, 1-12 and 109— Feuling. On one side, with a dry point, guided by | 118 are in German Ashkénazi, probably written in marginal prickings. Italy. F.185 is in northern French Ashkénazi, Writing. Between the lines. The great bulk of the [For the description of this and the following plate the Committee are indebted to the Rey. Dr. Schiller-Szinessy. ] aA hm fo 7 > zi b+ -0hy 435 Fe 3B sh yaw) wR” ~ Fer gm 39h aby pws 173 pn ops) 937A] 257 “on ond jf ep 23ND wn — — — — Cond : faa aaa te ay yuan a) 2By9 AM Dy apd aim 2980 23/2 "pia 9997) 5By on WK Sign on weep RESN dpi ce 9992 YI MD prvdap yuo, acd > ge ee cise 4958 pyyan yoo BD wl bie > vn payor PH 294 $05 BS, . An — — — ja sinew 54 enh) i nhin) yaaqs PIA FIP Sdw- p90 se TWoa] yah ESTES) 7 AW) 35 1 fy ie a WIA —9 35007 1 3 pare av PAY 317 WA2R 39072 aMony 5 DET iy? (9 Myer Dp ie 2-5 wpa 4173 salon ia di ja p> soy bs pile: Le Afie Don AHH [ID IK poay SA SUE LY hese 99 obu WR IDE 53 yak ody OK) prem N / . - BRIT. MUS., ADD. 27,199. ’EL'AZAR OF WORMS, SODE RAZAIYA, ETC.— A.D. 1515. Pirate LXXIX.—Heprew. British Museum, App. 27,199.—A.D. 1515. yaaa volume, the contents of which are cabbalistic. On paper, about 8} in. by 51; 601 leaves. Written at Rome, and finished on Wednesday, the seventh day of the Feast of Tabernacles, A.M. 5276=30th September, A.D. 1515. The scribe was none other than the famous grammarian and lexicographer R. ‘Eliyahi hab-Bachir ben ‘Ashér hal-Lévi, commonly called Elias Levita; and he copied it for the Cardinal Egidio of Viterbo, whose numerous annotations show that he was an excellent Hebrew scholar. The plate represents f 601a. The date jin, 1. 16, must have been added by Elias Levita, at the Cardinal's suggestion, when the book was brought to him, for these letters, though in his handwriting, are outside of the line and in an ink of a different tint. This manuscript has been described at some length by the late S. D. Luzzatto in the Literatur- blatt des Orients, 1847, coll. 341-4, but not without some omissions and slight mistakes. It contains three works by the celebrated tosaphist, cabbalist and poet of the xiith and xiiith centuries, R. ’El'azar ben Ychiidah ben Kalonymos, of Worms, the disciple of Ythidah Chasid and the author of the Rok@ach (not "Hii‘ezer, for np4=308, which is also the numerical value of 7x, but not of 7x): viz., Sodé Razaiyad, P37 ND (again 308), or Miscellanea Cabbalistica (portions of which are com- prised in the book called Razi’dl, bx, Amsterdam, 1701), ff. 1-3795; a Commentary on the Sépher Yéstradh, 9.8. 7D wb, much fuller than the printed commentary by the same author, Mantua, 1562, ete. (he quotes in it the commentary of Shabbéthai ben Abraham Donolo, D2n7 HM AN 73 snaw sa, a writer of the xth cent., also cited by Rashi), ff 8796-470 a; and a psychological and metaphysical treatise entitled wai naan 7DD, ff. 4850-600a. This last work is preceded by a poem éloth, or Questions, by R. Shémia’él beginning ‘i229 Wt {Y 7) WIN, and in it there are incorporated Shé isvoth, MI¥DA Mw, of R. Abraham ha-Chozeh, 26a, and the Shadré ham-J ben Kalonymos, f ff. 5830-588. Foll. 4700-4850 are filled up with Ségulloth or charms, the days propitious for travelling, ete. The subscription, of which the greater part is shown in the plate, commences on f. 6004, as follows: yaa (£. 601a) 7pm px WwW CNWY 717 ADA SY) WD COIN OWN IN TT IBD M37 byinon qx Writing. German Ashkénazi in rabbinic characters, The subscription is in larger letters than the rest of the book. LXXX. : Fait : on 2G MLD NACOb BIIG xa Joti “ fG1tGaz cab pay tal “2ICGH TE Xe te? bl be rypCurin Aut NRL" GVEGITEN . CMDANGAG “PH LXs, LU XA PIGC)EUEEY rierG -OL pPAPAE SVOMO VC? ECOm- so NOTILENTDG yy Pe VrGrsqypasvors . PEPGNG Cap uny AEVPLITCD ST VIE I XCDPpire hnEYUDKE > Gye rcpKce xor oe EYEMIcE:| "FOOTVF OV NEEL SYEGIAREIVUES:. a Koen 20c |) Tel ‘GEVPE ~antiG: bowie GC ELLCD AN Fre. | aa Ded IN AVEDIAD. ie Tikes CLeAor. * Gprrreniccgxa ‘GROATLLIOIX EL ne OxpaDAaLle N ~~ Pq PHIOBETEXO | IGr NELOK OE PLprrLeoc TEMA — OYOUIPILILE TM *ALIGE XN Goor “Os érpenleTcoBneenragn ta craciercpse as prise Gowne-7— 6ONG TOLLOIMG- a sare FCPRLIEG”. RVALAPE- TS POY NCD" 1S AULIOGXECIeHK OK age Br ee ran Vv AGTUKG LIC HOG. LINTOD TAME (WHPGNZeE BEAT Ri OGNGXONK OF 7 Fs —=_NODNOGHG AP 3 VIG SGIGHCILIGN | 5B xe rr PLO” mG. 34 1 XxILEG NONMG KN 4 CyaDIi1e Cee Oe) isn tCXHCAGEIVG: = AK POLTACAIN Se ae rmuEMOovavOr se. 4 CL) DI TGAG EY Shor d GAULLE LOAIG, Gig OVP ALE EC GILES NGwBe- pe GIGI VE, 4 XALITEG 2COLGCEN — GFT GPS G2 LLOG- XEIVIXOGIC. G KG) ALSOYEDG). ON 8 Oe i EVBBOFM GO "TES ene 2G BOALEXME Epey >CEX CAL POGXE OCD) TE RO- Teopi rErnNor, JIICMBZKAIGE Hg TOGAGIQGIISP SE, = IGIAGHag xen WY XOOCGAL AN ar & q al 2 ag : Sop tn eee Ce ae ap Beas 3 es. oc ale a Aegan Cece /4-— GOSPEL OF S.LUKE. (pate uncerTAIN) LIBRARY OF THE EARL OF CRAWFORD AND BALCARRES. Pirate LXXX.—Coprtie. Lrprary or THE Earn or Crawrorp AND BALcarr —[Darte uncerraw. | fs ee oale oe of the Gospel of S. Luke in the Sahidic or Thebaic dialect of the Coptic language, beginning in ch. iii. 8, with p4 ap&nabe déyew, and ending in ch. vi. 37, with wi) «pijre. On vellum, about 14 in. by 10%; 7 consecutive eaves, the first page of which is numbered pyg=197; 2 columns, 35 lines. This manuscript was brought from Egypt. by the late Archdeacon Tattam, at whose sale it was purchased by the late Earl of Crawford and Baleares, It is one of the oldest extant MSS. of either Coptic version of the New Testament, though certainly not so old as the Graeco-Thebaic MS. (T) in the Borgian collection, from which Giorgi edited fragments of §. Luke's and S. John’s Gospels, and which is ascribed by Tischendorf to the vth cent., but is probably of later date (see Scrivener's Introduction to the Criticism of the New Testament, 2nd ed., p. 132 foll.). Until, however, Coptic palacography has been more carefully studied, it would be rash to hazard a positive expression of opinion as to its age. The plate, p. 204 (see the upper left-hand corner), contains a portion of the Sahidic ve ion which has not been published before (viz., ch. v. 4, 7a Serva bpdv—14, pmderi cimeiv), but there are no various readings of interest in it. Wy = 1e Eusebian sections and canons are inyariably marked in this manuscript, the sections being in yellow and the canons in red. The greater xefddaa, or rirho, are also given, in green; their commencement being in each case further denoted by a scroll in green and red on the left side of the column, as in col. 2,1. 15. The contents of the several xefédaa are stated in the upper margin ; and, when they happen to have parallel passages in other Gospels, the references to these are added. Accordingly, we find in the plate the Eusebian sections Aa (31), col. 1, 1. 23; &, col. 2, 1.7; and av, 1.16; with the corresponding canons to which they belong. Coincident with Av of the Eusebian sections is the beginning of 18 (12) of the 7é\o.. Hence in the upper margin stands 18. er&e nerco&9, entagqao. MF. ra .; ie, “12. Concerning the leper who was healed. Matthew 6. Mark 4.” The marginal dashes seem to indicate a smaller subdivision of the text, with which we are unacquainted. Ruling. On one side, with a dry point. the end of a verse, and sometimes elsewhere, a small Writing. Uncials, rather coarse and artificial in space is left blank. appearance. Words are not separated. The letters are | Forms of Letters. The shape of a and & is hardly often smaller at the end of a line. | decisive of a late date; ~ tT ec are rather heavily Contractions. Not numerous, and of the usual kind, dotted; the base of a and x, and the cross-stroke of mn, as fC for mcovc in col. 1, 1. 26. A stroke at the end project considerably, especially to the right; the angular of a line sometimes stands for the letter s, as in col. 2, portion of x does not touch the perpendicular line; the 1. 6, craud. cross-stroke of s# is quite low down and almost straight ; Punctuation. A single point, variously placed. At | py and f descend below the line (but not -). [For the description of this plate the Committee are indebted to the Right Reverend the Bishop of Durham. ] T Hee PALAXOGRAPHICAL SOCTETY. COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT. E. A. BOND, Esq, LL.D, F.S.A., PRINCIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH Museum, President. W. DE G. BIRCH, Esq., BRITISH MusEuM. J. W. BONE, Esq., B.A, F.S.A. Mons. L, DELISLE, Director or THE NATIONAL Liprary, Paris, MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTE. THE RIGHT REVEREND THE BISHOP oF DURHAM, D.D. WILLIAM MASKELL, Esq, M.A, F.S.A. PROFESSOR J. RUSKIN, D.C.L. Oxrorp. E, M. THOMPSON, Esq, F.S.A, KEEPER oF THE MSS., BRITISH MusEUM, Hon. Sec. G. F, WARNER, Esq., M.A., British MusEum, Hox. Treas. Proressor Dr. W. WATTENBACH, Beruin. PROFESSOR J. O. WESTWOOD, Oxrorn. W. ALDIS WRIGHT, Esq. LL.D. Trin. Cott. CAMBRIDGE. ProressoR W. WRIGHT, LL.D, QuEENS’ COLL. CAMBRIDGE. FACSIMILES OF ANCIENT MANUSCRIPTS. ORIENTAL SERIES. Parra: EDITED BY WILLIAM WRIGHT, LL.D, PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE, CONTENTS. 81. Pafichakara and Guhyavali-vivriti. Sanskrit. A.D. 1198-99. 82. Ashtasabdika and Ravanavaha. Sanskrit. A.D. 1332, and xivth cent. 83. ’Al-Mabsut. Arabic. A.D. 1109-10. 84. Tarjuman ’al-Ibar. Arabic. A.D. 1401? 85. Kalilah wa-Dimnah. Persian. A.D. 1259. 86. Arabic Coins. A.D. 1221-1819. 87. The Siloam Inscription. Hebrew. Circa B.C. 700. 88. Trilingual Inscription. Phoenician, Latin, and Greek. Circa B.C. 160-150. 89, Pentateuch. Hebrew, Arabic, and Samaritan. A.D. 1227. 90. Siphra. Hebrew. A.D. 1073. 91. Haphtaroth. Hebrew and Aramaic. A.D. 1484. 92. Life of Onuphrius. Coptic. A.D. 979. PHOTOGRAPHED AND PRINTED IN FACSIMILE BY THE AUTOTYPE COMPANY. Lonvon: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, Luntepn, STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS, 1882. [Al Rights reserved. | ' ae GENT BSMITL MASA! YAM ES'ES VA! SY; FI GR) AM AT GRMILTEA TOTES I MTT TT MATISSTI TOR YTEA AAT TIEH TSAR SIDI UIT TITY 1 HIATT HILT SEREYS SALITT ST ONT YU HHT BSTC THT SIM FUT ES) TIETETAAT IS JEVT HG MIEN IM a ca a eee " See eee PANCHAKARA AND GUHYAVALI-VIVRITL—A.D. 1199 anDII98. CAMBRIDGE, UNIV. LIB, ADD. MSS. 1699.1 AND 1699.2. Pratr LXXXT.—Sansxnir. Camprmer. Untverstry Lrprary. l | \HE books entitled Parichakara and Guhyivali-vivriti. former with six lines on a page, the latter Appitronat MSS. 1699. 1 anv 1699, 2.—A.D. 1199 ann 1198. On palm-leaves; about 114 in. by 24; the with seven. Written by a scribe named ayakara, and dated respectively in the 38th and 37th years of the reign of Goyinda-pala, who came to the throne in A.D. 1161, according to the inscription published in the Archaeological Sui vey of India, vol. iii., p 5, and pl. xxxviii. Dr. D. Wright at Kathmandi. 1. The Parichakara (Add. MS, 1699. 1) is letters of the alphabet. The plate represents f mystically connected with the five the Dev The colophon is ashtatrimsatsambatsare “bhilikhyamano | jyais follows: parames: pustakam hasrigayakareneti. the posse ensuing fall of the Pala dyn 2. The Guhyavali-vi and metaphysics, in 25 numbered sections. guhydvaltvivr Tita-sthavir ih | vivnitih pan sri-ghanadev LL likhitam idam pustakam kasrigayakareneti. Material, ete. and fresh-looking, The palm-leaves are so strikingly new that we might at first sight doubt the high antiquity of these two manuscripts, had we not numerous examples of equally fine preservation in the Cambridge collection. So little have these books been used, that we find in them, as well as in others, the chalk powder, which the scribe employed as a pro- tection against insec adhering to many of the The square space with the the string is slightly to the left of the middle of each leaf. pages.—There is no ruling, hole f Dt Besides the ordi- nary danda 7 and double danda 44, smaller marks (half Punctuation, marks of erasure, ete. and quarter dandas) may be observed, serving as colons and commas. In the lower leaf a curious method of erasure is exemplified in leaf 2, 1.3, before the word sam- yagjianam ; it occurs frequently in Add. MS. 1699. 2, and seems to be peculiar to it, In this manuscript too corrections are covered with a yellow smear, e.g., the letters lauki near the beginning of leaf 2, 1.1. Emphatic words and marks are smeared with red, as is often the case. Writing. in this Series that fully deserve the title of “ancient Dies diem docet. given in the present Part, it will be seen that, of all our specimens, plates XXXIII. and LXIX. are the only instances of thoroughly Bengali These are perhaps the first manuscripts Bengali.” Viewed in comparison with the four examples writing. The character and date of these latter, however, lead us to assign them rather to a middle period. As for plates XVI., XVIL, and XXXI., we may now refer For the explanation of parames: mn of the Royal Asiatic Society (Hodgson Collection) by Professors epithet vinash{a, “ decayed,” instead of the usual vijaya, “ triumphant,” seems y (Archaeol. Survey of India, vol. iii., pp. 113, riti (Add. MS. 1699. 2) is a work (of 18 lea The plate These manuscripts form part of the collection made by a short work (of only five leaves) on the mystical value of the }a, which gives the different groups of consonants that are 3uddhas, and a full list of the vowels, which are said to be the germs” of svaretyadi r@javalt piireavat | srtmad govinda-pdla-devdanain vinashtardjye | ukrishnashtamyam. tithau | yatra sam 38 jyaishtha-dine 8 likhitam idam raretyadi see the Catalogue of Buddhist Sanskrit MSS. in no. 1. The to refer to the decline and shortly 5) ) by Ghanadeya on Bude 9b. Cowell and Eggeling S> lhist philosophy represents f, The colophon is as follows: sya || govinda-pala-devandm sam 387 srdmana (read srdavana)-dine them simply to that early variety of Devanagari, which we find from inscriptions to have been in common use in Bengal in the xith and xiith centuries (see Archaeol. Survey of India, vol. iii., plates xxxv.—xxxix.).—Distine- tively Bengali are the initial vowel #, and the very ra fri and fz, which of course could not occur as initials in any but a work on the letters: further, e, ai, 0, au, both initial and medial; the consonants h, y, 7, v, sh, which are all generally more or less angular at the bottom (7 is not yet dotted); kh, ch, %, dh, and to some extent /, which is often very like ¢, XVL, XVII, and X has the peculiar Beng Tn plates I., hardly one of these letter: li form. On the other hand, there are, as might be expected in such old documents, certain approximations to the established Deva: 11 type, par- Note tor’s hand, ticularly in the forms of p, however the regular Ben A, and the anusvara. ili p in the cor in samupa, leaf 2,1. 7; and also pr in the scribe’s hand, The characters for d and m we may call transitional, or midway between Devanagari and Beng characters for 7, both ini in pravesa, near the end of the same line. Archaic and peculiar are the al and medial. The former is an interesting development of the form found from the Ag a inscriptions onwards, a triangle of circular dots; as ards the latter, the Medial w is hard to di the word sukha, which occurs twice in leaf 2, 1. 1. shape of dhi is especially notable. tinguish from conjunct », e.g., in The consonants ¢ and bh, which often closely resemble one rly though not another, are of an very uncommon type. Leaf 1. a) amoghasiddhih | ya-va- (2) devinam v (3) akshobhyam vajrasatvena mudra- (4) yet | vaj akshobhya eva naya- rge vajr hime svara bhavanti | ka-karadi vajra ka-varge vairochanah | cha-varge akshobhyah | ta-varge satvah | imani vyafijanani bhavanti | a a1 it y yea) ratnasambhavah | ta-varge amitabhah | pa-va ua! riri! Ir I! e ai 1 o aut am aht satvah | a-karadi prajiia | vairochanam akshobhyena [read °ena] mudrayet | asatvah kena mudryate | pita putranyayenakshobhyena [read *ena] mudryate | aparatathagatanam (5) kah | dinabhedas tu kathyate | pratyishe vairochanah | madhyahne akshobhyah | praharatraye ratnasam- bhavah | aparahne amitabhah (6) prajt sare adi akshobhyah | arddharatray amoghasiddhih | tritiyapraharadipratyaisham yavat | vajrasatvah | diva vajrasatvah | nisi Leaf 2. (1) anyalaukika-suknapekshaya | tad eva vakyasukham idanifi chet | avishthanavasthayam api tada kim anu | kim iti vakya-mudrasukhanu- n vihaya | varamudradhigamanam | sarvvakaravaropetas anusaranam yogisvaranam | iha avaropetasii- nyata ya satpaditamahasukhad [read siitpa”] adhikatvena sansiddhasambiddha [read “baddha] HK e | sambhavati | vakyasukhavishayad anya- (4) daparam | tato[’Jdhikam | tato vakyasukhat | ko["]py esho [Jnyah sahajasukhasambhuh prabhavati | anavaranamahasukhasva- (5) yambha jianalaks h prakarshena pravartate || 11 || idanim sriguroh svadhishthanajiianaprabbavat | yatha sachchhishyasamtane (6) v otpadas tam aha | guror ityadi 1 guroh svadhishthanat | sriguroh svadhishthanajfianaprabhavat | bhavati nishpadyate vidu- (7) sham samupachitakusalamilanam —prajfiagraddhanusarinam 1 indriyalayah prathamatah | indriyanam prabhasvarapravesah samutpannat | [For the description of this and the following plate the Committee are indebted to Cecil Bendall, Esq., M.A., of Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge. ] ‘VYLIN VIVIVHONSPVY 4d 40 NOILOZTIOS d08€! GV— WHVAVNVWAVH ‘CPSOI'SIN GAV"alT AINN ‘SDCINENVO zee! av — yyw ldavSvLHSv TIXXX'T Prare LXXXII.—Sansxrir anp Praxair, 1. Camarines. University Liprary. App. MS, 1654. 2.—A.D. 1332. 2. Contrction or Dr. RAsenpraata Mrrra, or Catcurra.— XIV cr i, l [ \HE Ashtasabdika, a work on grammar, of the school of Panini, as may be seen from its termi- nology and from the frequent citations of that author. 3 ‘ On palm-leaves; about 13% in. 1 five lines on a page. Written by a seribe called Jatadhara Sarman, at a village the name of which appears to be Rashauli, in Nepal Samvat 452— A.D. 1339. It has been selected as forming an interesting link between the Bengali writing of plate LXXXI. and that of plates XXXIIT. and LXIX. The plate represents f. 35d. Punctuation, ete. The dandas have a peculiar twist Initial 7 and w are nearly the same as in modern Ben- to the left—The mark of deletion in 1. 1, fourth letter, gali (though without the flourish at the top); and so are is of a kind common in Nepalese manuscripts. the letters ch, t, ¢, d, dh, n, Pp, bh, y, and sh. The form Writing. The general character of the writing is of Z varies ; compare jalam in 1. 1 with the same word much less bold and legible than in plate LXXXI. It in I, 3, where it resembles n (see the description of plate has all the angularity of the Bengali type, as exem- | LXIX.). The letter d, which we called transitional in ed the description of plate LXXXI., is here of the usual as in plate LXIX.) or superseript. The shape of initial Bengali type ; and h, which was there pure Deyanagari, a is rather peculia plified in the letters 4, v, and 7, when single (s , being neither pure Devanagari nor | shows as yet only slight symptoms of change. The closely resembling any Bengali form as yet noticed. | a@nusvdra is written above the line, as in Deva ih, (1) “kah sa sa [deleted] va (Panini, vi. 1, 101] iti dirghah | kasyah nadyah jalam suddha[m] vahati || kabhyam stribhyam dharmakatha srinomi || kabhyah stribhyah srinomi [sic] || “sy vii. 3, 114) | kasyah striya dharmam idam | “ani hrasvam cha” [Pan. (2) chapa” [Pdn. vii. 3, 105] ity etvam || ay adesah k vii. 1, 52] iti sudagamah | atvabandhalopah | k devad’?] | syat ‘‘neram nadya- deyadattah ead bhartary (3) mnibhya” [Pan. vii. 3, 116] iti neram avriddhih | hrasvah | kasyam nadyam jalam suddha{m] vahati | etvam ayadesah | kayoh striyoh prativasati sobha | ulopah | kasu strishu prativasati (4) lakshmih | “ pafichamyas tasi” (Pan. v. 4, 44] na pumvad bhavah | chapanivrittih | “ku tiho[h]” [Pan. vii. 2, 104-5] ku-bhavah kutah | sarvam piirvvavatah [read vat] | “saptamyastat” [Pdan. wrongly quoted) kutra kada karhi sarvam ptrvavat | napumsake |ki- (5) masabdat svadayah | anena sarvanima uchyate | “svamor napumsakad” (Pan. vii. 1, 23] iti svamor luk | at kadeso bhavati | kim vadati brahmano [’Jyam | vibhakter abhav dvivachanadan kim ah ka iti ka- [The letter % (very faint), at the left-hand upper corner of the page, denotes apparently that the on.] case-suffixes of the dative, ablative, genitive and locative, ne, nasi, has, ni, are under diseu 2. Tue Ravanaviha or Setubandha, a poem ascribed to Pravarasena. On palm-leayes; about 133 in. by 2; five lines in a page. The leaves are numbered from 1 to 68, but there are really 69, as the Gains he ae sean Oe eee scribe has wrongly repeated the number This work has been edited by Professor Dr. 8. Gold- 5 ec Sti cae aes 5 schmidt (Strassburg, 1880), and the passage in the plate corresponds with Book vii., 454-51, of his edition. The notes, or commentary, are in a different ink from the text, and the writing is more modern. They are usually placed on the margins, but sometimes between the lines, and do not extend beyond page 65. As to the date of this manuscript, Dr. Rajendralala Mitra writes as follows, in the Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, no. vii., July 1880, p. 120 :— “The most important circumstance connected with the codex under notice is its date. This is given in Prakrit thus: siri lakkhanassa amadema suvahare raja veviie | posammi-sitranandasi supakshe chadamasa dinsvahe | vaninatheneti. Two of the words of this extract are not intelligible to me; but the doskhamvissagame likhitast purport of the whole is clear enoug! the 16th of the waxing moon in the month of Pausha (lit., when the sun sojourned in the constellation Pushya) of it means that the manuscript was completed by one Vaninatha, on Monday, ven in three words, dosa kha vissa, the first of the year of the king Lakshmana 102. The figures of the } Q ; mich dosa, means ‘the arms’=2; the second, kha, ‘the sky’=a cypher; and the third, vissa, ‘the universe , dosa, 3 2 They have, according to the usual rule, to be read from the right side. I have elsewhere noticed that the era of Lakshmana Sena begins from the year 1106 (Journal, vol. xlvii., p. 399), and that the date therefore corresponds akshmana Sena begins j ‘ with A.D. 1208.” ti t, combinations like ksh and and; but we must observe Tt is of course difficult to criticise a transcript which we do not fully unde t rit nor P: (1) that the language of the colophon, as given above, is neither Sanskrit 3 nev being unknown in the latter language; and (2) that the word visva (in ie \ te . and Roth sub voc, and Burnell’s South Indian Palacography, 2nd edit, p. 78). Pro- it vissa) seems never to mean 1, but always 13 (see Bohtli fessor Dr. Jacobi, of Miinster, also disagrees with Dr. Rajendralala Mitra’s translation on several grounds, of which the principal are: (1) the difficulty of the expression “the 16th of the waxing moon,” for the 16th of the month that the explanation “when the sun sojourned in the constella- t “in Pushya” would be expressed by pisammi, not posamint (which is equivalent to pausie), and (6) be 1t the moment of the full moon of Pausha, the moon herself is in the constellation Pushya, and the sun is 180° off, at the diametrically opposite part of the ecliptic; (3) that the 16th of Pausha, A.D. 1208, fell, not on a Monday, but on a Wednesday. All these considerations, combined with the metrical incorrectness of the lines and the difficulties of the learned transcriber himself, render it, we would be the first day of the waning moon; tion Pushya” is untenable, (a) because in F UU nt before us an accurate copy of this interesting colophon. On and with think, almost certain that we have not at pre merely palaeographie grounds, we should be inclined to assign the manuscript to the xivth century; this conclusion the word-numerals in the last line accord, if they be correctly read as 1302, and if they indicate the Saka year, corresponding with A.D. 1380 (in which year, however, the 16th of Pausha fell on a Thursday). Writing. The forms of the letters in this manuscript are almost, if not entirely, identical with those of no. 1. cripr. Just as the above description was going to press, we received vol. V., part IL, of Dr. Mitra’s “ Notices of Sanskrit MS his manuscript and a transcript of the colophon, differing in some respects from that quoted above. which contains a lithe uphie facsimile of the last leaf of 7 The impossible supakshe is corrected into supakkhe, and vénindthena is altered into vanindthena, which ought, however, according to the facsimile, to be vdnindthena. The word chadamasa appears as chamdaghasra.—Dr. Mit supposed date falls to the ground for the following reasons. (1) The somewhat ambiguous character which he transcribes skha, certainly does not contain kh at all. It is found expressing mba, su or sva (see the plate, ll. 1 and 3), and mu, but is distinctly different from kh, which never has a top. (2) Whatever be the value of the rather doubtful letter rendered g in *agame, there is clearly a long a between it and the following m; so that, if the character be really g (as seems most probable), the end of the compound word is not *dgame but ‘game = grame, in which case the supposed date would be in reality the name of the village in which the manuscript was written—We observe that Dr. Mitra has vitiated his transcript by repeatedly mistaking the form of initial a, firstly for sw (for the real sw see 1. 1 of the plate, in the word swanta), and secondly for nsv (the word which he gives as dinsvahe being really diahe = divase)—These remarks suffice to show that the interpretation of this colophon is a problem the solution of which remains with those who have access to the manuscript itself. [The Committee have to thank Dr. Rajendralala Mitra, the owner of the manuscript, and the Rev. Dr. Hoernle, the Philological Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, for this photograph, the best of four that were most kindly placed. at their disposal. The extreme faintness of the bluish-grey ink, and the damaged state of the manuscript, rendered it impossible to obtain better impressions, and the photograph of the last page is almost illegible. ] LXXXIL ey ASV, pay ereen ie sewei : AN SSIS ube ce ; Asis 5/4 Site ably, Re ee aba olld seus} _assll5blgp ba el, LWsosdisvlan bel : JELLY {ey cce$ Siy_aEysla sls Sa sSysl_ kos Ss has a he bas ice alsff yall Nalsled arsallcaye oat iho. Bal ee Js|dsJ pL ttle a i Boe Zonas yak ABU BAKR AN-NAISABURI, AL-MABSUT. A.D. 1109-10. GOTHA, DUCAL LIB., MS. ARAB. 1149. Pirate LXXXIII.—Aranic, Gorna. Ducat Lisrary. MS. Aras, 1149.—A.D. 1109-10. NB aaa of the Mabsit, a work on jurisprudence by ’Aba Bakr Muhammad ‘ibn ‘Tbrahim ‘an-Naisabiri, who died A.H. 318 (A.D. 930). On paper, about 8% in. by 5%; 268 leaves, the first of which is blank. Written in A.H. 503 (A.D. 1109-10) by Giimiish (Silver) bint ‘Abd- “Allah ‘ar-Rimiyah, a Turkish woman of Asia Minor, who must have been no bad Arabic scholar to make so correct and elegant a transcript of a difficult legal treatise. See Pertsch, Die Arabischen Handschriften der herzoglichen Bibliothek zu Gotha, iiter Bd, 2. Heft, p. 358. The colophon, which is almost wholly unpointed, is as follows: (sic) 45 at yw ee bbs dues MS all (Ee (ews) OS ee: Sy blocs ah 5 aM Sole (sic) whe U-tny that is, 3 ibs. doy yl oN Secon OS C25, CE ee Pow ee rene oe cs Gather: Of ten leaves. Forms of Letters, ete. The muhmilah is used with Ruling. Very faint side-lines, and lines for the the letters r and s, i es (1.9). In 1.2 we find ¢ sub- writing, evidently produced by the aid of the mistarah. cd S Punctuation. @, or some similar figure, at the end script, to distinguish reeee)e) from Lux \y. Final | otra Benen coy ae ae ib, : sometimes projects a little below the line. Kasrah is Writing. A. fine, elegant Nashi. The headings of f feaec Tis cat sally bef ; i = aS en slante right, especially before , c, as in & the chapters are in a somewhat larger character (as in OHNE ee DIET SDD LeADNS oO ce eaciace 1. 2). The diacritical points are frequently omitted, and (1.1). Gazma is either + or *. vowels occasionally added. [In describing this plate the Committee have to acknowledge the kind assistance of Dr. W. Pertsch, Ducal Librarian at Gotha.] Mi ded TD pies cy toy ale Cent aalpy/__—yle SS oe Siok Wy AeLLVolyty b " sAisre Hl peel aya cbr) ay BL 2 pre Seo lt : miipless pel oe aden les A As BSG Sl her ral) p YF BE 1BN KHALDUN, TARJUMAN AL-IBAR—A.D.1401? BRIT. MUS., ADD. MS. 23,272. Prare LXXXIV.—Aranie Brirish Muspum. Apprrionat 23 —A.D. 1401? ihe fourth volume of the Tarjuman ‘al-Ibar, or Universal History, of ‘Abd ‘ar-Rahman ‘ibn Muhammad ‘ibn Khaldiin, who died A.H. 808, A.D. 1406 (see his life, prefixed to Les wilh), (hat paper; about 11 in. by 7$; 268 leaves. For the contents of the volume see Catal. Codd. MSS. Orientt. ey eer 5 : - ; : 5 : i A Prolégoménes d’Ibn Khaldoun traduits en Francais et commentés par M. de Slane, t. i. p. is qu in Museo Britannico asservantur: Pars Secunda, Codices Arabicos amplectens, p. 565, no. meexxxviii. This manuscript, and its companion, Add. 23,271, seem to have been transcribed for the author in Egypt,—where ‘Ibn Khaldin settled in A.H. 784, A.D, 1382,—before the year 788, A.D. 1386 (see the remarks of Dr. Rieu in Catal, Mus. Brit., loc. cit., p. 568). The genealogical tables of the various dynasties were inserted in both volumes by the author himself; and he has also added many mar- ginal notes, continuing the history down to about the year 803, A.D. 1400-1. The plate represents f. 2084, containing the table of the Ghiari dynasty in Ghaznah, Khora note on their successors in India, down to the year 720, A.D. 1320; with some notice of Su an and India, and a long a Muhammad Shih, about the years 740-50, A.D. 1339-49, who was visited by the famous African traveller “Ibn Batitah; and of the invasion of India by Taimir, or Timir, in 1398. With this monarch “Ibn Khaldin had an interview shortly after, at Damascus, where he was detained from December 1400 till March 1401 (see Les Prolégoménes d'Ibn Khaldoun, t. i., p. 1xxxvi., sqq-)- Gatherings. Of eight and ten leaves. The quires times adding vowels, especially in proper names. “Ibn are numbered in the upper left-hand corner with both Khaldin’s own hand is that of a Maghribi who has arithmetical figures and words, commencing on f. la | trained himself to write in the F ryptian fashion. Ac- with § and a5, but these double signatures go only cordingly he points 4 g and % § in the usual way; as far as f, 42a, 1 and sxs\,; after this we but his ¢asdid is more commonly } ribi than Eastern. ee For example, in the first three lines of the note at the find only words, the last nature legible being az). ob, on f, 251a. Each page has a catchword. | foot of the page, we find Lyell, > and Bey for Writing. The scribe writes a good though inelegant fase! dy and »\ ¥" Nashi, often omitting the diacritical points, and some- or a onwsl cml oy deste | (left) ones! ow YW (sic) Se = ene Ls y oo cpa Che 5 als « Cr Ose cpl Mc 2) Sly (centre) 4 ‘ Wetlay Sears Dyed EW Xesie cos Or oY pe cys) Le 3 (right) : ) a fs Sphere ce wet copo) Ont CP (ah (sie) eee ste op eens) §1,8 Col (to left) 3\,8 Col (to right) mes _ 24) (left-hand 10) A> (Ge Ue) corner) asi) oes one! iby (foot of page) caste eyo!) Gk g) pod Aw Me Ten AW sil Ay ab My plell she Ge yal sya (outer ma 3 p \ * ) rN Wh NAS Ay (sic) pets) evel) Gaed ee coll pol lyst 5 os : a bay \ FENN (calles, Abe | Realy YESS SE ole og) ele pee - os ia IG 5%, chils cepts wlky Fpte We sly iy ve Spe poste tee mes : Nees (canoer ; Led lal Speen eyo) hs ae ore! OU os ceo) GS occl, GO) ude Bxe dos ele deny Syecty cwoll Ye adl ep eel c9jy9 oe ER F ; ee : : ; a Me ) le LAY) EAS So pe) \ay\ 3) ok pil cy ES \Nl jot AF Oe cu) Le pe fy ‘ oe Re we onal \ ; oH, oe cpl Oh aay) sae es ley fie opty Or pes wn) 3 Syl) aie jb, die 2s ots ppoll Ole Ye GEL op Gylee roll Cbs E e ) ope croll dle sax ea 4s oe e)) aly CNG ol, anny eyo) Heb ool) GLE son dy, Uy ntl See AEE opty Gull Je al Shee ee ees a 2 AL adil pe Sle eee ew te Wet 8 (ie) ga eS os Sete Gel Me lb! Sane : etic ae alex ot BLS) pel oe yet) ete) er cree croll Geet BA ge WIC AH 4 Be, leh) SEA A Tee eee Bae Be ord ee3y)) ays eeewe)) SoU Leal! 3 lush GW, (top of page) ay lb oaste hs CAL eee Qlblu! pts wl, ole ost Al LL al ol dle eR 5 . ; : “\\ pwc @ ; +\ wr Rag GCL! los ea pip onal ao Cyehl ecb ) Gyre ere doko oy 3 web lal, ed! Ys ee zg 53 r ‘ insls Lym ply wo Ay oes ‘ys ly Ge GE 3S Sy oy sexe wr rte) pds AN oles gj) deel! ledesd Ute in Veh \ ee, ec 3 2 PSanve: ee a arcaiere he Jodie Seem tayo Gy eh Se ‘ EA Sas. ete itor ie i as PB al ile) dizer pb lrd 9 Shoal ae 2 peoleighabpbli aa Me iy Rlepontcs, birdies é Sire, eS Te alae isifo Ne tare ‘Fsideos, WAAS. : : 38 pes si j Pas Ki <% oS A son aries So MEE : Pe toi205) Vehols eal Sra cS Bicdieie \, peas yao MLN Ae rad weldh Ba 29 “ Selddyles laactcsy Ky feat dtl & PC. cde Eat Sic As us Ino . ANS i. detghe Me; ie ae ze oben alg B NASR-ALLAH IBN MUHAMMAD, KALILAH WA-DIMNAH.—A.D.1259. BERLIN, ROYAL. LIB.,MS.OR. FOL.106. Prarn LXXXV.—Prrstan. Bertix. Roya Lrprary. MS. Orrent. ry For. 106.—A.D. 1259. ge celebrated work entitled Kalilah wa-Dimnah, translated from the Arabic version of ‘Abd- ‘allah ‘ibn ‘al-Mukaffa’ (murdered A.H. 142 = A.D. 759) into Persian, about A.H. 538-9= A.D. 1143-5, by “Abu ‘-Ma‘ali Nasr-'allah ‘ibn Muhammad ‘ibn ‘“Abd~'al-Hamid ’al-Ghaznawi for the Ghaznawide sultan Bahram-shih (see De Sacy in the Notices et Extraits des Manuscrits, t. x., p. 94 sqq., and in the preface to his Calila et Dimna, pp. 39-42; and Rieu, Catalogue of the Persian MSS. in the British Museum, vol. ii, p. 745). On old, yellowish paper; about 11 in. by 7; 166 leaves (some of which are more modern supplements). Written at Khujandah in Ma-wara-’ by Muhammad ‘ibn Muhammad ‘ibn ‘Omar ’as-§ an-nahr, or Transoxania, abati (from Sabat near Samarkand and Khujandah), A.H. 658 = A.D. 1259. The colophon is as follows: (jos, a) Giso SO Ene i) > oasy gy deste CALI ay, ken, Jl Gel) Ghetll Chall Cuyill onl coy (le Spend 5 S56 Olah, Geceasl! seen voll, a abl se ell QC) aeete pasty call of excl, Dol) Cae GI) yates Gl Jesh, ped é Jalal sei peal © Gop Glee oly Ley Le de ala ail Wb I> cypecll ESA) CEL dere, Bpty Ser [alll] sol, oa gd be 5S SlLol Gol, feel! Oeste Ape, de Fybedl & 3 doa, A Bley epmmeey led S ie. The words marked as doubtful have also been read ox yee and a pal. The figure before the date seems to be due to some blunder of the scribe. The plate represents f. 122, corresponding with the text published in the Notices et Evtraits, t. x., p. 179, 1. 6— joe sew We 1 Gatherings. Of eight leaves. written SS. The Persian ¥ or & is never found, Writing. Nashi, with some ligatures, e.g., 2 but » and » occur, the points being however some- dé, 1. 6; Vb, 1. 11; .), 1. 14; especially in the setae ree * Bae ‘ S) times placed thus —, as in Slow ils 835 oS ylan Ib case of explici and the like, where a curiously inter- oe 1.10; 5 is often used where in so old a manu- o> 33 twined Thultht is aunpoyyed (comagene the words BS script we might have expected to find >, e My ih Lik, c= - % ? e.g. ? 2) > in | The dia- sy i Ih critical points are often wanting, but vowels and other orthographie signs are frequently added (not always correctly), particularly in Arabic and other quotations, jst Ne Paci yey, (Ge 1. 17.—The tanwin of dammah is ~~ or “3 e.g. 2) YU =) ° 8 xls Csi, Lo,c, 11. Kasrah is often a perpendicular = —) stroke. The izafat is expressed by a kasrah, as in which are written in red, as in Il. 2, 10, 11, 16. olleve Cus yt 1.5; My ait, 1 9; 4 sif,>, 1.13; Punctuation. Occasionally ¢ or V at the end of a BO a half-verse or clause, as in Il. 1, 16, Frequently a small but Bua e cua a by a hamzah, as in > > Aye and space is left blank at the end of a clause. | es may be observed in Il. 4, 5, 16. 7 serv ; sf a 80 \ ic BO) fed) L » by way of may serve, as in Sx ierenie! 4s ouls Ci les bi, Cyt AG ia 1. 5; in the case of @ maddah alone Eras Forms of Letters, distinction from 3 £ > ; <> or S is often | Observe oF for os pases (6) opal Leys ie) byey 6 MBL a) (sie) a5 Koc Cl) peal g Eh, ol ab by) @ acJy> UI Cages! 3) los pes) adie 42 ste Cal spedto Spy yp Glee! (9) (Seb dy ? Cd Syd Syl lew Sym y yd ee Gis bal, aunts bar. (8) Cua 5! Sp (sic) QS! eS Capalyd > [deleted ,,] SK Cd, Cyc, ils 5) Syed plas DS Cts Pa 4 “ A \ eh) ay Swed Ss Ort iy 2 _A\,e0 cok errs oy ay eS Pye {altered into J) le Cue ype re (sie) ey Ces (6) Vred Uli ady Se dy & S she sil, o 8a) (ie) Lnsiny Wy Codd 2 Cmods 5 3 GQ) (Bic) etd 9) Cod Oolard pris 3) Gb > cles one (10) aN Tear Wa ee ee clesT se (ie) stan FF Hb 9 th CSS oS eae ote 3! a1) Seed LW) & ye Sy cern & aS ols oleh Ve pay C3, VL wlokss odd GLE Coy gh? ES 2 sh Ghd Koby CH) C5) wr 7 Sle glad Cicll CaS, (12) ae (13) \ BIG {es oS nt se he Ee i ea p> Re) ety S dy OT wr he es Sn lp Sys 2 roy! (Sid) Eye, lke (15) py W [deleted S] oth (2 Gs (16) =<) »)y Cte 5 ed) @D) She ely Caste fly ules [In describing this plate the Committee have to acknowledge the kind assistance of Dr. W. Pertsch, Ducal Librarian at Gotha. ] LXXXVI. ‘A.D.1221-1819. ARABIC COINS. BRITISH MUSEUM. Prate LXXXVI.—Arasic Corns. British Musrum.—aA.D, 1221-1819. eS coins haye been selectec and described by Mr. Stanley Lane Poole, for the purpose of exemplifying the history and development of the Nashi character from the seventh century of the Hijrah down to the present day. This plate takes up the history of Arabic epigraphy, as exhibited on coins, at the point where Plate X Il. left off. In that Plate the developments of Kafi w ting were traced down to the time when the Naskhi character began everywh to supersede it. In this Plate are exhibited the principal varieties of Nask’ 6 ing, as shown by coins during six centuries (from the xiiith to the xixth) in the leading Mohammadan kingdoms from India to Spain. Completeness would be attainable only with a series of Plates; all that can be here attempted is to give a selection of the principal types. Nos. 1 to 3 are examples of the Egyptian coinage, from the first Naskhi coin (A.H. 622=A.D. 1 25, the or of no. 19 on Plate XXII.) to the Turkish conquest, under the dynasties of the ’Aiyabis and the Bahri and Burjt Mamluks, The ligature of the 3\ in Sy on no. 3 is noteworthy. Nos. 4 to 7 represent the North African and Spanish coinage from the xiiith to the xvitith century. Nos. 4 and 5 are the sequel to no, 14 in Plate XXII.; and no. 6 is the successor of no. 16 in that Plate; whilst no. 7 succes: the name of yuo 622 (ap, 1225), ALT *Aiytibr, ’Al-Kamil. (Alexandria), in ndariyah Oby. Area. AB) Rev, Area, vel pol yall delet! LL! potieall pine dest glad! yl ecapell seal all oS glol Marg. ahay| alll yay dese al II at 9 AF pall de nqed GL gray gad | (Kur. ix. 83.) | gM G38 pel etl all pt ots (cic) oxtl te 2 sGIY jlaall Slax 2. AV. A. 752 (a.p, 1351). ’Al-Kahirah (Cairo), in Egypt. Mam- lak, Ist or Bahri dynast ‘lih Salih. | Oby. al Rey pl We | Be ye Wall Ly (Kur. iii.122.) ct! et ohh | dest all ald He gad) Wall ce jy aba al : ead (eic) gil Has Jase poll! of] Bleemy enady ab (sic) all 3, AV. Aat. 914 (Ap, 1508). ’Al-Kahirah (Cairo Mam- lik, 2nd or Burjt dynasty, Kangith ’al-Ghini (6th year). in Egypt. Oby. ial Rey, ol! Pub ree) b 1359) ell] | A Jy ast ell ails nie aie 4. AV, [sat 665-7 = A.p. 1267-9.) [Marocco.] Muwahhid (Almo- hade), ’Al-Wathik. Oby, Area. pan! pees all jor ally dest de all do pies) al ot; Pee | all Jey dee Rev. Area, 2531 plil gall wy Marg. dell y! BY | Stl! ozegell eel cae gl Wee | oil all as cp Gate | . Date uncertain. [North African, Muwahhid.] Oby. ayy ay Rev. tey al A dee 5)! Webes) OSS ah 9 a5 9 leat gdgall Gharnatah (Granada), in 6. AT. [A.H, 801-820 = a.v, 1898-1417.] Sp Bani Nasr, Yisuf IIL. Oby, Aron, gall Late Rey, Area, ott! all as Iypeel Ipeal ays all gaat baby Ipales oat gf yt wil all 1a sly Desleal or Ging: ox Cla (Kur. ifi, 200.) seals all 20) pad gl a te Marg. four times repeated. Marg. all Yom | abl | tion | ab twan (‘Tetuan), in Maroceo. Sharif, A. au. 1195 (4.d. 1781). 2nd or Filali dynasty, Mohammad. nee 2 In centro, damghah, . R.A Oby. 20. MR. 4 21. AT. Oby. aa e ® whe ag ds HW. 1191 (a.p. 1777). Baghchah-sarai, in the Krim. Krin khan, Shahingirai (4th year). Rey. Tughra of ob Wont deel oe Above, damghah. H. 777 (4. . 1375). No mint [‘Transoxiana]. Timir and Mahmid Khan, Tn contre, ormamont. Rev. ( olka, wets lb pee ad a! AU) es fess, (8)ape po ps he The words s+ ~ are an enigma A, 1221 (a, 1806). Bukha Haidar, Rov. (a7 S0sa ‘HODIHD Wav AB GSLNES3Y¥d Si 3ivid SIHL) Walvsnuar ‘9 O04 V9HIS—'NOILGIMDSNI NVOTIS AHL Prate LXXXVII.—Heerew. Tue Stoam In: JRIPTION AT JERUSAL -—Circa 700 B.C. Rae inscription was discovered by the German architect Mr. Conrad Schick in June 1880, It is cut in a hollow or niche of th e wall of the ancient conduit which leads from the Birket Sitti Maryam, or Virgin Mary's Pool, on the eastern side of Jerusalem, to the so-called Pool of Siloam on the southern side (see Robinson, Bibl. Researches in Palestine, 2nd ed. 1856, vol. i 333. This niche is pla meas ies about 27 inches in length by 26 in breadth, with a depth of 1} in. +) Pp. 333-343). sed on the right-hand side of the conduit, at nearly nine yards from its mouth, and The inscription, of six lines, is in Hebrew, in a very ancient form of the Semitic alphabet, though later than the stélé of king Mésha‘, and may be ascribed to the reign of Hezekiah, towards the year 700 B.C. The plate is a reproduction of a photograph (half the real size) taken from a cast of the inscription in Germany, and kindly sent to Profes The conduit in question “is cut through the rock,” says Mr. Say through the southern spur of the hill on which the Mosque of Omar stands. The Virgin's pool is just outside St. Stephen's Gate, and therefore a little to the 2, “and so forms a subterranean pa sage the Haram. The Pool of Siloam, on the other hand, lies on the eastern north-east of the northern wall of side of the ancient valley of Tyropoeon, at a consider- able depth below the summit of the Temple hill. ‘The passage connecting the two pools has been explored by Lobinson, Tobler, Colonel Warren, and others. A ecording to Colonel Warren, its length is 1,708 feet (5694 yards: footnote, Robinson makes it about 586 yards), though the e from the one pool to the other in a direct line is only 368 yar The passage, however, is not straight; it winds considerably, and there are several culs de sac in distar its course, from which we may infer that the engineering knowledge of its excavators was not sufficient to prevent them from m: » their way. As we shall see, the newly found inscription shows that the passage was excavated from both ends, the workmen meeting in the middle, like the excavators of the Mont Cenis tunnel. The height varies greatly, but the width is pretty uniform.” In the following transcription, letters which are or Wright by Professor Socin of Tiibingen. Literature: A. Socin, Fine neue Entdeckung in Jeru- salem, in the Z ift des Deutschen Palaestina -Vereins, 1880, Bd iii., 54; A. H. Sayce, The Ancient Hebrew Inscription discovered at the Pool of Siloam in Jerusalem, in the Quarterly Statement of the Palestine Exploration Fund, July 1881; H. Guthe, Ueber die Siloahinschrift, in the Z. d. D. P. V., 1881, Bd iv., p. 250; E. Kautzsch, Die Siloahinschrift, ibid., pp- 102 and 261, and also in the Beilage zur Allgemeinen Zeitung, 29 April 1881, no. 119 ; Selah Merrill, The Siloam Inscription, in the American Antiquarian and Biblical Journal, 1881, vol. iv., ie (ibs notices by J, Derenbourg in the Comptes Rendues de PAcadémie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres, 1881, 4eme sér., t. ix, pp. 97, 199 (cf. Revue des Etudes Juives, 1881, t. ili., p. 161), and by J. Halévy, as reported in the Revue Critique, 17 Oct. 1881, no. 42, p. 292 (ch Journal Asiatique, 1881, t. xvii., p. 2); letters and articles in the Athenaeum, 1881, and in the Quarti rly Statements of the P. B. FP. for Oct. 1880, and July and Oct, 1881, by Schick, Sayce, Neubauer, Taylor, Besant, C. R. Conder, Warren, Shapira, and others; articles by Neubauer in the Revue des Etudes Juives, 1881, t. ii., no. 4, p. 333, and T. K. Cheyne in the Academy, 16 July 1881, p. 53. not clear or uncertain are marked with a stroke. The asterisks indicate approximately the number of letters missing. se TS Tap 937 aA eon PWN Op Dewees som maw why yaw bs ws mn T-ONeees eee e JOD 2 -TT o o -yn byw @) sy yay gma ws ph swe scoaynn 1m mapa No) Ts AON) nN. 727an NOI - 2 - DT (5) spasm ows oby Sen ont on nex on (6) (1) [Here was effected] the breaking through. ATAPI # # « (1) And this was the matter (or account) of the breaking through. Whilst yet [the miners were lifting up] . (2) the pick one towards the other, and whilst yet there were three cubits to [be cut through, there was heard] the voice of one call- (3) ing to the other, for there was a fissure (?) in the rock on the right hand And on the day of the (4) breaking through, the miners hewed one towards the other, pick against pick; and went (or flowed) (5) the waters from the source to the pool over (a distance of) one thousand and two hundred cubits. And one hund- (6) red cubits was the height of the rock over the head of the miners The inscription seems to have been carved on the The characters are evidently of later date than those and show wall near the point where the excavators met, working of the Moabite inscription of king Mésha‘, from the opposite extremities of the tunnel, and so com- | more practice and dexterity in writing as well as greater elegance. Observe the sweep of 5 9} and %; and the small hooks of } and ¥, which have almost the character of flourishes. The three strokes of 7 have a tendency to converge. D and % are unfortunately wanting. Gene- rally speaking, the forms of the letters in this inscription pleted the conduit. It is merely the private record of the workmen, and has no official character whatever ; otherwise it would have been in a more conspicuous place, and very differently worded. Compare, by way of contrast, an official record of the same kind (from Saldae, ) in the Corpus Inserip- , no. 2728; Wilmanns, the modern Bougie in Algi tionum Latinarum, t. viii. Afr 5 : iy Exempla Inseviptt. Latt., no. ologische Zeitung, 1870, Bd xx 5; Mommsen in the Archae- PERaos agree remarkably with those of the oldest Hebrew seals and gems, of the viiith and viith cent. B.C. (see the accompanying Table); and we cannot therefore be very far wrong in ascribing it to the time of king Hezekiah, kind are recorded in 0.—The interpunc- ole point some of whose undertakings of this 2 Kings xx. 20, 2 Chron. x: tion is the same as on the Moabite after each word.—As to the orthog may remark the constant omission of the long (seriptio defectiva), as in WN, 1X, DANI, NAS w? have aphy in ge ¥, and even in 5, where we should rather expected Dy, as standing for yaum; the more so as we actually find ‘TV2 (for ‘aud) and S¥yan (for mausa, from S¥) was?’a). In MYND and wx> the retention of the ¥ is quite correct, as these words stand for CYNON, mi’atain, and rash, rash. The final vowels are indicated by M1, as in MJ, MAS, MM, *2, yn, 2D7, 135 Line 1. The first two words form a sort of title or heading, as is shown by the unusually large space after them. 13p3 does not occur in the Bible (though the cognates 4?] and MP3 are found there). The Arabic and Syriac supply us with 43, Joo), and (4, @ hole ; 2. The (is) the so we may vocalise the new word 2/3 or Mp. three missing letters may have been MNt this breaking through, or Mt) is completed, or es) on the day of. Line 2. There is a doubt here as to the syntactical connection. From ty in 1. 1 to wo by in 1. 3 may be a single sentence, as we have attempted to translate Site or there may be a stop at WW bys inl. 2. The damaged state of the stone renders it almost impossible to decide, —In the Bible {12 means an ave (Deut. xix. 5, xx. 19), and perhaps a chisel (1 Kings vi. 7), here a pick ov pick- ave.—It is difficult to fill up the gap, as the damaged letter after 49 may be 5, 5, or 2. The y after the lacuna is probably the last letter of YW. Line 3. nn is probably to be read NYJ (2 Kings ix. 37, kéthibh) ; there appears to be no reason for the omission of the final 4, if the carver pronounced the word My (40.7).—The word 71 does not occur in the Bible, and its pronunciation and meaning are both uncertain, though the context seems to indicate the sense of a crack or fissure. Line 4. np is to be read N4P%, infin. of 17R, not np? for N87p?. The accompanying Table traces the history of the Hebrew Alphabet from the time of Mésha‘, king of Moab, circa 890 B.C., down to the xth cent. of our era. Cols. 1 and 2 exhibit the ancient Moabite and Phoenician alphabets, from the sté circa 890 B.C., and from bronze fragments found in Cyprus and ascribed to circa 700 B.C the alphabet of the Siloam inscription; col. 4 that of ancient Jewish seals and gems, roughly assigned to B.C. 700-400.—Col. 5 shows the letters which appear on Jewish coins from the 2nd cent. B.C. to A.D. 135 Col. 6 exhibits the oldest forms of the square character, These in- of king Mesha‘, O.—Col. 3 contains from grajiti in grottoes around Jerusalem. scriptions were discovered and copied by M. Clermont- Ganneau, and communicated by him, under certain con- ditions, to Professor Euting.—Ool. 7 characters from inscriptions at Jerusalem, Kefr Bereim, contains similar and Alma, vaguely ascribed to the first four centuries of In col. 8 we have the alphabet of the catacombs of Venosa, 3d-5th cent. A.D.—The alphabet of col. 9 is supplied by the earthenware bowls from Babylon, 5th— Tta cent. A.D.—Col. 10 shows us the forms in use on our era. Jewish papyri from ’al-Faiyam in Egypt, probably of the 8th cent: A.D.—Col. 11 is supplied by in Brindisi, of the 9th cent. A.D.—Ools, 12 and 13 are from tombstones from Aden, the former dated A.D. 717 (?), the latter A.D. 916.—Col. 14 exhibits the alphabet of the codex Babylonicus Petropolitanus, dated A.D. 916.— Beside this is placed in col. 15 the alphabet of manu- scripts in the Jewish synagogue at Kae Fung Foo, in China, as published by the “Society for promoting According to Professor riptions at Christianity among the Jews.” Delitzsch, Jiidische Poesie, p. 58 sqq., these manuscripts cannot have been written before A.D. 1446, but they were evidently copied from a volume of not much later date than the codex Babylonicu St. Petersburg, the forms of which were carefully imite bes.— Col. 16 is taken from the gravestone of Yehoshua’ ben Yehidah of Prague, dated in Tebeth ’wn = A.D. 941, and his daughter Ssnw (Schindl ?), the wife of Rabbi Gabrvél, who died in A.D. 980. ed by the s [For the above description the Committee are mainly indebted to Professors Euting and Noeldeke. The Table of Alphabets is by the skilful hand of the former scholar. | THE HEBREW ALPHABET. Moatite, Phoen; Hebrey, Jewish Jewish. Ollest Tenw Cata= | Earthy He R | 5/44 49 \4 59944 q AQ|Q9/7a laajao|os x sajss5ols BY 4 1444] 44)494 99494907149 epreretsa fa 14 let la s n ;o| |e 226 Vier! jmoly lpi ” AAA | AA Ad I [Lata mesanag ore fore |e | YY 7 pay 9] 4ap29 [54/5 |> COME UVEIL LILLY LUG Sb IL | yt SANIT Pls ee abbeys opps bpp Ji in LEST Ia | pp 12 4] FFE] 154 DPPIVU |v2 dove! = jvulvolpolwn CMO CPS SHS) PA YISDY wiv |yyy jy IM NG ooh J sSaae9 |9 SOs [aryP ArT AY KY [ysyis) yy] SV Sy FPTPPIPP FA PriPP Poe rRary| pple 4 ASST A494 Ao paldslaaisafs i i iS ay wiles MEV WwolyEly Iv Por Dw ww] x nix ttlxx«/x+ oe Minn nhin |inin ipa 7 & go 70. ZA 72 13 | 74. 15. i) AH /AA adie® alte Hninninstise in nAio is |AAin v 9 ig “7 Gsiwvwk we gqueywnu — [oy 9 man a] 3e@JaAKRwedae NS heeiaee) i 2 2 7 5 | 6 TRILINGUAL INSCRIPTION FROM SARDINIA——BC.160-150. R. ACCADEMIA DI TORINO. Pirate LXXXVITI.—Puoenicran, Latin And Gre Royan ACADEMY OF Turty.—160-150 B.C. fl ese cae inscription, incised on the base of a bronze pillar, ornamented with a laurel wreath, many leaves of which were found with the other fre inscription is about 1 ft. 4 in., and its breadth about 23 in. ements. The length of the The Latin and Greek texts are com- plete; the Phoenician is slightly defective at the end of the first and the beginning of the second line. The Phoenician characters are of the Carthaginian or Punic type, but rather stiff and ungainly, owing to the carver having used a small chisel instead of a graver. It was discovered at Santuiaci, near Pauli Gerrei, in Sardinia, in February 1860, and is now deposited in the house of the Royal Academy of Turin. Literature : Giov. Spano, Illustrazione di una base votiva in bronzo con iscrizione trilingue Latina, G'reca e Fenicia, in the Memorie della R. Accademia delle Sc e di Torino, 1863, ser. ii t. xx. 2, pp. 87-102, with an appendix by Amedeo Peyron, pp. 103-114; Levy, Ueber eine lat-gr.-phin. Inschrift aus Sardinien, in the Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlindischen Gesellschaft, 1864, Bd xviii., p Ritschl and Gildemeister, Dreigprachige Inschrift von Sar- dinien, in the Eheinisches Museum fiir Philologie, 1865, Bd xx., p. 1 sqq. For other items see Schroeder, Die Phinizische Sprache, p. 249, and Mommsen in the Corpus Inseriptionum Latinarum, Sardinia, no. 7856. Our read- ing of the Latin text is due to the eminent scholar last named. Cleon salarifus] soc[iorum] s[ervus] Aescolapio Merre donum dedit lubens | merito merente "AckdymG Mnpph dvdbeua Bopov eorn|ae Kdéov 6 emt tov Add» kata mpdoraypa “ Salari(us) solvendum esse, non salariorum simili- terve, ut viris doctis adhuc placuit, et ex si ‘ipturae ‘ae nomi- ratione sequitur (nam aetate liberae rei publ nativum declinationis secundae et in nummis et alibi passim ita efferri nemo ignorat, nec minus salariorum similiaque non ita per compendium scribi solere) et ex verborum collocatione (nam socios salarios, non salarios socios usus legitimus requirit) et ex Graecis in quibus Agi de salinis publicis populi Romani a publicanorum societate redemptis multi obser- est 6 emt trav addr. poas a2 wy 2) myo od pun jbo y2 jowntayn nsben vay nwa wp Np] (1) To the lord, to Eshmiin Mérréh, an altar of bronze, weighing a hundred 100 pound which vowed Cleon Sh-h-s-g-m, who is at the saltworks. (2) his voice (and) healed him. sons of Hamlan. The Phoenician or Punic is obviously the principal text of the three, being the most conspicuous on the altar-base and the fullest in its deta Cleon, though a slave (whence he has no genealogy), was a man of some means, as his costly gift shows, and the manager of these saltworks, The dedication having taken place long after the termination of the first Punic war, when Sardinia passed into the hands of the Romans (B.C. 238), it is somewhat surprising that the dedicator should still date it according to the years of the Carth: (or Judges, Heb. ray). It must be remarked, how- inian Sufetes ever, that he does so only in that portion of it which was composed in an “unknown tongue.” This shows that the dedication took place prior to the outbreak of the third Punic war (B.C. 149) As most of the words in thi scription are familiar to the Hebraist, the following remarks may sutlice by way of commentary. Line 1. MN, as applied to the deity, signifies the “protector of travellers” (Heb, cox qy), and corre- sponds to vos as an epithet of Zeus. In Hebrew it would be represented by a Pi*el participle m4, but the Latin Merre and Greek Mypp point to the pro- nunciation méréh, contracted from mé’erreh, for mé’errih, In the year of the Sufets Himilkat and ‘Abd-'Eshmiin, the varunt (cf. Marquardt, Staatsverwaltung tum esse titulum Ritschelius indi 9, 154), ¢. urbis vi Serip- vit exeunte, vel vii incipiente probabiliter. loc. cit. Mommsen, In the Latin text merente is older spelling for merenti, and Aescolapio for Aesculapio. In the Greek text we have written *Ackyup and Myppq in prefer- ence to “Ackhymi@ and Myppy. Ritschl has rightly translated the words xara mpdotaypa by ex imperio numinis, Tod Oeod. mem) mam msm jawed yqw5 (ylow nna. ws oapnw @) (2) a He heard rih, which last form lies at the root of the Hebrew word also.—co709 is derived from Xérpa, libra, Syr. Vita, Arab. Ub). — ne Hebrew FN, and the following sign is the arith- metical figure for 100 (see plate LXXIV., Zable of Ancient Arithm. Figures).—ws is Phoenician for 9 me’ is the older form of the poox is an attempt to represent KAéwv, with prosthetic *aleph, something like ’Akléyon—The letters Mjonw have been variously explained. They most probably form the real (aboriginal Sardinian ?) name of the slave whom his foreign masters called Cleon.—The spelling of nbn (probably plural) is peculiar ; we should natu- rally expect nm with heth (Heb. my salt). Line 2. In sop and $%55 the § is the suffix of the 3d_ pei .; in Hebrew the words would be mp or iop and ixaq.—nw is a contraction of naw, in Hebrew nav.—npon is the name which the Greeks represented ‘by *Tpiikas and “Ipiikor, and the Romans by Himileo. It is perhaps shortened from nodmny, “the brother (friend) of the queen (of heaven).”—43 evidently stands here for the plural 133. The Sufe were brothers, as in Carthag. 195, where %2 is written plene (Euting, Punische Steine, p. 16 and 'T. xii.). es [The Committee for the above description. have to thank Professor Dr. Euting and Professor Dr. Noeldeke, of Strassburg, They are also specially indebted to Professor Dr. Mommsen, of Berlin, for allowing them to make use of his as yet unpublished reading and explanation in the Corpus Inscriptionum Latinarum. ] LXXXIX. emmaiiietiaa = a ey vate. t em “ fue ate Aaah oe Visti sinaysma wia-potgesn | pen aera: asoinrs heres Beppe arcessare wir Auy ha SAR MeN RIO 42x AQ Bb upa-aoy ao oa wee heeaprces tama apes Ligh wy acho ye 14 BAR B24 ong Aye TE peek Bua Re *” \ hae Mapes epaw Dee mes 9 Se woppeh aan psttt DVR O97 lett wag nat ened 948 vant westewa ap -nasov bs iho’ A -nEmao Who aT oO be sar avdhehes ytrh sean -wathad “ganmpenre Bonne mnurts 12 UN IP22. hyponn? mp peng of | weptreta bharrepe Bare f pe-vehoperemar“ee0 a | Ae rs hoor mwas MMe silk opseyer ig 2 aA oan “ave. a o% SIOGTALE IES IOST ‘yes me hed ae. beeen Apohtrnassc a Oa eAC nme nngers 2p MRF a ARdae hapa ao on ayers cher : Sevan Area rapes Pe Ag. ware nee xfs 2S ape Qe pe 2egeg xP 2 es 2 etre mopserete nap Spy aarede SIDCRNERIE HS nope -agovms-onls 0 so haarcenamges BU Ver rAcmarweA MO Me APrapmpmypa 9H perp eg men Qrerip Olesen see Bee Aur es | OS vec -hencyicsos pare = A PIP OT LID PRA MO Ip sexe hope che re odpa epnsPpg 8H Augen cg eery boats Bape! a - Bonpensr een wa SV SIs | de ho-mhnnheshomevre Aa 297 wat eta AA os -2oe: poy 2D om BV Ce Ao a Pegg BEL PR — LPR POOF DPM CHAPS OR ts v2 owaposeee Baas Ravtraaaavsn wea dear soup YBa: BORA ARSC NA De4 fava a lomo a5 ‘qwaecawga A Van aewn Asana Oph 9 rg y-ray sy enegie 2 MAP ALONE ayy Opasoaig A SY vy qwere 110777°h (a 9907 2ps00 © SIAAPPOP | Repepes-Loape Pep -rgcpapera 1 “Bothsait® bp he np epapere It tance huingape hopes eh wt bees asnih Angle ah > Pe 6s pp nperng hs nga SPR ADDS ORM On agp ID EY | A ppeyng peng eAI PFE ome . “Ar apegs sgueaAre OPS tea -appraape MGI SIPPTOLE OID OP-R PG BID BY? on yaar Leeapeyndt 21 BPP IAP I ONPGLR : IROL | 9S wpa her oa Rae Rit * epeats pro, 2 | 2? tsep-evamdpeg oes a a 197 SP terk boaa Rn Be Dongen ea pPh BP R “RPLAR * BOGRLF > AM ory eayea whan: OZ iP sop npeen re aa egy of 90g. eh po ges ayocs eguy "AO. AD has ween Pe He Fag agen Ryton crapey Of bag say ALY OP OL ap "AU _~ Sa Lip PALES OG ok wee saps ao Asem ngo a ABR appre preuyre ethenh Qn amas py egnuypyip Ara te eg aha 93 e& B44 6° Ader 2omeny Aven nang “gona = aro oh ~ Lohawmaye & SD, PEL APSET IL ROM Av oq. aye fer 1109 Qe “Berl apse A ts 1p “BRP GLY *EIAIORES HB A129 * yap OS AS 9D, Ae FID LB SILL, “PSI OPES tC AION BSR, IO PF ADM ap HF Peo me aeregsherrs Arg ncn opesb po ty x i B BA my np Dea ptay of ¢ age (Besse 2 v Ex avy Sap Pie GP PROP POLED HA 08 £ ERS ICL “PRIOR be Atte oegag tld th + ATX R 2. PISA NGA BORD ph seepepag: Rats PTA PBS SAI OLGA CADOA 29 A eg hap BIO EP > aa : ft aE ye sighs Sees BIB MMOLR' TS DDB WRIST P 9 PD NI RVI AH p21 OTOL EL 9G B98 GOP MLIE IAIN AI 1 ROLLA PAID BORA) t4 PP Be Or MRI RON TD peat DID PIPE: PRADDID It DP ¥ PENTATEUCH, HEBREW, ARABIC, AND SAMARITAN.—a p. 1227. ROME, BARBERINI LIB. Prate LXXXIX.—Samariran. Rome. Barpertyt Lisrary, No. 106.—A.D. 1227. hes Pentateuch in Hebrew, with an Arabic translation and the Samaritan Targiim, all written in the Samaritan character, in three parallel columns. On vellum; about 13% in. by 103; 264 leaves (some of which are modern su pplements on paper); 3 columns, usually 43 lines. The Hebrew text is on the right, the Samaritan Targiim on the left, the Arabic version in the middle. This manuscript was bought by N. C. F. de Peirese (whose peculiar mark it bears) at Damascus in 1631, and bequeathed by him to the Cardinal Fr. Barberini, nephew of Pope Urban VIII, in the library of whose family it still remains. The earliest portion of the volume, from which the plate is taken, is dated A.H. 624—= A.D. 1227, and comprises Gen. xxxiv. 22—Deut. xxviii. 68, with some lacunae. A defect at the end was made good from a yellum manuscript dated A.H. 887 = A.D. 1482. Other missing leaves were supplied from a third manuscript, also on vellum, dated A.H. 858 = A.D. 1454. Later gaps were partially filled up by the insertion of paper leaves of different dates ; and the missing portion of the book of Genesis, ch. i. 1—xxxiv. 22, was added by a Syrian Christian from the P éshitta version. See Bianchini, Evangeliarium quadruplex, pars 11, tab. post pag. dciv., and the description p. dexxix.; Hwiid, Specimen inedit. versionis Arab.-Sam. Pentateuchi (Rome, 1780); De Rossi, Specimen varr. Lectionum (Rome, 1782), p. 165; but especially Adler, Kurze Uebersicht seiner biblischkritischen Reise nach Rom, pp. 137-162, and De Sacy, Mémoires de UV Acad. des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres, t. xlix., p. 3 sqq. The British Museum possesses cight leaves of a very similar triglott Pentateuch, Orient. 1441, comprising Gen. xxxii. 18—xxxy. 11 (ff 1-4) and xxxvi. 28—xxxviii. 28 (ff. 5-8). The plate represents f. 49), containing Gen. xlvii. 1, jw2 yo82 Can1—11, ~NN nN) pax ns. With the Samaritan text compare those of Petermann, Pent. Samarit., fasc. 1, Genesis, p. 118; Briill, Das Samaritan. Targiim zum Pent., p. 58; and Uhlemann, Institt. Ling. Samarit.: Chrestom. Samarit., pp. 75, 76. The Arabic version offers some variations from the text of ‘Abi Sa‘id as edited by Professor Kuenen of Leiden, of which the following are the chief: IL 8,9, K La\, B ds I UB CS BY ile te sh ae on (a) 322) B P 20, K Ow ay BE 7 K jdaxcli, Bzlescd; 1 ,K \rol, B pdal; 1 29, K (cy (yp dvi, B Spd Addy y; | 36, K $0, B § errors occur, as might be expected, eg., fe) for <$9>)s 1. 24. Observe 8 as the equivalent of =) in Il. 8, 9. (= (IK Gatherings. Apparently of ten leaves. The original signatures, if any, have disappeared. The quires are now signed with Syriac letters, the last leaf of the one quire and the first leaf of the next bearing the same letter. fiuling. On one side, with a dry point, guided by marginal prickings. The columns are marked off by double vertical lines. Writing. The writing, which depends from the ruled line: ant and flowing than that of plate xxviii, The Arabic letters 4) 2 > (5 & and ¢ is more € ‘. s = x . _ are represented by 4 or 7, & & or ¥, 4 § or §, sor My, ¥ or §, and ¥ ¥ or ¥. ¥ commonly stands for §, Punctuation. A single point, as usual, after each word, except at the end of a line. At the end of a verse, : or .°; of a section -: An oblique stroke marks a slight pause, as in 1. 14; : or .: a longer pause, as in Il, 20, 23, 30; +: and = likewise occur. The points -- are used before a speech, as in Il. 7, 10, 17; but also elsewhere, as in Il. 13, 14, 24. The mark < or <: (Sam. Targ., |. 6) or <: indicates a question or an exclama- tion, as in Il. 6, 33. See Adler, op. cit., p. 144. In the Samaritan Targim there is a peculiar mark over the word \w=Heb. 3, 1. 15. Samaritan. Genesis, ch. xlvii. 1-11. Hebrew. Jia YOND PAN Lod) os)! ap Vogds “Wa YON2 mam 1 3D) (VN (TOD"N | 415) Os) ys) U2 Eres mp> ynN “oper 2 PIA Twi Ty Sl, Red Ave DWwiIx Twn vay SAID oop)“ popy sand “myn TN) 6) - oy say Sy amb JON 3 ons po romp) on p98 AYIN mma NT 20) ny pax nas yosa pay po MOST “NY wa bem -s9a3 pao mpwn pp wad pamwm 2s) alkgs ay apy om apy NY pop) mpN) TaN me apyy ay AWAD (30) AYID INN) ABT sw oom maa «apy apy) ox) sn sw one mp aN pndn sain (39) yo yeaa wr aw sd) cen ow om en a a 1219 soya NAAN on apy yay «pram (40) cophe “pan “myaa om apy IN) TID yas ony mas om Genesis, ch. xlvii. 1-11. Hebrew. oly + wes O4)! 3 iany) yaa” yoNa 5) re . “ey ° Pa) Cals Sore oy 05) YONA TITY 78a yay aynp aN < wa spas tend py * ON epoxy ona DTN) Joe> os yoN YONT oN. / NT ny) aN nN awn OND aw ys uy! nyt ON) - ywa berm owas oD wT mapa mw one sb -swx «by sly) clay Chay ply ones, Calne CS At 9 ab) apy ns ApY Na” spo yyy PON Cyiee ES» : yey2 GO) ms a) a peh) omar) ory) GE sash bs () YTD “TON AID cow pel S + Cyied sw 13 aD” apy Cris SS -: ESLe apy qa <2" ' swoop bs asm owe in yy yy omy sd) coer ow om woo ons pwn ‘oa onyaN on apy) aay son spb Ne) myID nN Ap aun mI “PN DN ON gen AY eye ed syyled 6D) Se or Sar) wey? ean Oy tue yl, ob! nN 10 it [For assistance in the description of this plate the Committee are indebted to Professor Dr. Ignazio Guidi of Rome. They desire also to thank the Prince Don Enrico Barberini for permitting them to have the free use of the manuscript.] _ 4 EF aE Loa tnns pupwnawnant 3% MUTT 4913199391049 RX UN STON 15590 5 yevm ay stp Nan YS wan bon bis 49 wn vest ns Sa TEs VID DEAT AY OWE Ran aNvn sew ab a7 sind Anas avipany nnn a aby sniind mbnqndin ay cywaanend nana VIA WYN PLY 713379 ANY Ser ann i cane io Sa vrs [277 Resaw ava ws nw 121313 J27p Rost Hey HN Sip Rare yey Sy 291w sna ane bas wy rply tina 13 19 by wesew rhe trans 119951 wy J299 INMNOw) Tay sar Tey pp xa wR 119 by aN bion DN yo10) 1117194 Sy aT 1b bn aA 4 finn 7$ nam sen ow naan war HED 6 apo tw 5 pore £9 58 4rd ba pray) wave bias wean 9 nowebey amen poxnby paeabe yrannd asb pia un swer jrapviarm NF 73 Wwesarer > NTN a2 xh mnowes tphn tp bon xd i y35 Pri san ub bon manaed ipdon £9199 199 S999 bw se 99909 INT INK 11754~ nan shown jb $n 312939 39D Yue1 Div by ona anw and 1912291 22139 BD Awry1913 ann Ri ew 4 fuss 92397 3195 Bro yan 21194 foDsIN Son pos M1917.Y99K by nyDaREN oanrins onapn bet pxya by aay 957797 YN1012133 RYLD asntINN yaw RN NIN AY D239 Re Gye s 4 o<9aba vrpan sm phe ei ees Tee ee nee swab asunh a mts Ss ywahs Sand 43.7095 [39N1 911939 HOI ws 97 ssh AaMND aw aN 1995 Kb rot Law she pw wn hws aes Brwan 372.419 [LY P9By7 [ED ADDON FN 917 13 19K 51 HHS 4 mesh > ath nbn ab poe pou aww maw bin ay poe i pound res are 1) erbw era poo Alb nose aut nwby em nine THN (Uy Noy RIN! tavba THN saney F * ysurstby iSbarab wrbw pee NSB NIN DY 41919113 YIN IMIA EVITA ATA fh W390 NDB 139K F713 Ww ay sbi awa SOT SYS THEN sen TAN IRIS abt? ia yo asbia nes ann the NA_LLIPS Rov “Dawa ReaD AF PUY NID EHTPANSDD AD EAD TN 4 INI Dow RaaonP AN DIN 9991999 TIN 2139 HHI 1h WAY IPs NADH 11977 SN BMD pase way) 4b nahin o-719 yi [2772 MNS LoRzIMs KIAW ENP Pop 1299 987 TENS Bons fr Nine ino Sn wwpeas ANI N13 LORw md RAT OBY 71379 199 131 IW D171 IN IWR ORS ALIN NAS LON NID AMIR NNT Up wn TRS TILE mn dion ih bn ne eA WRIT AY WNW J312 UY [299 W197 8 UN Sah bind wy ee ion inbond AWNIWND AI + Tw wR TIN 178 HN eR now by nai? yewn nan wa bry (ot Ws so wa wre ibis ava ve SIPHRA— A.D. 1073. VATICAN. LIB., COD. HEBR. 3). Prare XC,—Hesrew. Rome. Vatican Liprary. Cop. Hrpr. 31—A.D. 1073. VOLUME containing the Siphra, or Térath Kohcnim, the earliest commentary on the book of A Leviticus (belonging, as a whole, to about the middle of the 3d century), f. la; and the Tanna dé-Be ‘Eliyahu, both Rabba, f. 1124, and Zutta, f. 159b. On vellum ; about 122 in. by 10; 168 leaves, two columns, 36 lines. It is dated A.M. (4)833, A. Destr. Templi 1005, corresponding with A.D. 1073, according to the colophon, £ 112c, j29n> wom aos mwa soe 3SnR mwa span VOX WDI TAA Maw maT; and is therefore, in all probability, the oldest manuscript of these works extant in Europe. See Assemani, Bibliothecae Apostol. Vatic. Codd. Manuscriptorum Catalogus, t. i, p. 23, no. xxxi. The plate represents f. 65a, the contents of which correspond (though the division of the Pérakim is different) with the Venetian edition of 1545, f. 454, 2nd col. (col. 140), lL. 11—f. 44a, Ist col. (col. 141), 1. 14; or with Schlossberg’s edition, Vienna 1862, f. ay d, col. 1, 1. 10— f. wa, col. 1, 1. 9. Gatherings. Of 10 leaves, except the Ist, 5th, and Writing. The writing, which is between the ruled 9th, which have 9, and the 17th and 18th, which have | lines, is a fine French Ashkénazi, Consequently, the 8 and 3 respectively. They are not signed, but have | scribe must either have been himself a Jew from the catchwords on the last page of each. north of France, or have been trained by one. Judging Ztuling. On one side, with a dry point, guided by marginal prickings. from the way in which it is dated, the volume was most probably written in Greece. {In describing this plate the Committee have to acknowledge the kind assistance of Professor Dr. Ignazio Guidi, of Rome, and of the Rey. Dr. Schiller-Szinessy, of Cambridge. ] pana ONDA ICID ox NASIR AD DD ED Rigi Sse SHAD ASHERNINTH \psipnitnshithanenty _ Minedenntinssinartiiod iy = ASRS Aiea ™K wom PADS NIRS INAH GBS ABI Sa ae cai auieonlan THIS eR Yar NRTA SAPs ANS NASH NeY Oa niin yD Nba ena “oS HTN MEDS nC SYK ‘ Sseriorananctatiy ets Co Ia Repro hneoninhensttiya Bromo yey waviness "HNTNRORSR NPT “fo TBbopKD NS ye \f SSinsertpsaNR Nar yh ET _ Tepintipe hate ; Syyeimtehinoyinone abo ttinn non EKA San ry reson © sppBp patina sprees V SSe ITED MN RTPID on Liha Py tor raat ro rT) a ee peeps sian are boom bon bh stone—e pean vor wnat rpm sw rt sie sen apy rs BRIT. MUS., ORIENT. 1470, apenas yr ting snare eae SSADRH RDS nS oS DSHS PIRBPNM NTP PSN so tobe aiin Rig inpswaxribe nash my ivi snc isang nigra, ih Pas eyypaanay yates, NAD nary yrangmmtyhanan Sai praise Dnt “Sarno tap NeREATNhS sin naa seritecpsohantiyia) SSSA AMON IN Sic tBiiy Pop SS PIe tS Tiny events padasasoarnoin shsawshien nares anh on hymni ro a ali ea el Dy halidecoale pss sate A ASRS SEROMA Sy eamaedrtsep heh toNsP brbstanty worenria no sven iby awe trae § ‘ ss ygyynemee Hh esonsy sini 9p NY Oy ard Joeman dahmns—eershi nhiniHs ooh rao Wis Wn Sagem en 129802 —" HAPHTAROTH—A.D. 1484. Prarr XCI.—Heprew. Britisa Museum. Orrenrar 1470.—A.D. 1484. fla Haphtaroth, or Lessons from the Prophetical Books of the Old Testament, for the whole year, with the Aramaic (Chaldee) paraphrase of “Yonathian ben ‘Uzziél” and the Massoreth. Vellum; about 14 in. by 94; 80 leaves, the last two of which are blank; two columns, 25 lines. Written in South Arabia (al-Yaman), by David b. Bénayih b. Séadyah b. Zékharyah for Halphon b. Stadyah b. David ‘at-Tawili (2), in the month of *Elal, A. Contr. 1795 (22 Aug.—19 Sept., A.D. 1484). The colophon is as follows, f. 78b:— yAS DN. AMA WAT jn) yw (DMO) OVW SND WT osn oa ond pWoaaw MIpywT b> snbwa MNAW Nw 72 7 ON) dw) ODD NT AD MIA 7 pve mynaw naw oy wy) sm maby MWD WIWD) WAID NNWIA ADWNID JN 12 (Ps. Isxii. 17) D8) abn omy tana kee yor py am awn nad (sic) TWANT Nxt 73ND maw See Os nds wna mw) pow mw AX mwa ws wbe [pw 2 ny) 999 MT 42 (Is. Isiii. 14) 184 yD 8 TON 1D YON (ie) ARN ma New) Aen Apr naw mq 435) nam maT aw yr war dn yoy [Talm. Bab. ‘Erabin, f. 54a, nbd my yes] DIS 3D wp sa pws penny T21 T99 sna vox (Ezek. xxviii. 13, 42 AY ma) 393 Mor ya Soyo ya 5H oa ya TNT TAD 27 yD) yok PITT nN The same scribe wrote for the same person the Pentateuch MS. Add. 1174 in the University Library of Cambridge, dated Sivan, A. Contr. 1795 (25 May—23 June, A.D. 1484), only three months earlier than the present volume. He also wrote another Pentateuch in the British Museum, Orient. 2349, dated Marheshyan, A. Contr. 1802 (16 Oct—13 Nov., A.D. 1490), for David b. ’Abi-hesed b. Binyamin b. Yoséph at-Tawili. The Hebrew teat of these Haphtaroth presents no peculiar features; but the Haphtardth them- selves differ in many respects from those used by the other Jews. A point of capital importance is snonit‘t, ff. 46a—d52a, which are all taken from Isaiah, begins, on f. 51¢, with ch. lxi. 9 (a chapter according to the Massoretic division), But as that the last Haphtarah of the “Seven of Consolations,” y. 9 is not even a Padrdshah Séthiimah, it cannot, in very ancient times, have been the beginning of the Haphtarah, which must, there can be no doubt, have commenced with ch. lxi. 1, where Jesus began to read, according to the Gospel of 8. Luke, ch. iy. 18, 19 (if so, this must have been the last Sabbath of the year). That the Jews ever tampered with the Scriptures themselves for anti-Christian reasons cannot be admitted; but it is certain that they altered, and even abolished, public lessons for such reasons (see Zalm. Bab., Bérakhoth, f. 12a, and The Acts of the Apostles (i.—xiy.), with Introduction and Notes by J. Rawson Lumby, D.D., pp. 172-3). The Targum, which follows each verse of the Hebrew text, has no accents, and its vowelpoints are those of the so-called Babylonian system. The vocalisation of many words differs from the ordinary one. The following table may be compared with that in the description of plate LIV. | po sw chin gap! yop nnp my | pun Name. | mnp An ) paw yop Aon Si Sup Abn | | = z — = = = Ordinary form, si ‘al a)|| Spl Si |) Ge) lia) all aie | Hak ab | Se} a 2 = = Le z is Z — oe x ae Gov = awe Sigs Form in the MS. | = Say ‘S) spi Si] al a) | = naa) Hal fal The Massoreth is written on the three outer margins and between the columns. It differs from the ordinary one, but is, as in most Biblical manuscripts, imperfect, and therefore becomes really valuable only as part of a large collection of Massoretic notes from various codices. The plate represents f 40a, containing part of the Haphtarah for the pericope Hukkath (Num. xix. 1—xxii. 1), namely, Judges, ch. xi. 27, 78) —38, ans mown. Gatherings. Of four sheets or eight leaves, signed is rarely used; e.g. ADs, col. 2,1. 21; coyqan, 1. 22; with letters at the upper right-hand corner of the first | but 7pm, col. 1,1. 9; win, L 23; qin}, 1 25; 338), leaf. : F 1. 2,110; satay, J. 21. In th rd my, col. 1, 1. 8 Ruling. On one side, with a dry point, guided by oe TT n the word 139, co) 5 the furtive pathach inal prickings. is placed under the letter preceding marginal prickings. ; Writing. The writing, which depends from the line, js in a fine South Arabian hand.—In the Hebrew text, rapheh is used with mpD7)3, and with and final 7, the guttural, as if the word were pronounced ré-vah. Similarly in the Cambridge Pentateuch, MS. Add. 1174, mindy Gen. iii. 8, mi Gen. ii. 5, mima mq Levit. i. 9, Pinw Deut. xv. 5, pint Deut. xxxiii. 20. The Sacred Name is written 17), mind, ete—In the Targiim there is no mark for M3] Siw, nor for methegh. The Sacred | Name is written (ie, 26, the numerical value of col. 2, 1. 9; Fnvyp, 1. 15. Observe also 918%}, col. 1, mm), before which top is always represented by p when these two letters are silent; as in SNP? ANY, col, 2,1. 5; Apr, ib.; Awy, 1. 20. If two such letters are in juxtaposition, one stroke suffices; e.g. 72, 1.14; APN}, col. 2, I. 14, 20; 71pN, 1. 25. Methegh | only, as in col. 1, 1. 15, compared with col. 2, 1. 8. [Im describing this plate the Committee have, as usual, to acknowledge the assistance of the Rey. Dr. Schiller-Szinessy. ] : Sabie wuss ae eer ey eaieg asAnean Taxes MeATA MOnGS"s-Aanez ES i. prsnacgessS> esa: CoA. 5 APRA 5 BSA RSCEN ges p> Se Bee "T-DUNG= A CUPPA NEA anaey AN WUCMARB ONES ngneneE- Mig = o> -f-ccwwawara,- 25re inuenensee Cues es ences = iNs Gapraacur-warns wea pey : Be ad eae MAY tab pea-r-< «yes An aesnca G5 inn Rees peaia: oe % A ge Bana a: a patna precswuaamrerewyags henesnwas =<. ute hey akaneags cm WE Roy arvnokycor tan asa So Y Ustinarn ay Se ae LIFE oF ONUPHRIUS.—a.pD 979. VATICAN LIB., COD. COPT. 65. Prare XCII.—Corrie. Rome, Vatican Liprary. Cop. Corr. 65 (oun xtv).—A.D. 979. Aoi consisting of 120 vellum leaves, and made up of three distinct manuscripts, namely, (1) a Homily of Mark, 49th patriarch of Alexandria, on the burial of our Lord, the harrying of Hell, ete., £16; (2) Theodore, patriarch of Antioch, on the martyrdom of the two Theodores under Diocletian, f. 30a, imperfect ; and (3) the Life of Onuphrius the anchoret, by Paphnutius the anchoret, £99a. See A. Mai, Scriptorum veterum nova Collectio, t. v., pars 2da, p. 160. The Life of Onuphrius consists of 22 leaves, about 125 in. by 93, with from 27 to 34 lines in a page. The plate represents the last page, f. 120, containing the colophon, with the date A. Mart. 695=A.D. 979, as follows, in barbarous Greek :— = x 3 (1) sanncowtTH Ke aoe aowAowccoe Era aldKk (2) vwaBpmA w seHta 1... ae ano ocwpI mMisrartowsn (3) cenepn oxxowi S TKEZRAI cCerocupizort (4) Tom NapanTwsratTa ero agent ocpit A xe That is to say :— (1) (2) (3) Miro Onre Kipte T03 Sovdov cov édaxicrov SiaKxdvov TaBpuj\ viod Myva 7... av dad yopiov M2rattewsec ovvOpsvov O&LOC! Kal TKESAI- ovyxdpynoor (4) xv (78) rapamrdpara judy dprjv. xpdvov papriper seqe. “Remember, Lord, thy most insignificant servant the deacon Gabriel, the son of Menas...... ; Pardon Thmiiis is well known (see Quatremére, Mémoires from the place (called) Ni-Manthdms (or the Cemetery), in the diocese of Thmii and Ti-kehli. our sins. Amen. In the year of the martyrs 695.” géogr. et hist. sur U Egypte, t. i, p. 129). For Ti-kehli, in Arabic Rugs or , see Yakut, Mujam ‘al-Buldan, t. ii., p. 581; Parthey, Zur Erdkunde des alten Aegyptens, in the Abhandlungen d. kénigl. Akad. d. Wissenschaften zu Berlin 1858, p. , and Vocab. Copt-Lat., pp. 496, 5 not mention t-sraiewsac, but gives mi-seaiewowt, “vicus Deltae prope Thmuim” (Vocab. Copt.- This latter authority does Lat., p. 498), the existence of which seems, however, to be due merely to an error of Zoega (Catal. Codd. Copticorum, p. 18), followed by Champollion (L Egypte sous les Pharaons, t. ii., p. 120). Below this is written in Arabic, in a rude hand of about the xiiith cent., i... stl oe e xp oP ures eas eels (sie) Geel Mey yey Ree Cyndy Adledy Ble ee o “From Adam to Noah, 2042 years; and from Noah to the building of the tower (of Babel), 558 years ; and from the building of the tower s, becomi naller Writing. Ordinary Coptie unci and somewhat cursive in the subscription. The letter ke ~_ at the end of Il. 13, 17. ngle ornament, without colours, one of six, signed with Coptic arithmetical figures Gatherings. Three quires, two of eight leaves and | | (Greek letters) on the first and last page of each. The | is represented by a Ornamentation. A. occupies the upper part of the first page, and des pages are numbered with the same figures. Ruling. Side lines, with cross lines at from 2 to 25 onds about half-way on the right side. The initial letter a is inches apart, which are however not followed by the made to form part of the figure of a bird. scribe. {In describing this plate the Committee have to acknowledge the kind assistance of Professor Dr. Ignazio Guidi, of Rome. | sais Besasesrivensnseestan ToT EEE: PALAIOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY. COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT. E. A, BOND, Esq, LL.D. F.S.A,, PRINCIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH MusEUM, President. W. DE G. BIRCH, Esq., F.S.A., BRITISH MUSEUM. J. W. BONE, Esq., B.A, F.S.A, Mons. L, DELISLE, Director or THE NATIONAL Liprary, PARIS, MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTE. THE RIGHT REVEREND THE LorD BISHOP or DURHAM, pD. JAMES HILTON, Esgq,, F.S.A. WILLIAM MASKELL, Esq, M.A,, F.S.A, PROFESSOR J. RUSKIN, D.C.L., Oxrorp. ) Oe Beat SCOTT, Esq, M.A,, ASSISTANT-KEEPER OF THE MSS., BRITIsH Museum. E. M. THOMPSON, Esq, F.S.A., KEEPER OF THE MSS., BRITISH MusEuM, Hon, Sec. G. F. WARNER, Esq, M.A, BRITISH Museum, Hon. Treas, PROFESSOR Dr. W. WATTENBACH, BERLIN. PROFESSOR J. O, WESTWOOD, M.A., Oxrorp, W. ALDIS WRIGHT, Eso, LL.D,, Trin. COLL, CAMBRIDGE, Proressor W. WRIGHT, LL.D., QuEENs’ CoLL., CAMBRIDGE, FACSIMILES OF ANCIENT MANUSCRIPTS. ORIENTAL SERIES. Parr VIII. EDITED BY WILLIAM WRIGHT, Tei De PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE. CONTENTS. 93. Paramesvara-tantra. Sanskrit. A.D. 857-8. 94, Ashtasahasrika-prajfiaparamita. Sanskrit. Circa A.D. 1020. 95. The Book of Job. Arabic. [ixth cent.] 96. Kitab ‘al-Ghadi wa ’l-Mughtadi. Arabic. A.D. 960. 97. The Book of Ruth and the Song of Songs. Arabic and Hebrew~Arabic. A.D. 1004-5. 98. The Book of Exodus. Hebrew-Arabic. [xth cent.] 99. The Gospels. Syriac. A.D. 600. 100. Panegyric on Abba Pisentius. Coptic. A.D. 918. PHOTOGRAPHED AND PRINTED IN FACSIMILE BY THE AUTOTYPE COMPANY. Lonvon: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, Limiter, STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS. 1883. (Ad Rights reserved.| aera TET ZS SNOMED ‘6y0!I "SW ‘Gav “all ‘AINN ‘a90Itdawvo ‘9-498 0'V —VWHLNVL-VYUVASANVY Vd PLATE MBRIDGE. UNIVERSITY LIBRARY. App. MS. 1049.—A.D. 857-8. TR pes ere G 5s \HE = Paramesvara-tantra, a work consisting in great part of ejaculatory prayers and other 64 This manuscript commonplaces of the tantric literature. On palm-leaf, about 16 in. by 2; 2 of the era of Sri-Harsha, A.D. 857-8. was acquired by Dr. D. Wright at Kathmanda. remaining leaves, 3 to 5 lines. QE Written in the year It formed part of the library of an old temple, which was “restored” by Sir Jang Bahadur's orders. See Bendall’s Catalogue of the Buddhist Sanskrit MSS. in the University Library, Cambridge, pp. xxxix-li, and p. 27. The plate represents ff. 96 and 626, as now numbered. The former belongs to that portion of the work which treats of the mystical signification of the letters (compare plate LXXXI., complete alphabet; the latter exhibits the colophon with date. no. 1), and contains a The first is e, O (see Cun- The figures of the date, at the end of the last line of the lower leaf, admit of no question. clearly @ = 200. ‘The second is the letter- numeral for 50, which is either G or, as in this ¢ ningham, Corpus Inscriptionum Indicarum, vol. i, p. 22, and the plate in Cowell and Eggelin Catalogue of Buddhist Sanskrit MSS. in the possession - “the Royal Asiatie Society, Hodgson Collection). The third is evidently 2. That the era is not the ordinary era of Nepal (commencing with October 880 A.D., which would give to the manuscript the date A.D. 1132) is, it may almost be said, obvious from a comparison of the letters with those of twelfth cent. Nepalese manuscripts, of which good examples are given in our plate XLIII. (A.D. 1166); in Bendall’s Catalogue, pl. Il, no. 3 (A.D. 1167), pl. IIL, no. 1 (A.D. 1179); and in Cowell and Hggeling’s Catalogue, plates, no. 1 (A.D. 1166), Palaeographical considerations likewise forbid us to reckon the date by the Vikramaditya, Saka, Gupta or Vallabhi era. There would seem then to remain only one era which we know to have been used in various parts of northern India—that instituted by, and called after, the great conqueror Sri-Harsha. This era, which commenced in the year 606 A.D., was known in Kashmir in ’al-Berini’s time (see Reinaud, Mémoire sur [Inde, p. 136, and Fragments arabes et persans relatifs & Inde, p. 139), and was employed for at least three centuries in central and eastern India (see Cunningham, Archaeol. Survey, t. ix., p. 84, t. x, p. LOL, and t. xvi., p. 68). for August 1880, vol. ix., pp. 169-182 (compare Bendall’ Nepal in the Verhandlungen des fiinften internationalen Ori is written at first in two three, but without side-lines. The spaces between the columns are pierced with holes for pegs or strings. The leaves are numbered on the The text columns, afterwards Ruling, ete. in at the left-hand side with letter-numerals (for termed transitional Gupta; by which is meant that i alphabet, though on the whole nearer to the Devana, than to the ordinary Gupta, nevertheless shows certain survivals which illustrate the connection of the two, In the examination of the several letters, reference is made to three writings, selected from the very few avail- able dated examples between A.D. 600 and A.D. 900. (1) The last—no. 15—of the Nepalese inscriptions of the middle period, as edited by Dr. Bithler and Pandit Bhagvanlal in the Indian Antiquary, loc. They call the characters “Gupta with modifications.” The ript, in cit. date is just a century earlier than our manu 1erefore reasonably expect further modi- enote this inscription by N. (2) The Morvi in Gujarat, dated Guptasamvat ing to Cunningham, A.D. 752 (see the Indian Antiquary, vol. ii., p. 257). We M. (3) The pillar-inscription from Deogarh in south- eastern Rajputana, which we denote by D, with the A.D. 862 (see Cunning- Archaeol. S which we may t We a copper-plate at fications. 585, ie., accord designate it by sxpressed in two eras urvey, t. X., plate XXXII, and the Compare, in date ham’s very incorrect transcription at p. 101). ’'s Catalogue, p. xlii. sqq. A. Initial The This form is rare in eastern general, Bendal of Letters, ete. letter a has an open top. India, but has survived to modern times in the west. —a is expr by a with a curl below. This figure survives in later Nepalese MSS. only in the le numeral (see Cowell and Eggeling’s Catalogue, p. 51, 3). It is also found in the Sarada alphabet (see a XLIV.).—i and 7 are found with the same gener form down to modern times in Nepal. This pre shape of i occurs in D, and in some Nepalese ini tions and MSS. of the xith cent.—u and @ have varied Forms vowels. OSE But what is still more important is that, according to Professor Biihler, it is the era of the Nepalese inscriptions, nos. 6 to 15, edited by him and Pan it Bhagvanlal Indraji in the Indian Antiquary S paper On European Collections of Sanskrit MSS. from entalisten- Congres 2ter Theil, 2te Hilfte, p. 206). but little in figure from the vith cent. onwards—To ri, rz, li, lri, we find analogous but less simple forms Add. 1691, 2 (dated A.D, 1179), in a probably archaistic vowel-list somewhat like the present.—e in the Gupta shape of a simple triangle, without the pro- duction of the vertica extremely rare in MS; Nepalese MS. of A.D. 1 common in the Kutila character, and occurs also in early in side so as to form a tail, is been found S., 38.—ai with the upper curve is but has in a Bengalii—o and aw find their parallels in early Ben- i, and in the vowel-list in Add. 1691, 2 (A.D. 1179), though less simple and more flourished.—B. Medial The vowel 7 is a characteristic transitional The small curve over the top of the consonant in the earlier Gupta period has developed into a long curve running round the left side of the consonant, but the straight vertical stroke of the Devana (due doubtless to a desire for uniformity with the other letters) has not yet appeared. Compare the figures in M and D. the Kutila inscription of Baréli is very like, though somewhat less simple (see the table of alphabets in Prinsep's Indian Antiquities, vol. ii., pl. XX XIX.).—7 (e.¢., leaf 1, line 3, col. 2, syll. 5) is It should be noted that the horizontal top of the consonant never meets the vertical stroke. Compare the forms in D and N.—w lacks the long tail of later times; consequently the syllable pa (just before the date) is not unlike pt—C. Consonants. The letter gh is one of the most striking archaisms of this manuscript, exactly resembling the form in N. temark the open top (which survives in no other | MSS., not even those of the xith cent.), the bellying front (somewhat to y), and the angular inclination of the second to the third or main stroke.—ch has changed but little from the time. M and D, ka inscriptions, vowels. letter. The form in Fatt transitional, similar modern vertici | earliest Here, as in N, in ordinary the stroke not horizontal (as now), but slopes Gupta, and even in the above the loop is slightly is however preserved even in modern Nepalese. —j shows an interesting transitional shape. downwards.—chh has a primitive form, which The curious pendant to the left, which remains only in the earliest of our other dated MSS. (see pl. XVI.), is a remark- able survival, representing the top member of the ved both in ordinary Gupta and in Tibetan. It is curious to observe that each of our letter, as prese’ three inscriptions has two varieties of this letter— The form of jh lies between the Asoka form and the ordinary Bengali—Conjunct #% resembles conjunct », except in the middle curve at the top, which is deeper in the latter—¢ has a curious pendant to the right, similar to that just noticed in 7, This is found in M; and survives also in two early xith cent. MSS. (see pl. XVI.)—th is found as a simple unconnected circl in the early inscriptions and in a few of the olde Nepalese MSS.—dh differs from the modern form only in its pointed back, as in N (1. 13, middle).—n agrees with M and D in the small ear-like upstroke at the top of the vertical line, a minute feature, yet one appa- rently not found in later MSS.—#, though archaic, may be paralleled in later MSS. from Nepal.—th is a figure intermediate, as in N, between the dotted circle of the older alphabets and the shape of the xith cent. in Ne- palese MSS. In the xiith cent. MSS. the modern form is almost attained.—d is like the modern letter save in two small though significant points: it has a pointed back, similar to that of dh, and a small vertical line at the bottom, resembling that in a capital G. These fea- tures ma be seen in the inscriptions, but in MSS. only of the xith cent. and then but rarely. The pointed back is very marked in many Kutila inscriptions— dh has two forms, both archaic: a plain semicircle and a semicircle with the diameter slightly produced down- wards. The Asoka inscriptions and M exhibit the first shape only, but D has both.—n in general resembles the Gupta letter, save that the characteristic loop in front is filled up. N has both forms. In Nepalese MSS., even of the xith cent., the modern shape is attained—p shows an interesting Gupta survival in the figure with open top. his occurs in N, M and D, though without the small twist in front, which makes the letter somewhat like a modern dh. The open top, which also survives in Sarada, is unknown in the xith and xiith cent. M and later inscriptions.—ph occurs in this very shape in N (line 2, middle), including the pointed back (compare dh and d). Later inscriptions and MSS. either show the modern Devanagari form or approximate to it (compare the Bengali)—bh resembles n, but has a more wedge-shaped front. This figure is found in N and in Nepalese MSS, of the xith cent., after which time modifications arise. It is midway between the Gupta form (still found in D and M) and the Kutila—m is almost invariably open at the top, as in Gupta and in N, M and D. The later MSS. always y is not readily distinguishable have the closed form. ; however from p, having like it an open top; it curv a little more outwards. N, M and D are in accord herewith, thus forming a transition from the Gupta to the modern shape. Later MSS. have a closed top. —In the / of the Gupta alphabet the vertical stroke does not descend below the others; but N shows the beginning of the change. D has varying forms. A figure like that in our manuscript lasted till the middle of the xith cent. in Nepal, but not later.—s shows a transitional form, which survives in early Nepalese MSS. and in the archaistic black paper ones. It is distinguished from s merely by the open top; but this distinction is not alw: of our plate. Po already, as often in later Nepalese MSS. Both s and ys preserved in the second page ly the sounds were confused s have a small upstroke at the lower left-hand corner, instead of the downstroke in later MSS.—sh has an open top, a front curving outwards (like y), and a slanting cross-stroke. So also in N, M and D, but not in later MSS.—A is a modification of the Gupta form, found in N, M and D, and also in some early Nepalese MSS.—ish as a letter of the alphabet, regarded as more than an ordinary compound, is curious, and calls to mind € and w. Unfortunately it has been retouched in our manuscript—Several of the letter-numerals, besides that for 200, exhibit interesting archaic forms, such as those which express 1, 3, 4, 8, and 30 (see Bendall's Catalogue, pl. V.). As the alphabet is given in full in the Plate, a transcription seems unnecessary. [For the description of this plate, and of plate XCIV., the Committee are indebted to C. Bendall, Esq., M.A., of the British Museum. } ‘pov! SW adv “Sil ‘AINN ‘ADSqIuaNvo ‘OZOl VW VOHID —Y LINWVY Vd VN PVHd—-YyIYSVHYSVLHSV thy! PeIUNPIeIPwtoniee wea Sete PuABIA : wt ait Prare XCIV.—Sansrrir. Campripce. Untyersrry Liprary. l | \HE work entitled Ashtasahasrika-prajndaparamita. 5 or 6 lines in a page. Survey, vol. xi., p. 181). This manuscript forms Kathmandi. The plate represents f. 1670. Ruling, ete. The text is written in three regular double The ses between the columns are pierced with holes for columns, with two lines on each side. 2s or strings. The leaves are numbered on the verso at the left-hand side with letter-numerals. Writing. ome of the chief features of the Kutila cha- This manuscript has been selected as ex- hibiting racter, in particular that peculiar twist at the foot of the vertical strokes to which the name of kutila (“bent”) is probably due. ip- tions in Cunningham’s Archaeol. Survey, vol. i., p. 352, pp. 120 ress, Archaeol. Survey of Western India, vol. iii., p. 100, pl. Ixii. and Isiii.; and See the series of insc sqq-; Bur vol. iii., compare some of the contemporary manuscripts written (1) [ajpeksha (col. 2) sy bhavanti | balani bodhyangani | a mahasatvasyaivam bhavati dirgharatram ami samjiaya (indistinet correction) sukhasamji yatha ‘nuttaram samyaksambo- into *jieya) atmasamjnayah dharman desayishya- anatmakam (sic) etat satmakam i- sukham iti | (3) ti | asubham etat sar lye- buddhe dharmeshu | evam apranihite sa- Written in the fifth year of a nit ya atmasamjiiaya subhasamj (ol. 2) dhim abhisambudhya nity (col. 2) na prajiiiparamitaya cha parigri (col. 3) madhivimokshamukham upasampadya (a sec. m.) App. MS. 1464.—Crrca A.D. 1020. On palm-leaf, about 21 in. by 2; 227 leaves, gal, who was Mahipala of Ben ing, as we know from an inscription at Benares, in A.D. 1026 (see Cunningham's Archaeological yart of the collection made by Dr. D. Wright at in Nepal, which exhibit the same peculiarity, though in a less marked degree: for example, Add. 866, in our plate XVI., and Add. 1693, in Bendall’s Catalogue, plate IL, no. 2. Forms of Letters, ete. to be found in the two shapes of medial e, and in those The forms of &h, gh (see 1. 1, col. 3, to- Characteristic archais iS are of ¢ and s. wards the end), % (see 1. 1, col. 3, near the beginning), n, and n preceding a consonant, are also noteworthy. The figure of bh is an interesting parallel to the middle and later Nepalese letter. Ornamentation. There are several well executed coloured miniatures in this manuscript, one of which may be seen in Bendall’s Catalogue, plate IL, no. 1. n sarvasamadhitas tat kasya hetor upayakausalyaparigrihito hi bodhisatvo mahasatvo bhiya- matraya vivarddhaya (deleted) vivarddhate suklair dharmais tikshnatarani sraddhadinmdriyani (col. 3) margafi cha pratilabhate | punar aparam subhite bodhisatvasya yaiva viparyasta tatha karishyami | amj h sukhasamjiaya (corrected yam naitachchhubham iti | so ‘nena chittotpadena samanvagatah pirvakena chopayakau- hito nantarabhutakotim sakshatkaroti | naparipirnneshu viharati | na cha bhiitakoti (sic) sakshatkaroti | na cha parihiyate maitrito va karuna- (4) to va muditato va | upekshato va tat kasya hetor upayakausalyaparigrihito hi bodhisatvo maha a matraya vivarddhate | suklair dharmais tikshnatarani chasya sraddhaninindri (col. 3) yo hi kaschit subhite bodhisatvo mahasatva imam chittot- (col. 2) yas bodhyangam: nscha pratilabhate | atvo bha- ni bhavanti padam utpadayati | ity apime satva dirgharatram upala- vina etarhy upalambhe charanti (5) mbhe chari charanti vi- etarhy api pin jiiayam charanti | mithyadris rsamjiayam charanti nimitta: (col. 2) paryase charitavina etarhy api vipar abhitasamjiay- htau charitavina etarhy api mithyadrishtau charanti | tatha kari- charitavina etarhy api nimittasamjfi mjiayam ase charanti | pindasamjiiayam charitavina 3) am charitavina | etarhy api bhute (col. m- al pace galas pall » aid deal (aie sill 283) pe n Je otatlols emer Prine ane es A ‘: aan & of geht reel BOOK OF JOB.— (Ix?! Cent.) BRIT. MUS., ADD. MS. 26,116. Prare XCV.—Aranic, British Museum. App. 26,116. ([Xru cenr. | p” of the Book of Job, in an ancient Arabic version, comprising ch. i. 8—iii. 18 and ch. vi. 26—xxviii. 21. ixth cent. lator would seem to have lived in Eg: On vellum, about 94 in. by 64; 15 leaves, 23 to 26 lines. Written in the This version was probably made from the Hexaplar text of the Septuagint. The trans- gypt, but to have been a Syrian Christian by birth, as he uses words of Aramean origin, and apparently consulted at times the Syro-Hexaplar version. His language abounds in vulgar and grammatically incorrect forms. See Fleischer in the Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, Ba xviii., pp- 288-291; Wolf Wilhelm Graf Banudissin, Translationis antiquae Arabicae libri Jobi quae supersunt (Leipzig, 1870); and the British Museum Catalogue of Arabic MSS., p. 676, no. meccelxxy, Gatherings. Probably of ten leaves, There are more recent signatures with Arabic and Coptic nume- rals on ff. 50, 6a, 146 and Lda. Ruling. On one side with a dry point. The writ- ing does not regularly follow the ruled lines. Writing, An antique, stiff Nashi, well-nigh Kufic in many of its forms. The diacritical points (either dots or small lines) have frequently been omitted, and in some instances wrongly placed. Many points (dots) have been added in a somewhat lighter ink by one corrector, and in red ink by another. The latter has also introduced small circles as marks of interpunction. The scribe does not hesitate to divide a word at the end of a line; e.g. ced uh in ll. 9, 10 of the plate. Both correctors have made occasional alterations in the text. Punctuation. A single point, as in 1. 24 of the plate, or @. A later hand has usually added a red circle to the points. Dp eveyy Ay slightly below the line— 4, is occasionally written Forms of Letters, ete. \ is often turned to the right at the foot, eg. ON Berg \ projects Cs, sometimes 3, as in GSI ne, 1. 24—2 & are in general strikingly angular, but the Kifie form is also found.—_2 has three strokes or points, 25 or 4, e.g. ep 1. 5. Sometimes, however, there seem to be only three points below and a line (the muhmilah) above; two points. (Cw is distinguished from © by i! The plate exhibits f. 13a, containing ch. xxii. 12—ch. xxiii. 2. or by the three points below only; or by the line above only, as in (sS4\.4, 1. 24.—The same line occurs once with the letter (in_,lo, f, 6a, 1. 19), to distinguish it from yt is once written ¢ a sec. m. (in \yoel, f, 3b, 1.17), and once 5: (in dylé, f. 5, 1. 9)—The letter f is always § 9; whereas & is usually » or » a pr. m., though & does occur. The first corrector always writes 4 &; whence it happens that in some places the letter is doubly pointed 3 5. Two points below are very rare, as in lp, f. 4a, 1. 4; £ 148, 1. 11— Final (es one in form; compare Chey Pea leaeliiss with CSiu2s pele G wand) Schley, eliicnor ES with GS) 2, 1. 24, The shape of final fa) is quite different; eg. \S, 1. 9; JS, 1. 12; _J,8, L 13.— Final n is often but slightly rounded, as in ow ib 2 one Be weit, 1. 10.—Final x is unpointed; the muhmilakh oceurs in s\n, f. 3a, 1. 9, a pr. m. 4 is frequently used for » in the middle of a word, eg. dap, f. 6a, 1. 10.—Final ya is cs oe cs; if the reverted form be used, .» or .3 (see ll. 14, 22)—Of the vowels only dammah appears, and that but rarely, and added by the first corrector. Hamzah, maddah, waslah, and tashdid, are wholly wanting.— We find oo but also eS» ete. C1 Gil, dy Fadl Gi) yehir all, aed ly dell Low ond] GS sv call .! Cinss ssi) (orig. 5) (Bye) oles 17 ep Yo) Ele 2 Gay Glu! 7 ee ) os Lai} (Gad) Miva) Shey coe or Le3) GL LI id) 3 Es, (ie) Ce yon dy cesta)! Yd hey (sie) cool) Maas Gye (5) fer Bir) Cease sos cre C. Yh (read B43) ja53 ESL Lyla) bile Clay (ie? od och) oe!) ay ly (orig. Reed) een sor) le (10) SiS \ Sus» ptedl St TOM SAL SIPs ae, 6 cs SE eS cl Se tye ob ee gs O58), (ie) Leeg Vy ESS Gre ¢ bE LL Se oe? (sic) Crysy Cray FS esd GCs ex =>) Seep clay Ml GSalel ow ols ray) (15) i et) 4) CS b=vs i ws oo) Seley, Js) (read Lule) Lyles buble Sys Let J) bed, Sens = es (Sey al cub (20) JN peb GS (read D9) By) WO oye GSudy ceil Eb GGL d yeild HOY Oe CSc erik, 5,5 CSN yee CENe Saip SN ploy gdp GGL py © SB oy! GLI o 3 a,lo (altered into...) PSY OF Hwy oe el Gl XCVI. & } Voit ba gion a wtebas waite " | iol, eral are : Be oe eae 5) Cesta 4 oe cts LRE < 1BN ABI L-ASH'ATH, KITAB AL-GHADI WA ‘L-MUGHTADI.—A.D. 960. BRIT. MUS., ORIENT. MS. 2600. Pate XCVI.—Arazic, Brirish Museum. Orrenrar 2600.—A.D. 960. FRAGMENT of the second part of the Kitab ‘al-Ghadi wa L-Mughtadi, a treatise on the nourishment of the various members of the human body, by the physician ‘Abi Ja‘far ‘Ahmad ‘ibn Muhammad, known as ‘Ibn ’Abt ‘Ash‘ath. Paper; about 10} in. by 63; 17 leaves, According to ‘Ibn ‘Abi ‘Usaibi‘ah in his ‘Uyiin “al-Anba (ed. A. Miiller, ), the author was a native of Persia, who settled at ‘al-Mausil (Mosul), and died there at an advanced age a few years after A.H. 360=A.D. 971. See also Wiistenfeld, Geschichte der arabischen Aerzte, no. 107; the Bodleian Catalogue of Arabic MSS., t. ii, p- 583; and Hajji Khalifah, ed. Fliigel, t. v., p. 127. 20 or 21 lines in a page. t. i, pp. 245-7 ‘Ibn ‘Abi Usaibi‘ah says that the work consisted of two parts (makalah), and was completed at Barki, a fortress in Armenia, A.H. 348= A.D. 959-60. These particulars are in exact agreement with the subscription of the present manuscript, which states that the author's original draft was finished at the castle of Barki in Armenia in Safar of the year 348 (13 April— 11 May, A.D. 959), and that this copy was made at ‘al-Mausil in Du ‘Il-Ka‘dah of the same year (3 Jan.—1 Feb., A.D. 960). Neal Soy leeds ginal, coda OLS Ge Kiel) Mul) ons Se eedsll oo, Wo Vy ext '\ ce) eh Cay ell este Gy deste oy Oval dene lace, @ Jedkb Chi, GLB, Geel, Gls Rae ste 8 Kee! wwe Gp deli Dill sae pod you) GaN we Saxill Cod The second makdlah of ‘Ibn ’Abi ‘l-’Ash‘ath’s treatise jumlah being subdivided into several ‘abwab or chapters. consisted of six jumal or divisions, each The plate represents f. 2, containing part of the seventh bab of the second jumlah. Gatherings. Two quires, of ten and seven leaves respectively, each numbered with Arabic words on the GS in EQSy, L 4, with that of final Jin jes), 1 15, I ia rn is sometimes used for the initial; upper margin of the first page (foll. la and 11 2). The edie form ‘ ae Cate imes bi ‘or the ini ae) apparently by a later hand. compare \a, ll. 5, 7, with a3) 1, 7, and a eI, Punctuation. A marks the end of a chapter or paragraph. Writing. A clear, but somewhat stiff Nashi. The : diacritical points are but rarely added, | form is usually dotted, but not always (Il. 16, 19),— Final ya@ is often reverted; compare us, IE 8% Soy? 1. 4, with 5, 1. 7, <3, 1.10, — sl, 1.15. The reverted é é . Vowels and other orthographical siens are rare; e.g. Forms of Letters, etc. Final \_ sometimes projects a Se or ie B+ little below the line, as in Lads oe 63 poll, 1.10. the tanwin of fathah in \'s\, 1. 7, and the maddah in In lam~alif the right-hand limb is the *alif. Observe es 1. 1—The mark over ayloel in 1. 8 (and on the X in LAS 1.6. Remark the form of initial and medial margin), by a later hand, probably indicates that it is “Ss in Il. 6 and 11; and compare the shape of final | a mistake for alonel. Soe od cl For Coes Lalajl iyodeel) oe oly Lose! al ley d cdlaitll oy ESey pool ic) o) coool) use ib ASL wt V8 Cals Sotedl ale (sie) re ol ©) 8) wth GS Le HD Lull, Lokene Lelie Pe de B's oh ely loo chs 186 all ae = US alatl 3, <3 Sle! owl pol! oe) Voce) 1h a al le wl Sh) & Sl cr, old) pal ined (10) Kab cre (si) Wyted cued) Glib oye Ca!) RELI cred! cap! Loded) dyby) . lee ole pleall Uae oS LS pi Gl eet CES Speck! 52) 5! aorta poll co sl gill Glatt cyl pleall co) gl pas Lyd LIS LS od, Jed) jay ay (sl Saly Glasdl cyl ps Wl LGul 3 wy peal! emty walt! B cgi! Gale Ib 2 lye Lee Hated) 4 fet oy pleas! ore Yad Cay Lged ccd) peck! cu Wass doled) ply (> (20) [In describing this plate the Committee have to acknowledge the kind assistance of Dr. C. Rieu, the Keeper of the Oriental MSS. in the British Museum, and of Dr. R. Horning, of the Department of MSS. ] "aaa stidpaibleelssdiSl uclagetosy vallscletisals Ubalaile 2s | ' = a a (as witha. ‘Bd tapas ve th secrete bibsoek S he Meee — ha We Vib ey “ acute ne haa lspsiatla’ J iS Lebhit pled a) ‘ Sas ©. : i ee Ee a ler 2 ee en See at eae ee ea) YEPHETH, COMMENT. ON RUTH AND SONG OF SONGS—A.D. 1004-5. BRIT. MUS., ORIENT. MS.2554. Prats XCVIT—Aranic any Heprew-Aranro Brivtsn Musrum. Orrenrar 954.—A.D. 1004-5. | COMMENTARY on the Books of Ruth and the Song of Songs by the Karaite writer “Abii ‘Ali ‘al-Hasan ‘ibn ‘Ali ‘al-Basri, commonly : known by his Hebrew name of Yepheth (np). On paper; about 9 in. by 7 k 43 95 leaves, 11 to 15 lines in a page in Ruth, and 11 or 12 in the Song. Written at ‘ar-Ramlah, A.H. 395 = A.D. 1004-5, in the lifetime of the author, as we may safely infer from the words «J)\ soul after his name in the colophon, The name of the original owner has been erased from the subscription, and that of “Abu ‘1-Faraj Ya‘kib substituted. The colophon is as follows, f. 950: es je) oa) (Lees) yc we al) wsils Ld ee pe bs CB ec, as Sa es, all wa leyeuels le as ual ‘lely hall, HLS le el (sie) slosh, slocl al Gus... [egies ce) os) elesd! This manuscript is defective, ch. iii. 3 iy. 10 of Ruth, and ch. iii. 9—v. 14 of the Song, being Cas in a = a : : missing. The plate represents f. 47), and contains the Song of Songs, ch. ii. 8, 9, with an Arabic translation, preceded and followed by a few lines of commentary. A. The Hebrew Teat, which is distinguished throughout by its being written in a larger character, follows the readings of the Kaz; eg. Ruth, ch. i. 8 Osh = WN; ch. ii 1, clo, =YTID; Cant, ch. i 17, ¢: La}, 2 > : = 1099; ch. ii, 13, Y= 9 The sacred name 47) is usually rendered by the abbreviation G (s). Often, — however, the manuscript text reads 343) (278) where the printed text has iM, e¢., in Ruth, ch. i. 6, 8; compare also Isaiah, ch, Ixii. 4, quoted in Il. 2, 3 of the plate. The following are the principal variations from the teetus receptus, Ruth, ch. i. 4, ES nanos for nos » oo» 9 ps3 Bm » we 5 peal fe) Dabs % vay ay 1G tent) 105 - awd £ ? A pA wee wen » din ae» LU, os is omitted, my ity te 1B dl iat) Fs nas2 pechseay.) Ll, btebaleg FS omnw Cant., ch. v. 16, opna » opnpa B. The Consonants. The hard and the aspirated pronunciations of the letters M332. are carefully 72, 1. 8, and sometimes by csS, as in distinguished in the case of 7 5°43. 3 is represented by cs, as in Puen tab?) SS we See “72 1H, Cant. i. 14, f. 39a, 1. 6; 3 by g, with occasional omission of the diacritical point, as wan for Bas 2979, 1. 4. 7 is represented by o, as in Lago M017, 1. 7; 7 by >, as in (od, 77,1. 7. > is represented a) eile 0, by GS as in wu “F 1N2N3, 1, 8, and sometimes by cS, as in yl DWN, Cant. i. 14, f. 39a, 1. 6; 5 by ra but ; s&s) Dany, with constant omission of the diacritical point, as in 7) pel and wo by qs KS ROSS Cant. ii. 7, f. 460, 1.9. m is represented by cy, as in po JIWNA, Cant. ii. 7, f. 466, 1. 10, and sometimes Dy ay a @.a5 HOM, Cant viii, 5, f 87a, L 8; n by vs, as in Sigel MYT, 1. 5. The distinction is rarely marked in the case of 2 (compare, however, *.) M3, Cant. vu. 2, f, T4a, 1. 4, and cl” N73, Cant. viii. 14, f. 940, 1. 7); and it is entirely neglected in the case of 5—The letters D and & are both represented by uw with a slanting stroke above as muhmilah; e.g., dk snop), Cant. i. 9, f. 36a, 1. 5, and Joh yaw, 1. 12. : C The Vowels. All seriptio defectiva is changed into seriptio plena—The Hebrew vowels are represented by the letters ‘, 055 \ represents kames in all positions, as in SoyclD niv3o, 1. 5; pathach and ségol only in accented syllables, ‘as in ol ans, 1 7, mylale D797, 1. 4, contrasting with ue bya 4, and iy) spy, §12bnp, 1. 9, and chdlem, as in Jy Tip, 1. 4. cS Tepresents long chirek and s 1. 7. , represents shirek, as in as in USren Px, ], 8—The Arabic vowels are also employed. athah represents pathach and chateph-pathach, as in, ne Ly DDIND, 1. 85 seal, as in “bg TBD, Cant. i. 14, F390, 1. 6, and chavephesigal, as in y50\5 1, Cant. vii. 1, f. 730, 1. 3; and : ‘ g 2 Nt ea shéva mobile at the beginning of a word, as in ,.»\,§ DYDI3, Cant. ii. 15, f. 54a, ‘héva mobile fe ig Tm - ‘ 8 4) aE oe EEA ce \. 1. 3. Kasrah represents long chirel, as it eS la, 1. 8. Dammah represents shirek, as in “sts Mp7), Cant. viii. 14, f 946, 1. 7; and long hibbis, as in poloyts Dye, Cant. ii. 15, f. 54a, 1. 3. 1. Jazmah is used (a) as shévd quiescens, over the final consonant of a shut. D. Other orthographic signs. syllable, as in (yc “TW, Cant. i, 12, f. 388, 1 1, cs the middle of a word, as in ey or ) ‘maw, Cant. ii. 3, f. 43a, 1. 9; (B) as shéva mobile, in 55, Cant. viii. 11, f. 92a, 1. 9; (y) over \ and 4 as long vowels, as in \ MDP, Cant. iii, 2, f. 560, 1. 9; (8) over \ with preceding fathah Cilla "On, Cant. ii. 11, f 496, 11; Uy Cant. ii. 11, 2 (pathach or ségol) in accented syllables, as in oo \b 103, Cant. i, 12, f. 38%, 1. ee) is) feel Oil ls 2. Tashdid is used (a) as daghesh lene (see the remarks on the letters n 5) 97.2.3); (8) as daghesh forte necessarium, as in Sys DIN, 18; (y) as daghesh forte euphonicum, as in es sly J77Mby2, Cant. i. 11, f. 38a, 1.6;15 2 TDIPN, Cant. ii. 2, f. 560, 1. 9; Cesky be MDT, Cant. vii. 7, f 80a, 1. 12. 3. The use of hamzah may be seen from the following examples: ao) “NS, Cant. i. 8, f. 35a, 1. 25 (ey) ADs, 2 Bes Ganteiiis tot, lls Gls 128), Cant. ii. 16, f£ 54a, 1 7; Lale TI0RY, Cant. i. 7, f. 34a, 1.1; cds Yn, slid NDT, Cant. i. 4, f 300, 1 6; cole 2 NN, Cant. i. 8, f 35a, I. 1. Cant. i. 6, f. 326, 1. 8; dlud Gatherings. Usually of ten leaves, signed with | 2 appears in different forms. Compare US 1. 2, with Arabic letters. The quires of each book are separately | es ii A, Ba cael yds, IL Gar kes 1. 8, with numbered. | ae \,s and rey Ng, 1. 11.—Final iS is often joined to a w Writing. A clear and rather elegant Nashi, inclin- ing at times to be cursive. The purely Arabic portion preceding 5, as in (cade; eo: SO9>; 1,12. Ob- of the manuscript exhibits very few vowels, and the serve its shape cniitiiese’ words, nd San ae) Lo diacritical points are frequently omitted. ad Punctuation. ae end of a biblical verse is usually r «, as in Il, 5, 8 (: predominates) ; less Reverted 2 is pointed above, as in 2-, 1. 12.—Alif is (which stands throughout the manuscript for co): marked by : frequently wpe a single point; still more rarely by «: 0 : often joined to preceding lam, as in dhl, 1. 6; and or -:@-. Pauses in the commentary are marked by a n small space being left blank usually in e\s When separate, it is often slightly sma 2 ig ank, Forms of Letters, ete. = and £ appear sometimes curved to the left at the lower extremity, as in val = é k by way of contrast to & and ¢ (which are often with- re) ha, 1.12. Lam-alif is either \, as in rae and out the ee ee iealel as the represen- Syes, 9, or ¥, as in oe shyt : Dea, Re 1 tatives of Heb. m and in contradistinction to A = ae, i 5 7 . é P yy, Fn EAC GSR ae 2 Tashdid is +, as in ll. 4, 7, 8, 12. It is sometimes and 2 = 3 (often without the diacritical point, especially placed between the letters and their diacritical points. a) and Cr are distinguished from 5 and oe by —dJazmah is closed, °.. Hamzah is * ; it is not written the rbinila in the form of a crescent or line, j ” oo in forms like ols, 1. 10. dll, Ea) les, Vis anc Goss Leclal ope Wb | \,a> Mes Cosy of ils dd) yx? ed SS Sete oy LT Ue LA a eC) (Isaiah, ch. Ixii. 4) =|) ig) Com S @) Je Vosi-tie pyjlale Je alae bb) oo op Jo @ ¢ Sysl a_ (5) cle) de ob, Jes! ke lb Lb Vad Yoyo coogdy Cee (6) abs) daegs |; gm alee ay9) 4) rad Uded Lyd (7) “FG oo aces Sahl ye Boer alts © Voy CaBl, Ves Vdya CULM eee) 4) Cie) Cd) Coady ale (9) 9) ow the GUL L a tole 4) MS Copy CS, ox ES, (TpWAT) LE pe) Cy (PRT) Cad) Gls a oe es los GD peas re) 2 ope S99 dst eigid — calyy (PY) jets dy Os vy mba yrap) celle (12) g Ox fe [For the description of this plate, and of plate XCVIII., the Committee are indebted to Dr. R. Hoerning, of the Department of Manuscripts, British Museum, who will shortly publish a special work on these manuscripts. ] XCVIL Jessel Soya SE ii : iain oc erg, brad ena a Weak chins: rei | Ly ee as <<) wer as Ooms bi Fun ake of ; Pie abit, bet = eure! oka sisayy ee fn Spe ee | BOOK OF EXODUS.—{xt¥ Genz) BRIT. MUS., ORIENT. MS. 2540. Prare XCVIUI—Hesrew-Aranic, eee British Musgum. Orrenrat 2540.—[Xtu cent] FRAGMENT of a Karaite Pentateuch, containing Exodus, ch. i. 1—ch. v: [ \ 9 in. by 7; 21 leaves, the first of which is blank ; 7 text is written in Arabic characters, and h 5. On paper, about to 10 lines in a page. The Hebrew as been subsequently furnished with the Hebrew vowel- points (in red) and the accents (in green). The plate represents f. 156, and contains Exodus, ch. v. 21 (beginning with 2yN-nNd)—ch. vi. 3 (ending with *my7ia). A. The Hebrew Text. The text is divided into open and closed sections, which differ in part from those of the teatus receptus. Thus the open section ch. ii. 1 ig closed in the manuscript, while the closed section ch. vi. 29 is open in the manuscript. There is also an additional open section in the manuscript at ch. iv. 21, beginning pens: The commencement of the pericope or hebdomadal section $4) (see the plate) is marked in the margin by the word cope) (Mv), written in Kufic characters in gold. The number of verses in the preceding pericope, naw ‘Dd, is registered at the end (l. 7) as 124, in agreement with the number fixed by the Massoreth (see Ginsburg’s Massorah, vol. ii. p. 465, rub. 373, §13). The sacred name myn is always rendered by , to which the punctuator has added kames, (see ll. 1, 4, 9, 10). B. The Consonants. The hard and the aspirated pronunciations of the letters n 5 3723 are carefully distinguished in the case of } and 3. 3 is represented by _, as in, style CO’, ch. ii. 22, f. 75, 1.1, but the Bea hah a ts ys 72: » 11, diacritical point is very rarely added; 3 by a as in els 733, ch. v. 11, f. 144, 1. 3, but the diacritical point is yenerally omitted, as i le vp ile ve ji ilies ale F “ey aasyora generally omitted, as in pled for ile g) 932977, 1. 1; plojle for poy Dv, 1. 6. 3 is represented by as in \A\¢ 9, 1. 4, but the diacritical point is usually wanting, as in WL for slo. Towa, 1.3. Mm is represented by cy, as in Gksls sunnzw, 1. 2, and coeldy spi, 1.10; n by Cy, as in ere) ‘npn, ch. vi. 4, f. 16a, 1.1; 4 by 3, and 7 by 5, as in ald cd raw), ch. v. 15, f. 15a, 1.1; but owing to the frequent omission of the diacritical points, the distinction is rarely v S as in ee Ns) O) a Suby: ble. G»=3 is very rarely marked. 5 is always Cs, whether hard or aspirated.—, ,3 represents W (the point is over the first apex, as in Y) as in cHly av, 1.1; in contradistinction to U*=ty as in Lech Mwys, 1. 5, and D, as in RS ay ADI), ch. i. 5, f. 35,1. 5. These points however are due to the rubricator; the scribe used CS for w (as appears from the solitary ee Wa, ch. vii. 6, £194, 1. 2) and ow for y and p. C. The Vowels and Diaeritical Signs. All scriptio defectiva is changed into seriptio plena. The vowel-letters \ 9 cs Tepresent the Hebrew vowels,—| represents kdmes in all positions, as in py) oy), Led mod and md, 1. 2; pathach and ségol in accented syllables, as in jy 9 7O8°), 1 1 (contrasted with Gels Sala la I; 2); cyl an, |. 1 (contrasted with ons WN, 1. 4); and séré, chiefly in accented syllables, as in ple J 32299? ib ak, Jer, oym, 1. 8, yet also eh yon, 1. By represents shrek or long kibbis, as in shes mai, 5, Pale 77729, ch. vi. 4, f. 16a, 1. 2, and chdlem, as in Liye mun, ll. 1, 4, Ou represents long chirek, as er ‘nna, |. 3, pdeecley yTayy, ch. i. 13, f. 40, 1. 2, and séré, chiefly in unaccented syllables, as in oy) pox, 1. 8, \als N7N}, 1. 9, yet also ds, TAT 1, 8.—The Hebrew vowel-signs (in red), accents and makkgph (in green), are added to the Arabic characters in the same way as to the Hebrew square characters. vowel-signs — | ch. iii. 7, £. 86, 1. 2. ni poe for séré in si my ney myn, |. 2 ) in ¢3¥ nn? 11, || al oNy, 1.95 GIG & have been omitted by an oversight. Gatherings. Apparently of ten leaves, but not signed. ; : Ruling. Very faint side-lines drawn with a dry point. Punctuation. © marks the end of a verse, thus 2,4, ete. In a taking the place of soph-pasik, Il. 1, 2, considerable number of instances the division of the verses is not noted, as after ch. i. 15, f. 46, 1 6; ch. ii. 13, f£. 68, 1.5; ete. The rubricator has supplied this omission in some places by the insertion of the usual soph-pasitk }, ©... at the end of ch. i. 9, f. 4a, 1. 4, and ch. i. 14, f. 46,1. 4. Re Writing. A clear but peculiar Nashi. The diacri- tical points are mostly wanting. > represent also the chatéph-vowels; e.g., ho mpra, 1. 5; Lol Toys, 1. 5; The simple 1, Chélem is always represented by the Arabic dammah (note ¥ 85, IL 4, 10). Observe pathach conbui, 1. 5.—Daghesh forte is represented by tashdid, as in cuhy avn, 1. 1, \, wy Iya —Methegh is frequently placed to the right of the vowel, as in Jnl 818), 1.9. It is omitted Ls,le) cov, 1. 6; and expressed by an ‘alif in Lol nips, 1. 5, poslle Waa, 1. 6, apy, 1. 9.—Makkeph is sometimes omitted after ON and My, and the vowel furnished with methegh, as in J's \ Npxp ny, ch. vi. 5, f. 16a, 1. 3.—Makkeph after cS) “Ox, 1.8, and the accent of I my, L 2, Forms of Letters, ete. end, either to the right or left, as in lg, 1 4. Standing by itself, it is usually curved to the left at \ is often bent at the upper the lower end, as in N, IA y\Sare| \auleo emia lam-alif ¥ the right-hand limb is the ’alif; but if annexed, the form is \\, as in Pah 1, 8.—Observe the thick top of 5) and 5 in Ns hs ye, ik, aly ea letters, as well as Y frequently touch a following letter, These as in \ i. as polly 1. 6; Liew ll. 1, 8.—Remark the large size of initial oor Fp nin WIGS TR Cre 1%, and 2 d,)\, 1, 8; and the peculiar way in which lam and hai are joined in am, usually somewhat bent to the left at the top, is readily dis- tinguished from haf; compare ,\y<), |. 3, Gels i, Be lads, 1, 3, and Ju 1. 9, with Ss 1.5, and GSS 5, 1. '7.—Medial ha is not unfrequently used for the initial ning of a word, as in eh, 394, ch. iv. 2¢ 1. 8.— Tushdid has always the ordinary form. Ornamentation. The text is preceded by two full- page illuminations (ff. 26, 3a), consisting of flower-like designs in outline, within circles, bounded by borders of gold. The blank spaces caused by the open and closed sections are filled up with ornaments in red, green, and gold, of various designs, specimens of which may be seen in the plate. XCIX. ES eT aon onsdhae Sed fiaretinl alec ooh eee OSA atone’ sash ands Ebi Gente) soaks oeCsasaciy SoaSaIA CAN ei’ AS serie i peereaaaen ole gomls dries hice) 0329 eas: MN nam sSare aire CIF : SG re seenics ps aati? Pie 4 Asa onal oan Le qesrerasa 9CGl Gass y Dee sian schon goers eleven: heals i SOs Cogs sony GOSPELS.—A.D. 600. BRIT. MUS., ADD. MS. 14,460. Pirate XCIX.—Syrtiac. British Museum. App. 14,460.—A.D. 600. fg four Gospels, according to the Péshitta version. On vellum, about 7h in. by 43; 104 leaves, 30 to 37 lines in a page. Written in the Nestorian college at a place called Dinawad or Dinabad (?), in the diocese of Béth-Nuahadré (in Arabic Ba-Nuhadra, (5,045), in the —) tenth year of the reign of Khosrau Parwéz, or Chosroes II, A. Gr. 911=A.D. 600. On the name of the place, which is doubtful, see G. Hoffmann. Ausz ige aus syrischen Akten persischer Martyrer (Abhandlungen fiir die Kunde des Morgenlandes, Bd vii, No. 3), pp. 218-9; and on the date, Noeldeke, Geschichte der Perser und Araber zur Zeit der M Gospel, ch. xvii. 9-28. saniden, p. 430. See also Wright, Catalogue of Syriac in the British Museum, p. 52, no. Ixxvi. The plate represents f 68a, containing 8. Luke's Gatherings. The quires, mostly of 10 leaves, are Interpunction. Fully developed. Paragraphs are now signed with letters. What the original signatures marked by different combinations of black and red were, if any, does not appear. circlets, as in Il. 3 and 16. The division of the text Ruling. Fine side-lines, with cross-lines at the head into large sections is noted on the margin by letter- and foot of each page. numerals, as in the plate p, 17. Writing. A small, elegant Estrangéla. There are no vowels, but the diacritical points are freely used. ‘ é oan ROY x4 £ EBON. Bens grat 08 + "TACUXOTOY NXE one m1 éme ICOTMCTVTHEY'T. . expe ova, ARB THICENTIOG “ITEM COTIAG NTE TAIN AICNOYUNT ICEYT Henrweeooya TIEQEp Dusyvi eT Taino erecoxvar MrT AB BRETT ITTe he Bebra EWE THC aK aor quGe Mpa NGUOTHOY - GyEnacco’t | fat IG UNGNIs GAOT EGP (popinu TCG ARHATNG GMO? san Gmicnkortes iG TGNe. Sieewortiiiti savior uay zara DG TNSIGUILXTINRIGC(OOY 4 Serecipe in rape WATASpp re GrGMGAXINATAUGNH Gyan ANAIANUOYIGT.CH HOVKOT X= VYIGXeF NOT nOTGHx WGPLoevun NNT ACD HPIG TAU APT OV TNE _ PF GaoxerroTrgumne: NMS G OTABABHATIGGNTIOG 1s TGYUGYyhHOTY - ‘CXDGOTHCADAETY xeeyor! Or) INNIGGwos NTEVGYyey * 4+ orwNN LAK > AHAB GT EAOG MOSES, BISHOP OF COPTUS, PANEGYRIC ON ABBA PISENTIUS—a.p. 918, VATICAN LIB., COD. COPT. 66. Prate C.—Copric. Vatican Liprary. Cop. Corr. 66. A.D. 918. \ VOLUME made up of several manuscripts or parts of manuscripts, and containing the mar- tyrdom of Ignatius, the life of the abbat Senuti or Sanutius, the martyrdom of Isaac of Dephre ( Collectio, t. v., pp. 161-2. See also Assemani, Bibliotheca 5 35); and various other articles, as given by Angelo Mai in his Seriptorum Veterum Nova Orientals, t. i, p. 618, no. xv.; Révillout, Apocryphes Coptes du Nouveau Testament, p. x. (where the editor describes it in a foot-note as “peut-étre le plus précieux de toute la collection copte du Vatican”), The plate represents the first page of no. 5, ff. 124-155, which, according to Mai, contains “Mosis urbis Copti” (Komrés, xeyr, Las , “episcopi in sanctum patrem Pisentium seu Basnodium, ejusdem urbis episcopum, laudatio secundum ea quae sibi de eodem sancto retulit Iohannes ipsius discipulus”; and to this portion of the volume alone the following description applies. On vellum, about 133 in. by 103; 36 leaves, 33 to 35 lines in a page. Written by one Jacob, in the year of the Martyrs 634 = A.D. 918, according to the subscription on f. 155 a. Ticazoe satiavioe 26a micemf awn Hesran THpos agent 5 arent 5 agent ~ Apibares: semixwh mpeqeproks erTagqcDat raKwk Tenge ARLHIT % naw [maiwr] cenovf ~@ rirwa ocasee faxTon wrey Tadrenwpoc sebeock ~ OCpon Tw arion A aes The blessing of the holy Abba Pisenti be With us all. Amen, Amen, Amen. Remember the sinful servant who wrote, Jacob, the son of our father Senuti, the son of John Khame (or, the black). May the Lord grant rest unto his miserable soul. Amen. Gatherings. Four quires of eight leaves and one quire of four leaves, signed, on the first and last pages, at the top, with Greek-Coptic letter-numerals. In addi- tion, the last page of each quire has, at the top, THC nace (Jesus the Christ), and the first page of the next quire mar mart (have mercy upon us); except the third quire, on the first leaf of which inc m9¢c is repeated. The pages of the quires are also numbered (though not invariably) with the letter-numerals at the top. Ruling. With a dry point. Double side-lines, and 17 horizontal lines. The first line of writing on each [For as In the year of the holy Martyrs 634. page usually stands below the ruled line, and there are, generally speaking, two lines of writing between each pair of ruled lines. Writing. Ordinary Coptic capitals and uncials, be- coming smaller and more cursive in the heading and subscription. Ornamentation. The first letter of the text is filled in with an interlaced pattern of lines in yellow, red, and green, the first of the three colours predominating. A broad border of a similar character surrounds three sides of the page. stance in the description of this plate the Committee are indebted to Professor Dr. Ignazio Guidi, of Rome.] i papas “GETTY RESEARCH INSTITUTE i 3 3125 01046 8029